‘Constructive Tone’ Now Emerging Among World Trade Organization Members On IP Waiver for COVID Health Products 07/10/2021 Elaine Ruth Fletcher WTO chief spokesperson Keith Rockwell Discussions over a controversial World Trade Organization waiver on intellectual property related to COVID vaccines, treatments and other tools, have become more “constructive” said a senior WTO spokesman on Thursday, in a press briefing on the first day of the WTO’s two-day General Council meeting. There has been a “subtle shifting in the direction of compromise from both sides,” said WTO chief spokesman Keith Rockwell, holding out hope of a possible agreement on the bitterly disputed initiative in time for the WTO’s big Ministerial Council meeting (MC12), November 30-12 December. A waiver on intellectual property rights, enshrined in WTO’s TRIPS agreement, was first proposed by South Africa and India last year, as a way to expedite manufacture of desperately-needed COVID health products in lower-income countries that have lacked both capacity to make their own COVID vaccines and therapeutics, as well as purchasing power to acquire patented versions. But the initiative has also seen stiff opposition from developed countries, led by Germany and other EU nations, which contend that it could harm, rather than help, fledgling initiatives already underway to expand manufacturing capacity – and locate more of that capacity in low- and middle-income countries. The TRIPS waiver initiative is now co-sponsored directly by some 18 low- and middle-income countries along with dozens more nations affiliated with the WTO “African Group” as well as the “Least Developed Country (LDC) Group”. Today’s more positive tone at the WTO General Council followed on an announcement by Moderna, one of the world’s two top manufacturers of the newest, and most successful mRNA COVID vaccines, that it would invest in a state-of the-art mRNA vaccine facility in Africa capable of producing up to 500 million doses a year. (see related HPW story). In terms of ambition, the Moderna initiative well outpaces that of Pfizer, the world’s other mRNA vaccine powerhouse to jumpstart more vaccine manufacturing on the continent. In July, Pfizer announced a partnership with South Africa’s Biovac, whereby the South African firm would perform the “fill and finish” for up to 100 million Pfizer vaccines, beginning next year. Two-pronged approach in WTO to COVID crisis While Rockwell did not cite any concrete points where progress on the waiver talks had been made, he said that the tone of discussions had changed significantly over the past two months. “While there is not an agreement on this, and I don’t want to overstate this, or be overly optimistic, I think it’s fair to say that the tone of the discussion was really quite constructive,” Rockwell stated. “There were very few highly politically charged interventions; a number of important delegations said that they were ready to look at any proposals that addressed all the concerns – the issues here are ones with which you’ll be familiar,” Rockwell observed. Those issues include high-income countries assertions that IP protections reward innovation, and have been key to the rapid development of COVID vaccines, as well as more specific objections to: “scope of the waiver, including products, and the specific intellectual property elements, considered, and the duration. And the protection of undisclosed information.” In its current formulation, the waiver be for an initial period of three years, subject to further review. It would remove not only the existing WTO TRIPS patent protections on COVID health products, but also protections on copyright, trade secrets and other types of IP. “Now, I don’t want to oversell this, but the tone was really quite different…” Rockwell said. “I think there is certainly an understanding of how important his issue is, and how short time is for us to be able to come to an agreement.” Rockwell also stressed that in addition to the highly legalistic negotiations over the IP waiver initiative, New Zealand’s WTO Ambassador, David Walker, is leading a parallel process on so-called “non-TRIPS” interventions that the WTO could take. This process, launched in June by General Council Chair Dacio Castillo, of Honduras, puts Walker in charge of finding a “multilateral and horizontal response to the COVID-19 pandemic.” Walker, a former General Council chair himself, has been leading discussions among members on how other WTO responses, could help facilitate trade in COVID health products and remove export restrictions which slow the international movement of vital goods. The process, which is “complimentary” to the TRIPS negotiations, could lead to an outcome document at MC12, Rockwell said, with both “broad political messages” as well as proposal for concrete decisions on WTO rules or regulations that could that includes both political declarations as well as proposals for concrete WTO decisions – to relieve export restrictions; foster greater regulatory coherence; and increase cooperation on issues such as tariffs that may impede access to essential medical products. “He [Walker] said that with respect to export restrictions, a large number of members had attached a very high priority to this; they said it’s been disruptive, these export restrictions, to global value chains and have made it difficult to ramp up productions,” Rockwell stated. Further work to unlock such bottlenecks could also be part of a “post-MC 12 Work Program, on trade facilitation, regulatory coherence and tariffs.” Image Credits: Shutterstock. Moderna is Urged to Work Through African Partnership to Set up mRNA Facility 07/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Moderna’s clinical development manufacturing facility in the US. Moderna should work through the Partnership for African Vaccine Manufacturing (PAVM) if it wants to invest in vaccine production on the continent, according to the head of the Africa Centers for Disease Control (CDC). The company announced on Thursday that it plans to invest $500-million in a “state-of-the-art mRNA facility” in Africa that can produce up to 500 million doses of vaccines each year. Moderna says that wants the new facility to include drug substance manufacturing, fill and finish and packaging capabilities, but it has neither chosen a country nor committed to a timeline. Africa CDC Executive Director Dr John Nkengasong said while the announcement was “very much welcome”, he had not seen the company’s media release or been informed about Moderna’s plans. Urging the manufacturer to work “very closely” with his organisation, Nkengasong added that the Africa CDC did not “tell manufacturers where to go to produce their vaccines”, but could help to facilitate their plans. “We have a Partnership for African Vaccine Manufacturing (PAVM), which has a political backing, and our wish and hope is that Moderna works with that group, which looks at vaccine manufacturing in Africa from an ecosystem perspective, from the whole of Africa approach,” Nkengasong told a media briefing on Thursday. “About 10 countries in Africa have expressed an interest in vaccine manufacturing. We can actually bring them all together and put Moderna at the centre of that to discuss and ask all the questions that will really speak to the need to be transparent, and also to be cooperative and coordinate our efforts,” said Nkengasong. He stressed that Moderna’s plan would offer relief in the middle- to long-term, but it would not solve Africa’s pressing issues related to COVID-19. These he listed as “quick access to vaccines, redistribution of vaccines, and making sure that certain licences are provided so that manufacturing can start”. Less than 5% of Africans have been vaccinated against COVID-19, and the continent has been desperately trying to buy vaccines via the African Vaccine Acquisition Trust (AVAT) in the face of massive inequity in access to vaccines. ‘Only the beginning’ Announcing its plans, Stephane Bancel, Moderna’s Chief Executive Officer, said that the company viewed its COVID-19 work as “only just beginning”. “We are determined to extend Moderna’s societal impact through the investment in a state-of-the-art mRNA manufacturing facility in Africa,” said Bancel. “While we are still working to increase capacity in our current network to deliver vaccines for the ongoing pandemic in 2022, we believe it is important to invest in the future. We expect to manufacture our COVID-19 vaccine as well as additional products within our mRNA vaccine portfolio at this facility.” However, there is speculation that part of Moderna’s motivation for making the announcement is because it is under pressure to increase production from the US government, which has invested over $8-billion in its vaccine, according to a report in Politico. Some of Moderna’s clients (extract from COVID-19 Vaccine Market Dashboard). US President Joe Biden has pledged to donate a billion vaccines to low and middle-income countries in a bid to end the COVID-19 pandemic by the end of 2022, and US government officials have reportedly had tense exchanges with Moderna officials about it not scaling up production. Moderna is also under pressure from health activists as it has almost exclusively supplied high- and middle-income countries with its vaccines via bilateral agreements. According to the COVID-19 vaccines market dashboard compiled by UNICEF, Botswana is the only African country that Moderna has supplied with COVID-19 vaccines. However, it has undertaken to supply 35 million doses to COVAX in May. Moderna had not responded to questions by the time of publication. Image Credits: Moderna. Jamaica, Nicaragua and Haiti Fail to Reach 10% COVID-19 Vaccination Target 07/10/2021 Raisa Santos Cuba is seeking WHO approval for its COVID-19 vaccines. Jamaica, Nicaragua, and Haiti were the only three member countries of the Pan American Health Organization (PAHO) that failed to meet the World Health Organization (WHO) target of vaccinating 10% of their populations against COVID-19 by the end of September. Around 37% of people in Latin America and the Caribbean have been fully vaccinated against COVID-19, while seven countries in the Americas have vaccinated more than 70% of their populations, according to PAHO. While COVID-19 cases are down in the Americas, some local trends across the region remain worrisome, PAHO officials said during a press briefing Wednesday. The Americas reported a 12% decrease in weekly new cases, according to the newest WHO Weekly Epidemiological Update on COVID-19. Worrying local trends However, local trends paint a different story. Many Southwestern Canadian provinces and the US state of Alaska are reporting their highest hospitalization rates and ICU peaks, with emergency rooms in Alaska overwhelmed with COVID-19. Chile is also seeing a rise in new cases, especially in urban regions, such as the metropolitan region of Santiago, and in port cities such as Coquimbo and Antofagasta. While cases continue to decrease in Central America, Costa Rica and Belize continue to see high rates of hospitalization and ICU peaks. In response, PAHO urged governments to remain vigilant on monitoring local COVID-19 trends in their areas. “We are reminding governments to keep a close eye on local trends because infection dynamics vary within each country, in part due to differences in vaccine availability and uptake. This small localized approach will be key to keep outbreaks under control,” PAHO Director Carissa Etienne implored. Vaccine shortages Although 875,000 vaccine doses have arrived in the region, this is not enough to protect everyone, said Etienne. “We continue to urge countries with surplus doses to share them with countries in our region, where they can have life-saving impact.” PAHO continues to deliver COVAX-funded doses and donations, having already closed agreements with three emergency use listing authorized vaccines – Sinovac, Sinopharm, and AstraZeneca. Nicaragua has recently announced that the country will receive 7 million doses of Cuban vaccines Abdala, Soberana, and Soberana 2 over the next 3 months. Cuba had released information back in June regarding the vaccines – its three-dose Abdala vaccine was 92% effective, and its Soberana 2 vaccine is 91% effective when combined with a booster vaccine called Soberana Plus. The island’s national regulatory agency approved the Abdala vaccine in July and the Soberana 2 vaccine in August. Cuba is currently trying to seek WHO approval for its two home-grown vaccines, which would facilitate their delivery in other countries. PAHO is supporting Cuba’s participation in the vaccine qualification process. “Our interest is that all vaccines are able to participate in the WHO process for granting emergency use authorization because this will broaden the supply of vaccines that we are able to purchase through the Revolving Fund,” said PAHO’s Assistant Director Jarbas Barbosa. For now, PAHO is working with the Nicaraguan government to increase its vaccine access – the country is receiving 223,000 doses from Pfizer starting next week, and an additional 81,900 vaccines from Pfizer are to be received over the rest of the month. Nicaragua is receiving other vaccines through COVAX, as well as vaccine donations from Spain. Image Credits: News Prensa Latina/Twitter. WHO Approves First Ever Malaria Vaccine 06/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Children under the age of five years in sub-Saharan Africa continued to account for approximately two-thirds of global deaths from malaria. The World Health Organization (WHO) has given the go-ahead for children to get the first-ever malaria vaccine in areas where there is a high to moderate risk of infection. The vaccine, known as RTS,S, is the first to have been approved against a parasitic disease. It has been tested on 800,000 children in Ghana, Kenya and Malawi over two years as part of routine immunisations and found to reduce severe malaria-related hospitalisation by 30% and clinical malaria by 40%, researchers revealed at a WHO press conference on Wednesday. “This is a historic moment. The long-awaited malaria vaccine for children is a breakthrough for science, child health and malaria control,” said WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, who started his medical career as a malaria researcher. “Using this vaccine on top of existing tools to prevent malaria could save tens of thousands of young lives each year.” The WHO recommends that the vaccine – which acts against P. falciparum, the deadliest malaria parasite – is given in four doses to children from the age of five months to around 18 months. Tedros said that progress against malaria “has stalled at an unacceptably high level, with more than 200 million cases, and 400,000 deaths every year – two-thirds of which are children under five in Africa”. “Every two minutes, a child under five dies of malaria,” said Dr Matshidiso Moeti, WHO Regional Director for Africa, adding that 94% of malaria cases were in Africa. Dr Matshidiso Moeti, WHO Regional Director of Africa. “We have long hoped for an effective malaria vaccine and now for the first time ever, we have such a vaccine recommended for widespread use.” Moeti added that the WHO would support the production of the vaccine in Africa. However, GlaxoSmithKline (GSK), which has invested US$ 700 million in the development of RTS,S and donated up to 10 million doses for the pilot programme, will be working with an Indian generic producer to manufacture the vaccine for the foreseeable future. “GSK was clear at the time, as we’ve proceeded with this vaccine that, having provided a large degree of development funding and producing the vaccine for the implementation programme, was nevertheless seeking a tech transfer partner for the long term production of this vaccine,” said Dr Kate O’Brien, WHO head of immunisation. “There was a programme opened up to initiate interest from vaccine manufacturers and the partner who will be with GSK for this tech transfer is Bharat Biotech in India.” Protect children’s development Dr Alejandro Cravioto, Chair of the WHO Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on Immunization (SAGE), said that his group recommended the use of the vaccine to ensure the healthy growth and development of children. “The experience we have had before with other infections showed us clearly that a child that is repetitively sick is maimed for life,” said Cravioto. “He or she is not capable of developing the capacities that he or she is born with, in the sense of achieving an adulthood that will be meaningful. So having anything that protects them, or helps them to be less sick during this growth phase, is essential.” Global vaccine alliance, Gavi, health agency Unitaid and the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria committed nearly US$ 70 million to fund the pilot, which was designed to address several outstanding questions related to the public health use of the vaccine following the Phase 3 trial showing efficacy of RTS,S. “We welcome this new tool in the fight against malaria,” said Peter Sands, Executive Director of the Global Fund. “In countries where the Global Fund invests, we have reduced malaria deaths by 45% since 2002 with testing, treatment and prevention tools such as mosquito nets. “In the vaccine pilots, the RTS,S vaccine was most effective when used together with these existing tools. Significant additional resources will be necessary to enable wide deployment of the vaccine alongside other innovations, and as part of a sustained and comprehensive response in the countries that need it the most.” Following the WHO recommendation, global stakeholders, including Gavi, will consider whether and how to finance a new malaria vaccination programme for countries in sub-Saharan Africa, according to a statement by Gavi, the Global Fund and Unitaid. The vaccine will complement other WHO-recommended measures for malaria prevention, including the use of insecticide-treated bed nets, indoor spraying with insecticides, malaria chemoprevention strategies, and the timely use of malaria testing and treatment. Image Credits: WHO. African Medicines Agency Will Come into Being on 5 November – after 15th African Country Ratifies & Deposits AMA Treaty 06/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan The African Medicines Agency’s framework would help combat falsified products Africans are a step closer to speedier access to newer, safer medicines following this week’s notification by 15 African Union (AU) member countries that they have formally ratified and deposited their accord to create a new African Medicines Agency (AMA). Although the AU adopted the treaty to set up the AMA back in February 2019, 15 African countries had to formally notify the AU Commission that they had ratified the treaty before the agency could be set up. On Tuesday, Cameroon became the 15th country to deposit its ratification instrument – finally pushing the AMA over the threshold into reality. According to the Treaty, the AMA will now come into force in 30 days time – on 5 November. The AMA aims to support African countries to better regulate medical products and harmonise the regulation of medicines across the continent. It will also test samples of medicines from time to time to eliminate fakes that plague the continent. The 14 other countries to have both ratified the AMA and “deposited the instrument of ratification” at the AU (a letter from the head of state informing it of ratification) are Algeria, Benin, Burkina Faso, Gabon, Guinea, Mali, Mauritius, Namibia, Niger, Rwanda, Seychelles, Sierra Leone and Zimbabwe. A further three countries have ratified the treaty but not formally informed the AU, while eight more have signed the treaty but not yet ratified it. This means 36 of Africa’s 55 countries – predominantly Francophone countries – have expressed support for the AMA. However, African powerhouses Ethiopia, Nigeria and South Africa have not yet expressed their support for the AMA. Today, we celebrate as AMA made it to the finish line. 15th instrument of ratification received by the @_AfricanUnion and the 30 day count down for AMA to enter into force has officially began! Congratulations to the member states that have made this possible See infographic 👇 pic.twitter.com/4IqLRLEIqP — Dorothy Njagi (@Dottienjagi) October 5, 2021 The COVID-19 pandemic has highlighted the need for countries to speedily assess medicines and vaccines, a capacity that a number of African countries lack. The African Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has played a central role in co-ordinating the health response to the pandemic on the continent, and highlighted the value of a continental player during a health crisis. Greg Perry, Assistant Director-General of the International Federation of Pharmaceutical Manufacturers and Associations (IFPMA), welcomed the AMA’s ratification, describing it as taking “one step closer to achieving a continent-wide regulatory agency”. “We look forward to the full implementation of the AMA,, which will be a game-changer for all Africans to access safe, effective and quality medical products in a timely manner,” said Perry. Pharmaceutical companies have long complained about how complicated it is to get medicines approved in Africa and how long it takes particularly in comparison to Europe, which processes applications via a central European Medicines Agency (EMA). Perry added that for the agency to become fully operational, it was important for the AU to define the appropriate funding model and engage with the African Medicines Regulatory Harmonisation initiative “which has already set strong governance structures and pan-African guidance in place for the approval of COVID-19 treatments and vaccines”. Reduce barriers to African market entry Andy Gray, senior lecturer in pharmacology at the University of KwaZulu-Natal, said that AMA’s greatest potential lies “in the field of harmonisation of regulatory systems, which should reduce the barriers to market entry in Africa”. “The AMA is not intended to be a supranational regulator, and will not make decisions in the way the EMA does, but it could help in bringing national medicines regulatory authorities together, simplifying systems and reducing redundancy,” explained Gray. “It can also make a major difference by promoting transparency of regulatory action across the continent, and showing how that can drive reliance models of regulation.” Gray added that the AMA could learn lessons from the Africa CDC by providing “visible and credible leadership”, ensuring “practical outputs, not just talk” and ensure it had recognition in appropriate global forums. Today is a historic day. #Cameroon became the 15 country to deposit the instrument of ratification of the African Medicines Agency. Now, the treaty will enter into force in 30 days (Nov 5). #AMA is a game change on our continent.@AUC_MoussaFaki @PR_Paul_BIYA pic.twitter.com/0KOYh5EEvk — Michel Sidibé (@MichelSidibe) October 5, 2021 Earlier this year, Michel Sidibé, the former Executive Director of UNAIDS and Mali’s Minister of Health, was appointed as the AU’s Special Envoy for the AMA. He has been leading efforts to ensure that countries ratify the agency, and could be in the running to head it. Announcing Cameroon’s ratification of the AMA on Twitter this week, Sidibé described the agency as a “game-changer for our continent”. Image Credits: United States Army , Marco Verch/Flickr. African Countries are the Focus of New Maternal Mortality Targets 05/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan UNFPA Executive Director Dr Natalia Kanem Nineteen countries have been prioritised for support to implement new global targets aimed at preventing maternal and newborn deaths. This emerged at the launch on Tuesday of the new targets, which were developed by the World Health Organization (WHO), UN Population Fund (UNFPA) and their partners in the Ending Preventable Maternal Mortality (EPMM) initiative. UNFPA Executive Director Dr Natalia Kanem said that while the global community had committed to reducing the global maternal mortality rates to 70 deaths per 100,000 live births by 2030 as part of the sustainable development goals (SDG), it was not moving fast enough. “If the current pace prevails, we will not reach this goal before 2065,” said Kanem. “This is a wake-up call for us to urgently scale up and accelerate our efforts with less than 10 years to go.” Fourteen of the chosen countries are in Africa and include Chad, which has one of the highest maternal mortality rates in the world, as well as Nigeria and Ethiopia. The five non-African countries are Afghanistan, Pakistan, Mexico, Nepal and Laos. The 19 priority countries identified for action against maternal mortality. The 19 countries will get support to implement and monitor the targets, according to the UN agency officials. There are five targets: 90% pregnant women to attend four or more antenatal care visits (towards increasing to eight visits by 2030); 90% of births to be attended by skilled health personnel; 80% of women who have just given birth to access postnatal care within two days of delivery; 60% of the population to have access to emergency obstetric care within two hours of travel time; 65% of women to be able to make informed and empowered decisions regarding sexual relations, contraceptive use, and their reproductive health. Country selection involved a number of factors including a high burden of maternal deaths and stillbirths, the strength of country midwifery and whether there were partners to support the ministries of health, according to World Health Organization’s (WHO) Dr Anshu Banerjee, Director for Maternal, Child and Adolescent Health and Ageing. Preventable deaths Addressing the launch, WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus said that around 295,000 women died each year due to complications of pregnancy and childbirth, and there were two million stillbirths and 2.4 million newborn deaths annually. “Most of these deaths are in low and middle-income countries,” said Tedros. “Most of these [deaths] could have been prevented with quality pre- and post-natal care and birthing assistance from competent maternal and newborn health professionals,” said Tedros. “The COVID 19 pandemic has badly disrupted essential health services around the world, including for maternal and newborn care. WHO is supporting countries to resume these services regardless of a woman’s COVID-19 status,” he added. Most maternal deaths are preventable with the right care at the right time. Women must get access to healthcare, and this care must: ✅ be of high quality. ✅ meet the needs of families ✅ treat them with dignity and respect. https://t.co/DhTF3jxQB0 pic.twitter.com/TNqBsiyyfx — World Health Organization (WHO) (@WHO) October 5, 2021 In 2017, the global maternal mortality ratio was around 211 maternal deaths per 100,000 live births, which was a 38% reduction compared to 2000 – a reduction of around 2,9% per year. “Universal health coverage, including universal access to sexual and reproductive health care, will be key to providing equitable access to quality maternal health services,” said Kanem. Kanem said that her agency, the WHO and partners are “committed to helping countries achieve coverage targets by implementing action-oriented plans, and by tracking progress at the national and sub-national levels”. She stressed that the targets “also incorporate key determinants of maternal health, including a woman’s ability to make decisions about her own sexual and reproductive health”. The SDG 3.1 sets out that by 2030, the global maternal mortality ratio (MMR) should be reduced to less than 70 per 100,000 live births, and no country should have an MMR more than 140 per 100,000 live births. “The latest estimates are 211 per 100,000 live births – but increasing to 415 on average in the poorest countries,” according to the WHO. Pfizer Vaccine Effective Against COVID-19 Hospitalizations for All Variants 05/10/2021 Raisa Santos Two jabs of the Pfizer-BioNTech vaccine are 90% effective against COVID-19 hospitalizations for all variants including Delta, for at least 6 months, confirmed a new study published by The Lancet. The study, conducted by Kaiser Permanete and Pfizer, found that while effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, effectiveness against hospitalizations remains at 90% overall for all variants. “Our study confirms that vaccines are a critical tool for controlling the pandemic and remain highly effective in preventing severe disease and hospitalization, including from the delta and other variants of concern. Protection against infection does decline in the months following a second dose,” said lead author of the study Dr Sara Tartof, of Kaiser Permanente. The study analyzed 3,436,957 electronic health records from the Kaiser Permanente Southern California (KPSC) health system between 4 December 2020 and 8 August 2021 to assess the effectiveness of the Pfizer vaccine against COVID-19 infections and related hospitalizations. Immunity declines after six months In addition, the study also found that effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, falling from 88% within one month after receiving two doses to 47% after six months, underscoring the importance of improving vaccination rates worldwide. Researchers did not observe a difference in waning between variants. While this does provide evidence towards waning immunity against COVID-19, the CDC has called for additional research to determine which groups should be prioritized to receive booster shots. “In line with the recent FDA [3] and CDC recommendations [4], considerations for booster shots should take global COVID-19 vaccine supply into account as people in many countries around the world have not yet received a primary vaccination series,” said Tartof. Vaccine equity and booster shots have prompted increasing debate in recent weeks, with WHO calling for a global moratorium on COVID-19 boosters to be extended until the end of the year, and global health advocates protesting “vaccine apartheid” outside the UN during the General Assembly last month. US and Israeli studies find similar reductions in immunity Other findings from the US Centers for Disease Control (CDC) and the Israeli Ministry of Health had also found reductions of immunity from the Pfizer vaccine after six months. The Israeli findings reported that people over age 60 who received a third dose of the Pfizer vaccine were five times less likely to become severely ill if they had their first shot at least five months earlier. These results in particular were regarded as a critical factor in the recommendation from the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) to amend its emergency use authorization (EUA) last month for the Pfizer vaccine. The FDA now recommends a single booster dose to be administered at least six months after completion for: individuals 65 and older; individuals 18 through 64 at high risk of severe COVID-19; and individuals 18 through 64 with increased exposure of SARS-CoV-2 that puts them at high risk of health complications relating to COVID-19. Image Credits: International Monetary Fund/Ernesto Benavides. Indian Generic Companies Are Ready to Make Merck’s COVID-19 Antiviral Pill 04/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Molnupiravir could make a significant difference to the global response to COVID-19. Indian generic drug manufacturers are poised to make the antiviral pill, molnupiravir, which halved hospitalisations in a trial of high-risk people with COVID-19. Merck, which developed molnupiravir in collaboration with Ridgeback Biotherapeutics, has awarded non-exclusive, voluntary licensing agreements to eight generic companies in India since April in anticipation of positive trial results. According to Merck, it has been producing molnupiravir “at risk” and expects to produce 10 million courses of treatment by the end of 2021, the company said a media release last Friday. Merck cut short the trial of molnupiravir in the light of the good results, and will make an application for emergency use authorisation (EUA) with the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA), “as soon as possible”, the company said. It will also submit “marketing applications to other regulatory bodies worldwide”, it added. Australia’s Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) granted provisional determination for molnupiravir in August. Meanwhile, in anticipation of regulatory approval, the Access to COVID-19 Tools (ACT) Accelerator is working to “secure volumes” of the pills for people in LMICs, according to ACT-Accelerator partner Unitaid. “Effective, simple to use, oral treatments that can avert the progression to severe illness are exactly the kind of breakthroughs we need to get the pandemic under control. Deployed alongside vaccines, such medicines could drive down hospitalizations and deaths due to COVID-19,” said Dr Philippe Duneton, Executive Director of Unitaid shortly after the Merck announcement. Few treatment options At present, there are very few treatment options for people infected with COVID-19, and those that exist – such as remdesivir and dexamethasone – are expensive, given intravenously or by injections and only for severely ill people already in hospital. White House medical adviser Dr Anthony Fauci told CNN on Sunday that the medicine was “extremely important”. “It’s a pill that’s given by mouth, so you don’t need anything special other than taking a pill the way you take any pill. And the results are really quite impressive,” said Fauci. However, he said that it only halved the risk of hospitalisation and to cut this risk by 100% people should “not get infected in the first place”. Back in April, Merck entered into voluntary licensing agreements with five Indian companies – Cipla, Dr Reddy’s Laboratories, Emcure Pharmaceuticals, Hetero Labs and Sun Pharmaceutical Industries. All are World Health Organization (WHO) pre-qualified manufacturing facilities. It has since licensed Aurobindo Pharma, Torrent Pharmaceuticals, and Viatris, to manufacture the drug. At least four of the companies are already manufacturing generic molnupirvir, which they have been supplying to a trial in India and all eight are ready for global supply, according to MSD India. When it announced the licensing back in April, Merck said the intention was to enable the manufacturers to “supply molnupiravir to India and more than 100 low and middle-income countries (LMICs)”. No deaths in trial The molnupiravir trial involved 775 unvaccinated adults with mild-to-moderate COVID-19 with at least one risk factor for serious illness – most commonly, obesity, being over the age of 60, and living with diabetes and heart disease. Only 7,3% of those taking molnupiravir ended up in hospital in comparison to 14,1% of those on the placebo, announced Merck (known as MSD outside the US and Canada) in a media release last Friday. “Twenty-nine days into the trial, no deaths were reported in patients who received molnupiravir, as compared to eight deaths in patients who received placebo,” it added. The trial was conducted globally, including at sites in Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Egypt, France, Germany, Guatemala, Israel, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Philippines, Poland, Russia, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Taiwan, Ukraine, the United Kingdom and the US. Meanwhile, in June the US government ordered approximately 1.7 million courses of molnupiravir at a cost of $1.2 billion – about $700/patient – according to a June media release from Merck. However, this price is equal to about 35 times the estimated sustainable generic price using current market prices for the active pharmaceutical ingredients (API), according to Melissa J Barber from Harvard University’s Department of Global Health and Population and Dzintars Gotham from King’s College Hospital in London. “Assuming optimization of molnupiravir synthesis, and a resulting drop in API cost, the US price would be equal to about 161 times the estimated sustainable generic price,” the two researchers noted in a brief published last Friday. They identified that three companies appeared to be exporting API for molnupiravir – Optimus Drugs Private, Honour Lab, and Maithri Laboratories. Meanwhile, Pfizer and Roche are also racing to develop an antiviral pill for COVID-19, according to Reuters. A New Pandemic Treaty, Revised International Health Regulations, or Both? What is the Actual Roadmap? 02/10/2021 Gian Luca Burci WHO Headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland. The World Health Assembly is set to make a fateful decision in November over whether to negotiate a new international ‘Pandemic Treaty’ to improve future pandemic preparedness and response. However, major players like the United States, backed by some civil society groups, have suggested that revisions of the existing International Health Regulations (IHR) would be a better path. Amidst the hyperbole of oft-heated debate over which route might be easier, quicker or more effective, it’s important to understand that either option will require careful, systematic planning and execution of a process that is oft-misunderstood. At the same time, there are some important technical points that must be kept in mind. WHA agreement to adopt a Pandemic Treaty may have a much more sweeping historical sense, than mere revisions of the existing IHR. But a new treaty will only be enforceable among those member states that have ratified it in what is typically a prolonged process – while any IHR revisions that are agreed to would be applicable to all 196 WHO member states immediately. Ultimately, it is reaching political consensus on the often-charged content of proposed treaty/IHR reforms that matters the most. But to do that, the process also needs careful consideration – and demystification. WHO former legal counsel Gian Luca Burci, Adjunct Professor of international law at the Geneva Graduate Institute, takes apart the procedural issues, and what they mean, ahead of the third working group meeting of member states on the issue, next week. Pandemic Treaty or IHR revisions – exploring the pathways & process In May, the World Health Assembly tasked a Member States’ working group with the critical mission of assessing “the benefits of developing a WHO convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” The Working Group on Strengthening WHO Preparedness and Response to Health Emergencies (WGPR) is now tasked with coming up with a recommendation in time for a WHA special session in November on whether the WHA should establish an intergovernmental process “to draft and negotiate such a convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” Just two months from the deadline, we understand that discussions in the WGPR are moving towards negotiating a new “pandemic treaty” and revising the International Health Regulations (IHR) in parallel after the November WHA – rather than forcing a choice between them. While this would be a welcome compromise, there seems to be some confusion, as well as contradictory positions, about the procedural steps required to pursue either option. Debate is particularly intense over the question of whether amending the IHR or concluding a treaty would be “easier and quicker,” and which option would incentivize more participation and commitment. While the process will eventually depend on a number of, as yet, unpredictable factors, international law and practice point to some likely steps and procedural requirements, which are reviewed here. This is without reference to the potential content of a pandemic treaty or amended IHR – closely related to questions of speed and difficulty of negotiations. This review also does not purport to be exhaustive; more information can be found in the Geneva Graduate Institute’s “Guide to a Pandemic Treaty.” Pandemic Treaty – from negotiation to adoption, ratification & entry into force Launch of the negotiating process Under Article 19 of the WHO Constitution, the WHA can adopt “conventions or agreements with respect to any matter within the competence of the Organization.” The process leading up to a WHO treaty (“treaty,” “convention,” “agreement” are different denominations but do not change the substance) would therefore be launched by a WHA resolution. The resolution could shape negotiations, for example by requesting that certain issues be included in the treaty or given priority. However, that level of prescriptiveness is infrequent in contemporary treaty practice to leave flexibility to the negotiators. Negotiating forum The Health Assembly would establish a dedicated intergovernmental body open to all WHO member states to draft and negotiate the future convention. This step can be articulated in many different ways and there is no single model in international practice. In the case of the WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control (FCTC), for example, the process was subdivided into two parts: 1) a working group was firstly established to discuss possible building blocks of the convention before committing to treaty negotiations and 2) after a green light from WHA, an intergovernmental negotiating body was established. However, in many other cases, a single body (labelled for example an “intergovernmental negotiating committee”) was responsible for the whole preparation and negotiation of the treaty. This occurred, for example, with the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) and later its Kyoto Protocol. WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus delivering the closing speech for the 72nd World Health Assembly in 2019, prior to the COVID-19 pandemic. Negotiating bodies of this nature are invariably open to participation by all member states. In addition, the European Union is a likely invitee with full rights of participation under the rubric of “regional economic integration organizations” (a category that so far includes only the EU). And indeed the EU has already been one of the most vocal advocates of a pandemic treaty. Participation of other non-state actors Beyond member states and possibly the EU, one can expect participation to be extended to other actors identified in the 2016 Framework of Engagement with Non-State Actors, most importantly NGOs, international business associations and philanthropic foundations (the fourth group, academic institutions, are not entitled to participate but are sometimes invited ad hoc as experts). All these actors would participate as “observers” with limited privileges, rather than full negotiators. For example, they usually can only participate in public meetings but are excluded from closed negotiating sessions that often prevail at crucial stages of the process. However, what matters is physical presence at the negotiations to lobby and brief delegates and network with like-minded organizations. Unlike more technical questions such as “one health” and access to pathogen samples, we can expect substantial civil society mobilization and lobbying behind issues such as equity, human rights and access to countermeasures. These considerations are especially relevant if negotiations resume in person; if the sanitary situation still requires online meetings, the process will have to be adapted and the recent sessions of the WHA and the Executive Board offer a blueprint for that. Virtual negotiations of course are less than ideal for all participants. Methods of work – geopolitical representation and the demands of consensus decision-making The body or bodies established by the WHA will have to elect their officers, typically following WHO’s breakdown into six regions. The Assembly can prescribe the make-up of the bureau, as in the case of the WGPR. Appointing the bureau can be a delicate process depending on geopolitical circumstances or competing ambitions. The role of the bureau is not cast in stone but can be decisive for the progress and outcome of work, in particular by working informally behind the scenes to explore options and foster consensus. The bodies concerned will operate under the WHA rules of procedure, but in practice they enjoy considerable discretion in organizing their work. It is customary, and practically a dogma within WHO, that decisions be only taken by consensus without a formal vote. This increases the importance of the process that has to be perceived as fair, legitimate and inclusive to lead to a result that is at least not unacceptable to any state. The requirement of consensus decision-making carries a lot of inertia all the way to the WHA; even though any state can break consensus by formally objecting and requesting a vote, it is in fact a heavy responsibility to do so and it hardly ever happens. Negotiations of long and complex instruments usually require dividing the text, or particularly difficult issues, among subcommittees that work in parallel, formally report to the plenary on their progress and are often coordinated by the bureau. Small delegations have understandable difficulties in managing multiple meetings, and there is an established practice within WHO to avoid more than two parallel meetings. Available UN-system practice, however, shows much flexibility to adapt the organization of work and the mix of formal and informal meetings. Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, WHO Director General, discussing a pandemic treaty in September 2021. Complex WHO intergovernmental negotiations have often been supplemented by intersessional consultations, either on a regional basis or on specific topics. Regional consultations can be particularly effective in reaching common positions and strengthening the negotiating leverage of groups of countries that could otherwise be overpowered individually. Duration and frequency of negotiations are difficult to predict The duration and frequency of treaty negotiations are difficult to predict. The duration of negotiations will depend on a number of factors including the complexity of the issues at hand, the attitude of key countries, the sense of urgency, the diplomatic ability of the bureau, and the intended outcome. A general “framework convention” without detailed and highly prescriptive obligations may be relatively quicker to achieve, but practice shows that even negotiating such instruments requires on average no less than two years. By way of reference, negotiating the UNFCCC took about two years, the FCTC took three years and six negotiating sessions, while its protocol on illicit trade took four years and five sessions. In contrast, negotiating the two IAEA conventions concluded on the heels of the 1986 Chernobyl nuclear accident took just a few months. It is common for the responsible governing body, in our case the WHA, to request progress reports and set a deadline for the conclusion of the negotiations. Even though there are no draconian consequences for not meeting it, it helps focus the negotiations and keep momentum. The frequency of formal meetings usually depends on available financial resources, the capacity of delegations and the secretariat to manage the workload and the calendar of other intergovernmental meetings. One can usually expect no more than two negotiating sessions of 1-2 weeks per year as a maximum. How to get to the initial draft? The initial draft of the treaty is politically and psychologically very important because it inevitably shapes the dynamics of the subsequent negotiations, even for countries opposing it. Even though it is possible for one or more states to come forward with a zero draft text, this is a relatively uncommon step because questions about the motives of the proposing states could affect or derail negotiations. The responsibility to propose a full zero draft therefore can either fall on the chair of the negotiating body (e.g. the FCTC), on the secretariat (e.g. the revised IHR, or in the environmental field the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, drafted by the UNEP Secretariat). An important point in this regard is that a zero draft does not come out of thin air, but is the result of previous consultations or preparatory work. In the case of the IHR, the draft proposed by the secretariat was the culmination of many years of technical work and consultations, thus the text was submitted promptly to negotiations after a round of regional consultations. In the case of the pandemic treaty, so far there has been no real open discussion on its scope and content either in the WHA or the WGPR, and it is unlikely that this will occur before the WHA special session. Consequently, it is foreseeable that the body established by the WHA will devote an initial period to discuss or seek expert input on the possible building blocks of a treaty and their challenges and implications. Given the uncertainties and questions surrounding the recent proposals, it would be counterproductive to try to short-circuit an inclusive and bottom-up process for achieving a quick result at all costs. Adoption of the treaty and next steps The final draft text would be submitted to the WHA for consideration. As noted above, the Assembly will almost certainly adopt the treaty by consensus. In the unlikely event where consensus could not be reached, Article 19 of the Constitution requires a two-thirds majority (calculated on the basis of valid votes excluding abstentions). The virtual World Health Assembly nerve center at WHO’s Geneva headquarters in May 2020. The upcoming WHA Special Session will likely take a similar form. Other steps that can be taken by the WHA will depend on the nature of the treaty and the conclusions of the negotiations. A pandemic treaty will in all probability be a normative instrument establishing its own governance. Relying on precedents including the FCTC, this will include at a minimum a conference of the parties and a secretariat. Initial work on the institutional aspects will require drafting rules of procedure for the conference of the parties and, depending on the institutional arrangements contained in the treaty, financial regulations and a budget. Even though a treaty is a self-contained instrument and its governance will not be part of WHO’s, the latter may end up providing or hosting its secretariat. For all these reasons, the WHA may establish upon the adoption of the treaty a new intergovernmental body to prepare all the foregoing steps and facilitate the work of the first session of the conference of the parties. Signature, ratification and entry into force Multilateral treaties are customarily opened for signature for a defined period of time. What matters for the entry into force of the treaty, however, is reaching the required number of ratifications (or adherence, accession, formal confirmation depending on the final clauses of the treaty) and how fast that will occur. The threshold for entry into force has varied wildly in previous treaties, anywhere between 20 and 60 as an average (it was 40 for the FCTC and its illicit trade protocol). The number agreed upon will in practice depend on a compromise between an early establishment of the new legal regime and the critical mass of states required to make it credible and effective. A review of UN-system treaties shows on average a time gap of between two and four years between adoption and entry into force; the FCTC protocol on illicit trade took six years, probably reflecting its complexity and demands at national level, but the FCTC took only 21 months. A related consideration for the credibility of the treaty will be the attitude of key states, whether and how quickly they will ratify it and whether they will actively oppose it should they choose to remain outside it. A device occasionally used when it is urgent to start applying a treaty is the so-called “provisional application”, whereby contracting parties indicate in the treaty itself or in a separate act (e.g. the WHA resolution adopting a treaty) that they will provisionally implement the treaty pending its entry into force. A classic but atypical example is the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), provisionally applied from 1947 until 1995. I mention this for the sake of completeness, but it is not a common arrangement for self-intuitive sovereignty concerns. Most of the foregoing considerations also apply to the negotiation and conclusion of protocols to the treaty, should it be drafted as a framework convention requiring separate instruments to spell out its obligations. Albeit linked organically to the “mother convention”, protocols are separate treaties in their own right. Certain steps of the negotiations will probably go faster than for the original convention since the latter provides an applicable legal framework. However, the experience of the FCTC protocol – 10 years from beginning of negotiations to entry into force and only 63 parties so far – should induce caution and deter over-optimism about “quick wins” or “low-hanging fruits.” Strategic reflection is required on whether to make the implementation of a possible pandemic treaty depend heavily on the conclusion of separate protocols. A comparison of the processes required for the creation of a pandemic treaty and revising the International Health Regulations. Amending the International Health Regulations – what is similar or different? The step-by-step process for amending the IHR is spelled out in Article 55. Amendments can be proposed by any state party or the WHO Director-General (DG). Given the direction that the WGPR seems to be taking, it is likely that any amendment process will be launched directly by the Assembly, thus shortening this initial step. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen, and been controversial within WHO, well before the COVID-19 pandemic. With the exception of a highly-technical 2014 amendment extending the recognised lifetime of yellow fever vaccines, successive IHR Review Committees [expert bodies appointed by the WHO DG] have advised against amendments, and the WHO Secretariat has also traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. This is due partly to the perceived risk of opening up the entire Regulations to unpredictable and potentially counterproductive revisions that may end up decreasing their credibility and effectiveness. This concern is understandable and legitimate, but, firstly, it applies to any legislative instrument where the risk of unforeseeable outcomes has to be weighed against the need to improve its design and content. Secondly, the WHA can narrow the scope of the amendments by instructing the negotiating body to only deal with specific issues. While this conditionality is infrequent and probably undesirable in the case of treaties, it would be more plausible with regard to the IHR since the Assembly is their parent body and exercises direct oversight functions over them. Similar procedural considerations – but requiring a less steep “learning curve” Most of the procedural considerations involved in the negotiation of a pandemic treaty would apply mutatis mutandis to the amendment of the IHR – and thus are not repeated here. A possible difference concerns the preparatory work preceding and leading to an initial draft of the amendments. The learning curve for a pandemic treaty could be steeper and longer given the absence of an intergovernmental discussion thus far and the lack of familiarity of many delegations. The IHR and its complexities are better known to the public health and foreign affairs officials following WHO affairs, and it is likely that delegations may be willing to move quickly into drafting and negotiations. IHR-specific requirements Article 50 of the IHR provides that the Review Committee shall “make technical recommendations to the Director-General regarding amendments to these Regulations.” The main consideration, time-wise, is whether involving the Review Committee is a compulsory step, since the procedural requirements in the IHR and the way in which they have been implemented by the secretariat so far, are formal and cumbersome and may lead to delays. The second and related consideration is at which stage of the amendment process would the Review Committee intervene? Would it make its recommendations before amendments are drafted, on an initial draft, or rather towards the end of the process? The political implications of those different approaches for the negotiations may be considerable. There are few precedents from which lessons may be learned. The IHR have been amended only once, in 2014, adjusting the requirements for yellow fever vaccination required by some state parties (eg. India) for international travelers arriving from yellow-fever endemic countries (Annex 7). The amendment extended the validity of a well-accepted vaccine from 10 years to lifetime in line with new evidence about the vaccine’s efficacy. An IHR Review Committee was not created for that occasion, setting a precedent. At the same time, the yellow fever vaccine amendment was limited and very technical. It was recommended by the Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on immunization, a dedicated expert group convened by the WHO secretariat, and the WHO Executive Board proposed the amendment to the WHA. In contrast, a broad and substantial amendment of multiple, substantive provisions of the IHR, which might cover sensitive issues around the early warning of outbreaks and WHO’s mandate to investigate and enforce IHR provisions, may be seen as something different legally and politically – warranting the creation of an IHR Review Committee. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen but the WHO Secretariat has traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. The main legal consideration is that the Review Committee is an expert body providing its recommendations to the DG at his request rather than a governance organ partaking of the normative functions of WHO. There can be situations like the one just mentioned, in which that technical input is not necessary or can be provided through different and less time-consuming channels. Moreover, a process initiated by the Executive Board or the WHA is different from a proposal by a member state or the DG. In my view, convening a Review Committee may be politically but not legally necessary. It is indicative in this connection that Article 55 does not mention the Review Committee, which suggests that its participation is not compulsory. Adoption of the amendments and entry into force Article 55 requires that amendments be communicated to state parties at least four months before the opening of the WHA, which may influence the schedule of the negotiating body. As noted above, consensus is the norm in WHO, and that will apply to the adoption of the amendments. In the unlikely event of formal objections, a vote would require a simple majority instead of the two-thirds required for a treaty. The main difference between a pandemic treaty and amendments to the IHR concerns entry into force. Pursuant to Article 22 of the Constitution and Article 59 of the IHR, the latter enter into force for all member states 24 months after the DG’s notification of adoption, except for those member states that either reject the amendments or file a reservation within 18 months from that notification. In case of a reservation, Article 62 provides for a rather complex process to determine whether the reservation is compatible with the object and purpose of the Regulations and can be accepted. The Article 62 procedure makes it very difficult in practice to reject a reservation and, historically, the sole objection that I am aware of was by Australia to the 1969 version of the IHR. Opting out of a regulation (or amendments thereof) is a drastic, highly visible and politically heavy decision that states would probably take only for the most serious reasons. Still, both rejections and successful reservations are possible and would undesirably fragment what should be instead a uniform legal and coordinating framework to achieve global health security. Objections could also create impossibly complex situations, e.g. in case of amendments changing the functions of WHO, because objecting states would remain bound by the different functions enshrined in the original IHR. For these reasons and as noted above with regard to a pandemic treaty, the inclusiveness, fairness and legitimacy of the process are of crucial importance to keep states in the fold even if they are not entirely satisfied of the outcome. Conclusions – both exercises can be more or less difficult, depending on the political atmosphere Among the preliminary conclusions that can be drawn is the fact that the two processes, when compared side-by-side, would be substantially similar. However there are some significant differences which will need careful consideration as well. Significantly, amending the IHR may be faster because: 1) modifying an existing text is presumably easier than negotiating one from scratch, 2) the WHA can define and narrow the scope and purpose of the amendments, and 3) WHO member states are relatively familiar with the Regulations. The need to consult the Review Committee, however, must be clarified – as well as what this might mean for achieving consensus. The timeline for entry into force of a treaty or any IHR amendments may be similar for either of the two options, but the amendments to the IHR would enter into force for all 196 WHO member states. In the case of a new treaty, a subset of countries will be bound by it once it enters into force, but the timeline for all WHO member states to ratify such a new instrument could be much more protracted – and remains unknown. Politically, both exercises can be more or less difficult depending on the political atmosphere, the proposals on the table, the ability of the bureau to build consensus and the myriad other factors characterizing any major multilateral negotiation. In both processes, there is great importance in reaching a real and sustainable consensus. At the same time, joining consensus in the WHA to adopt a pandemic treaty is not necessarily predictive of future ratifications since governments as well as circumstances may change. In both cases, finally, it will be important to maintain momentum but avoid imposing unrealistic timelines for the negotiations. The Independent Panel’s call for concluding a pandemic treaty in six months is an example of an unrealistic goal in this connection. Opting into a treaty requires political will and action, which can be highly appealing to politicians. On the other hand, remaining bound by a revised IHR could also be the positive outcome of political inertia and inaction – that is a country’s reluctance to be seen as opting out. The key questions are what is more politically feasible, and what will build more genuine, sustained political commitment to any improved set of international rules that aim to better govern future outbreaks and reduce pandemic risks. Gian Luca Burci is adjunct professor of international law at the Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies. His areas of expertise are global health law and governance, global health security and the law and practice of international organizations. Between 2005 and 2016 he was Legal Counsel of WHO. Updated on 07.10.2021 with a description of the 2014 IHR amendment on requirements around yellow fever vaccines. Image Credits: Flickr – Guilhem Vellut, Flickr – US Mission Geneva, WHO / Antoine Tardy, WHO, Gian Luca Burci, Wikimedia Commons. Tuberculosis is Here to Stay if We Don’t Mobilise Resources for Diagnoses and Double Fundings, New Data Shows 01/10/2021 Aishwarya Tendolkar Global efforts to eliminate TB have been set back by the COVID-19 pandemic. The COVID-19 pandemic and the consequent diversion of resources toward battling SARS-CoV2 has also set back global efforts to eliminate the world’s second most deadly infectious killer: Tuberculosis, by 2030. Only a doubling of investments next year can pave the way to attainment of the 2030 United Nations Sustainable Development Goals to eliminate the disease, experts and panelists at the Stop TB Partnership said Tuesday. The panel session coincided with the release of new data from a study conducted by the Stop TB Partnership that showed COVID’s impact on TB response this year continues to be as devastating as last year, with 1.2 million fewer people projected to be diagnosed and treated for TB this year, in comparison with 2019. The new estimates, developed in collaboration with USAID, Johns Hopkins University, Avenir Health and Imperial College, are based on data from 27 countries that account for 75 percent of the global TB caseload. That means TB investments for this coming year need to be doubled, in order to meet a 2018-2022 target for diagnosing and treating 40 million people (or 10 million a year), within that four year time frame, the Partnership says. TB kills 4,000 people a day The airborne disease still kills 4,000 people every day, with nearly a quarter of the world’s population estimated to have been infected. Despite being curable and preventable, only an estimated 5.7 million people received treatment for TB in 2020, a decline of 21 percent from the previous year—leaving an estimated 4.3 million people with untreated TB and implying all but certain death for probably half that number, the report showed. A lack of attention to the disease, lack of funding, and a dearth of proper diagnostic tools are responsible, Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership said at a Stop TB briefing Tuesday. “COVID showed that if the government and people are scared, money is not an issue. We are in the middle of a disaster but our attention seems to be in a very wrong place.” Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership. The “orphan disease” does not receive political priority or funding, Obiefuna Austin Arinze, Executive Director of Afro Global Alliance and incoming Vice-Chair of the Stop TB Partnership Board said. At current levels of funding, the world will miss the target set by the United National High-Level Meeting on TB that took place in 2018 for diagnosing and treating 40 million people with TB by 2022. With just 400 days to reach 2022 goals, the diagnostic figure is even more grim for children with TB, Ditiu said. However, with mobilisation of resources – including funding, digital diagnostics and more government-sponsored community interventions – the world could reach the target’s 90% mark – treating some 36 million people, Ditiu said. Annual resource needs and available funding for TB in USD. So why is investing in TB diagnosis and elimination imperative? In simple words, it saves more lives than you would think. “Investing an extra dollar in TB is one of the best dollars spent to help the world,” Dr Bjorn Lomborg, President of the Danish think tank, Copenhagen Consensus, said at the teleconference. According to him, it would only cost US$8.1 billion dollars annually, between now and 2030, to eliminate TB. This investment translates to benefits worth US$348 billion dollars, pegging the benefit-cost ratio at 43. This means that every dollar invested in TB prevention and care yields a return of US$43. But currently, only US$6.5 billion is available annually for TB response globally. Moreover, TB funding has stagnated over the last five years – meaning there are big gaps that need to be overcome now. That’s why, at the UNHLM on TB in 2018, states and non-state actors pledged to commit a total of US$13 billion annually until 2022 to overcome past shortfalls – unfortunately COVID intervened the following year and those pledges were not honored. Some US$13 billion in funding is needed for TB care and prevention per year. TB is traditionally a low GF funding priority – despite a high dependency on Global Fund services in LMICs Despite being curable, preventable, and easily diagnosable, TB sees more deaths (over 1 million annually) than HIV/AIDS and Malaria combined. At the same time, The Global Fund channels only 18 percent of its resources to TB diagnosis and treatment. The remaining 82% is invested in fighting HIV/AIDS, malaria, and more recently, COVID-19 tests and treatments. Although 85% of national TB budgets, on average, are financed by low- and middle-income countries themselves, they remain highly dependent on the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria to fill vital gaps in services. And that adds weight to the Global Fund’s appeals, panelists pointed out. In terms of how those funds should be spent, the World Health Organisation along with the UN Secretary General have outlined priority recommendations to ramp up the TB response, Tereza Kasaeva, Director of WHO’s Global TB Programme said. “Efforts need to be intensified to make these recommendations a reality.” Diagnosis still reliant on less accurate sputum smear microscopy According to WHO, the diagnosis of TB and drug-resistant TB remains a challenge with one-third of people with TB and two-thirds of people with drug-resistant TB not being detected globally. While WHO recommends highly accurate rapid molecular assays as the initial test to diagnose TB, less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool. Only 28 percent of people were diagnosed with MTB using a rapid molecular test in 2019, Ditiu said. This means that nearly three quarters of diagnoses are done using the “clinical” smear microscopy. Smear microscopy, while cost-effective, has a poor track record in diagnosing extra-pulmonary tuberculosis, paediatric tuberculosis, and TB in patients co-infected with HIV and tuberculosis, a paper pointed. “Why don’t we allow people proper diagnostic tools?” she asked, pointing out that an untreated person with TB can transmit the bacteria to nearly 15 people every year. “Now think about this in countries like India with a population of 1.2 billion.” Less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool for TB, despite the existence of highly accurate rapid molecular assays. COVID devastated TB diagnostics To make matters worse, the COVID-19 pandemic devastated the diagnostics investments in TB – whereby existing resources were diverted, and tools like the highly accurate GeneXpert molecular diagnostic platforms were repurposed to diagnose COVID, in the pandemic’s early days. Since then, new rapid COVID diagnostic tests have become widely available, but there has been no significant recovery plan for TB diagnostics put into place, Obiefuna said. The COVID-19 pandemic was not the first time that the health infrastructure for TB was used to tackle other health crises, and particularly those related to airborne diseases, pointed out Cheri Vincent, Chief of USAID’s TB Division, at the meeting. “We saw it [being diverted] for Ebola and airborne influenza,” she said, adding, “If we can’t solve TB, we can’t solve the next airborne pandemic,” she highlighted. In fact, TB doctors were the first to be diverted to tackle the COVID-19 breakout, Ditiu said. The Zambia story, and what it teaches us But not all has been downhill in the fight against TB. Zambia offers an example of a country that has been able to sustain its TB programmes through a combination of domestic funding, government-community partnerships, and diagnostic tools – despite the COVID pandemic. It can provide inspiration for countries battling both diseases at the same time. Already today, Zambia has achieved 89% of its 2022 UNHLM diagnosis and treatment target. Over the past five years, the country invested US$45 million of domestic resources in TB response. “[TB] commodity security is key to achieving our goals,” said Dr. Patrick Lungu, National TB and Leprosy Control Program Manager in Zambia. A ‘TB Situation room’ was created to review TB programmes on a weekly basis to identify issues that may be negatively impacting performance. “We were able to offer more technical support to different levels of the health system – which translates to Zambia envisaging to achieve the UNHLM target in at least two-three key indicators,” Lungu said. Zambia has achieved nearly 89 percent of its UNHLM target so far. Will India achieve its ambitious 2025 TB elimination target? When it comes to countries like India – which bears the heaviest TB burden in the world, the pandemic has slowed-down and diverted efforts to eliminate elimination of TB by 2025 -a huge goal set by the government. According to the Indian Health Ministry’s 2021 Annual Report on Tuberculosis Elimination, reports and notification of confirmed TB diagnoses tumbled 38 percent in March-April 2020 owing to the lockdown. Furthermore, a majority of the country’s TB elimination resources were repurposed for Covid-19. Then just as services were beginning to recoup, a massive second COVID wave hit the country in spring 2021; it remains unclear what dents that made in the progress India had seen toward the end of 2020. In its 2021 official report, the Indian Health Ministry nonetheless suggested that the dedicated Infectious disease hospitals that were established for Covid will contribute “significantly” to future TB Care and management. Despite being scheduled to be a part of Tuesday’s Stop TB Partnership panel, the Indian Health Ministry did not make an appearance – leaving a lack of clarity on trends and progress in 2021. But on a global level, the warning signs are clear. Says Ditui: “we have erased 10-12 years of progress, and are back to 2010-11 levels of TB detection and cases. This becomes all the more alarming with the fact that TB is not a new disease but one that has been around for decades, and has a vaccine. One can only hope that TB receives the undivided effort it needs to be eliminated.” Image Credits: The Global Fund / Evgeny Maloletka, Stop TB Partnership, Dr. Patrick Lungu. Posts navigation Older postsNewer posts This site uses cookies to help give you the best experience on our website. Cookies enable us to collect information that helps us personalise your experience and improve the functionality and performance of our site. By continuing to read our website, we assume you agree to this, otherwise you can adjust your browser settings. Please read our cookie and Privacy Policy. Our Cookies and Privacy Policy Loading Comments... You must be logged in to post a comment.
Moderna is Urged to Work Through African Partnership to Set up mRNA Facility 07/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Moderna’s clinical development manufacturing facility in the US. Moderna should work through the Partnership for African Vaccine Manufacturing (PAVM) if it wants to invest in vaccine production on the continent, according to the head of the Africa Centers for Disease Control (CDC). The company announced on Thursday that it plans to invest $500-million in a “state-of-the-art mRNA facility” in Africa that can produce up to 500 million doses of vaccines each year. Moderna says that wants the new facility to include drug substance manufacturing, fill and finish and packaging capabilities, but it has neither chosen a country nor committed to a timeline. Africa CDC Executive Director Dr John Nkengasong said while the announcement was “very much welcome”, he had not seen the company’s media release or been informed about Moderna’s plans. Urging the manufacturer to work “very closely” with his organisation, Nkengasong added that the Africa CDC did not “tell manufacturers where to go to produce their vaccines”, but could help to facilitate their plans. “We have a Partnership for African Vaccine Manufacturing (PAVM), which has a political backing, and our wish and hope is that Moderna works with that group, which looks at vaccine manufacturing in Africa from an ecosystem perspective, from the whole of Africa approach,” Nkengasong told a media briefing on Thursday. “About 10 countries in Africa have expressed an interest in vaccine manufacturing. We can actually bring them all together and put Moderna at the centre of that to discuss and ask all the questions that will really speak to the need to be transparent, and also to be cooperative and coordinate our efforts,” said Nkengasong. He stressed that Moderna’s plan would offer relief in the middle- to long-term, but it would not solve Africa’s pressing issues related to COVID-19. These he listed as “quick access to vaccines, redistribution of vaccines, and making sure that certain licences are provided so that manufacturing can start”. Less than 5% of Africans have been vaccinated against COVID-19, and the continent has been desperately trying to buy vaccines via the African Vaccine Acquisition Trust (AVAT) in the face of massive inequity in access to vaccines. ‘Only the beginning’ Announcing its plans, Stephane Bancel, Moderna’s Chief Executive Officer, said that the company viewed its COVID-19 work as “only just beginning”. “We are determined to extend Moderna’s societal impact through the investment in a state-of-the-art mRNA manufacturing facility in Africa,” said Bancel. “While we are still working to increase capacity in our current network to deliver vaccines for the ongoing pandemic in 2022, we believe it is important to invest in the future. We expect to manufacture our COVID-19 vaccine as well as additional products within our mRNA vaccine portfolio at this facility.” However, there is speculation that part of Moderna’s motivation for making the announcement is because it is under pressure to increase production from the US government, which has invested over $8-billion in its vaccine, according to a report in Politico. Some of Moderna’s clients (extract from COVID-19 Vaccine Market Dashboard). US President Joe Biden has pledged to donate a billion vaccines to low and middle-income countries in a bid to end the COVID-19 pandemic by the end of 2022, and US government officials have reportedly had tense exchanges with Moderna officials about it not scaling up production. Moderna is also under pressure from health activists as it has almost exclusively supplied high- and middle-income countries with its vaccines via bilateral agreements. According to the COVID-19 vaccines market dashboard compiled by UNICEF, Botswana is the only African country that Moderna has supplied with COVID-19 vaccines. However, it has undertaken to supply 35 million doses to COVAX in May. Moderna had not responded to questions by the time of publication. Image Credits: Moderna. Jamaica, Nicaragua and Haiti Fail to Reach 10% COVID-19 Vaccination Target 07/10/2021 Raisa Santos Cuba is seeking WHO approval for its COVID-19 vaccines. Jamaica, Nicaragua, and Haiti were the only three member countries of the Pan American Health Organization (PAHO) that failed to meet the World Health Organization (WHO) target of vaccinating 10% of their populations against COVID-19 by the end of September. Around 37% of people in Latin America and the Caribbean have been fully vaccinated against COVID-19, while seven countries in the Americas have vaccinated more than 70% of their populations, according to PAHO. While COVID-19 cases are down in the Americas, some local trends across the region remain worrisome, PAHO officials said during a press briefing Wednesday. The Americas reported a 12% decrease in weekly new cases, according to the newest WHO Weekly Epidemiological Update on COVID-19. Worrying local trends However, local trends paint a different story. Many Southwestern Canadian provinces and the US state of Alaska are reporting their highest hospitalization rates and ICU peaks, with emergency rooms in Alaska overwhelmed with COVID-19. Chile is also seeing a rise in new cases, especially in urban regions, such as the metropolitan region of Santiago, and in port cities such as Coquimbo and Antofagasta. While cases continue to decrease in Central America, Costa Rica and Belize continue to see high rates of hospitalization and ICU peaks. In response, PAHO urged governments to remain vigilant on monitoring local COVID-19 trends in their areas. “We are reminding governments to keep a close eye on local trends because infection dynamics vary within each country, in part due to differences in vaccine availability and uptake. This small localized approach will be key to keep outbreaks under control,” PAHO Director Carissa Etienne implored. Vaccine shortages Although 875,000 vaccine doses have arrived in the region, this is not enough to protect everyone, said Etienne. “We continue to urge countries with surplus doses to share them with countries in our region, where they can have life-saving impact.” PAHO continues to deliver COVAX-funded doses and donations, having already closed agreements with three emergency use listing authorized vaccines – Sinovac, Sinopharm, and AstraZeneca. Nicaragua has recently announced that the country will receive 7 million doses of Cuban vaccines Abdala, Soberana, and Soberana 2 over the next 3 months. Cuba had released information back in June regarding the vaccines – its three-dose Abdala vaccine was 92% effective, and its Soberana 2 vaccine is 91% effective when combined with a booster vaccine called Soberana Plus. The island’s national regulatory agency approved the Abdala vaccine in July and the Soberana 2 vaccine in August. Cuba is currently trying to seek WHO approval for its two home-grown vaccines, which would facilitate their delivery in other countries. PAHO is supporting Cuba’s participation in the vaccine qualification process. “Our interest is that all vaccines are able to participate in the WHO process for granting emergency use authorization because this will broaden the supply of vaccines that we are able to purchase through the Revolving Fund,” said PAHO’s Assistant Director Jarbas Barbosa. For now, PAHO is working with the Nicaraguan government to increase its vaccine access – the country is receiving 223,000 doses from Pfizer starting next week, and an additional 81,900 vaccines from Pfizer are to be received over the rest of the month. Nicaragua is receiving other vaccines through COVAX, as well as vaccine donations from Spain. Image Credits: News Prensa Latina/Twitter. WHO Approves First Ever Malaria Vaccine 06/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Children under the age of five years in sub-Saharan Africa continued to account for approximately two-thirds of global deaths from malaria. The World Health Organization (WHO) has given the go-ahead for children to get the first-ever malaria vaccine in areas where there is a high to moderate risk of infection. The vaccine, known as RTS,S, is the first to have been approved against a parasitic disease. It has been tested on 800,000 children in Ghana, Kenya and Malawi over two years as part of routine immunisations and found to reduce severe malaria-related hospitalisation by 30% and clinical malaria by 40%, researchers revealed at a WHO press conference on Wednesday. “This is a historic moment. The long-awaited malaria vaccine for children is a breakthrough for science, child health and malaria control,” said WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, who started his medical career as a malaria researcher. “Using this vaccine on top of existing tools to prevent malaria could save tens of thousands of young lives each year.” The WHO recommends that the vaccine – which acts against P. falciparum, the deadliest malaria parasite – is given in four doses to children from the age of five months to around 18 months. Tedros said that progress against malaria “has stalled at an unacceptably high level, with more than 200 million cases, and 400,000 deaths every year – two-thirds of which are children under five in Africa”. “Every two minutes, a child under five dies of malaria,” said Dr Matshidiso Moeti, WHO Regional Director for Africa, adding that 94% of malaria cases were in Africa. Dr Matshidiso Moeti, WHO Regional Director of Africa. “We have long hoped for an effective malaria vaccine and now for the first time ever, we have such a vaccine recommended for widespread use.” Moeti added that the WHO would support the production of the vaccine in Africa. However, GlaxoSmithKline (GSK), which has invested US$ 700 million in the development of RTS,S and donated up to 10 million doses for the pilot programme, will be working with an Indian generic producer to manufacture the vaccine for the foreseeable future. “GSK was clear at the time, as we’ve proceeded with this vaccine that, having provided a large degree of development funding and producing the vaccine for the implementation programme, was nevertheless seeking a tech transfer partner for the long term production of this vaccine,” said Dr Kate O’Brien, WHO head of immunisation. “There was a programme opened up to initiate interest from vaccine manufacturers and the partner who will be with GSK for this tech transfer is Bharat Biotech in India.” Protect children’s development Dr Alejandro Cravioto, Chair of the WHO Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on Immunization (SAGE), said that his group recommended the use of the vaccine to ensure the healthy growth and development of children. “The experience we have had before with other infections showed us clearly that a child that is repetitively sick is maimed for life,” said Cravioto. “He or she is not capable of developing the capacities that he or she is born with, in the sense of achieving an adulthood that will be meaningful. So having anything that protects them, or helps them to be less sick during this growth phase, is essential.” Global vaccine alliance, Gavi, health agency Unitaid and the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria committed nearly US$ 70 million to fund the pilot, which was designed to address several outstanding questions related to the public health use of the vaccine following the Phase 3 trial showing efficacy of RTS,S. “We welcome this new tool in the fight against malaria,” said Peter Sands, Executive Director of the Global Fund. “In countries where the Global Fund invests, we have reduced malaria deaths by 45% since 2002 with testing, treatment and prevention tools such as mosquito nets. “In the vaccine pilots, the RTS,S vaccine was most effective when used together with these existing tools. Significant additional resources will be necessary to enable wide deployment of the vaccine alongside other innovations, and as part of a sustained and comprehensive response in the countries that need it the most.” Following the WHO recommendation, global stakeholders, including Gavi, will consider whether and how to finance a new malaria vaccination programme for countries in sub-Saharan Africa, according to a statement by Gavi, the Global Fund and Unitaid. The vaccine will complement other WHO-recommended measures for malaria prevention, including the use of insecticide-treated bed nets, indoor spraying with insecticides, malaria chemoprevention strategies, and the timely use of malaria testing and treatment. Image Credits: WHO. African Medicines Agency Will Come into Being on 5 November – after 15th African Country Ratifies & Deposits AMA Treaty 06/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan The African Medicines Agency’s framework would help combat falsified products Africans are a step closer to speedier access to newer, safer medicines following this week’s notification by 15 African Union (AU) member countries that they have formally ratified and deposited their accord to create a new African Medicines Agency (AMA). Although the AU adopted the treaty to set up the AMA back in February 2019, 15 African countries had to formally notify the AU Commission that they had ratified the treaty before the agency could be set up. On Tuesday, Cameroon became the 15th country to deposit its ratification instrument – finally pushing the AMA over the threshold into reality. According to the Treaty, the AMA will now come into force in 30 days time – on 5 November. The AMA aims to support African countries to better regulate medical products and harmonise the regulation of medicines across the continent. It will also test samples of medicines from time to time to eliminate fakes that plague the continent. The 14 other countries to have both ratified the AMA and “deposited the instrument of ratification” at the AU (a letter from the head of state informing it of ratification) are Algeria, Benin, Burkina Faso, Gabon, Guinea, Mali, Mauritius, Namibia, Niger, Rwanda, Seychelles, Sierra Leone and Zimbabwe. A further three countries have ratified the treaty but not formally informed the AU, while eight more have signed the treaty but not yet ratified it. This means 36 of Africa’s 55 countries – predominantly Francophone countries – have expressed support for the AMA. However, African powerhouses Ethiopia, Nigeria and South Africa have not yet expressed their support for the AMA. Today, we celebrate as AMA made it to the finish line. 15th instrument of ratification received by the @_AfricanUnion and the 30 day count down for AMA to enter into force has officially began! Congratulations to the member states that have made this possible See infographic 👇 pic.twitter.com/4IqLRLEIqP — Dorothy Njagi (@Dottienjagi) October 5, 2021 The COVID-19 pandemic has highlighted the need for countries to speedily assess medicines and vaccines, a capacity that a number of African countries lack. The African Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has played a central role in co-ordinating the health response to the pandemic on the continent, and highlighted the value of a continental player during a health crisis. Greg Perry, Assistant Director-General of the International Federation of Pharmaceutical Manufacturers and Associations (IFPMA), welcomed the AMA’s ratification, describing it as taking “one step closer to achieving a continent-wide regulatory agency”. “We look forward to the full implementation of the AMA,, which will be a game-changer for all Africans to access safe, effective and quality medical products in a timely manner,” said Perry. Pharmaceutical companies have long complained about how complicated it is to get medicines approved in Africa and how long it takes particularly in comparison to Europe, which processes applications via a central European Medicines Agency (EMA). Perry added that for the agency to become fully operational, it was important for the AU to define the appropriate funding model and engage with the African Medicines Regulatory Harmonisation initiative “which has already set strong governance structures and pan-African guidance in place for the approval of COVID-19 treatments and vaccines”. Reduce barriers to African market entry Andy Gray, senior lecturer in pharmacology at the University of KwaZulu-Natal, said that AMA’s greatest potential lies “in the field of harmonisation of regulatory systems, which should reduce the barriers to market entry in Africa”. “The AMA is not intended to be a supranational regulator, and will not make decisions in the way the EMA does, but it could help in bringing national medicines regulatory authorities together, simplifying systems and reducing redundancy,” explained Gray. “It can also make a major difference by promoting transparency of regulatory action across the continent, and showing how that can drive reliance models of regulation.” Gray added that the AMA could learn lessons from the Africa CDC by providing “visible and credible leadership”, ensuring “practical outputs, not just talk” and ensure it had recognition in appropriate global forums. Today is a historic day. #Cameroon became the 15 country to deposit the instrument of ratification of the African Medicines Agency. Now, the treaty will enter into force in 30 days (Nov 5). #AMA is a game change on our continent.@AUC_MoussaFaki @PR_Paul_BIYA pic.twitter.com/0KOYh5EEvk — Michel Sidibé (@MichelSidibe) October 5, 2021 Earlier this year, Michel Sidibé, the former Executive Director of UNAIDS and Mali’s Minister of Health, was appointed as the AU’s Special Envoy for the AMA. He has been leading efforts to ensure that countries ratify the agency, and could be in the running to head it. Announcing Cameroon’s ratification of the AMA on Twitter this week, Sidibé described the agency as a “game-changer for our continent”. Image Credits: United States Army , Marco Verch/Flickr. African Countries are the Focus of New Maternal Mortality Targets 05/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan UNFPA Executive Director Dr Natalia Kanem Nineteen countries have been prioritised for support to implement new global targets aimed at preventing maternal and newborn deaths. This emerged at the launch on Tuesday of the new targets, which were developed by the World Health Organization (WHO), UN Population Fund (UNFPA) and their partners in the Ending Preventable Maternal Mortality (EPMM) initiative. UNFPA Executive Director Dr Natalia Kanem said that while the global community had committed to reducing the global maternal mortality rates to 70 deaths per 100,000 live births by 2030 as part of the sustainable development goals (SDG), it was not moving fast enough. “If the current pace prevails, we will not reach this goal before 2065,” said Kanem. “This is a wake-up call for us to urgently scale up and accelerate our efforts with less than 10 years to go.” Fourteen of the chosen countries are in Africa and include Chad, which has one of the highest maternal mortality rates in the world, as well as Nigeria and Ethiopia. The five non-African countries are Afghanistan, Pakistan, Mexico, Nepal and Laos. The 19 priority countries identified for action against maternal mortality. The 19 countries will get support to implement and monitor the targets, according to the UN agency officials. There are five targets: 90% pregnant women to attend four or more antenatal care visits (towards increasing to eight visits by 2030); 90% of births to be attended by skilled health personnel; 80% of women who have just given birth to access postnatal care within two days of delivery; 60% of the population to have access to emergency obstetric care within two hours of travel time; 65% of women to be able to make informed and empowered decisions regarding sexual relations, contraceptive use, and their reproductive health. Country selection involved a number of factors including a high burden of maternal deaths and stillbirths, the strength of country midwifery and whether there were partners to support the ministries of health, according to World Health Organization’s (WHO) Dr Anshu Banerjee, Director for Maternal, Child and Adolescent Health and Ageing. Preventable deaths Addressing the launch, WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus said that around 295,000 women died each year due to complications of pregnancy and childbirth, and there were two million stillbirths and 2.4 million newborn deaths annually. “Most of these deaths are in low and middle-income countries,” said Tedros. “Most of these [deaths] could have been prevented with quality pre- and post-natal care and birthing assistance from competent maternal and newborn health professionals,” said Tedros. “The COVID 19 pandemic has badly disrupted essential health services around the world, including for maternal and newborn care. WHO is supporting countries to resume these services regardless of a woman’s COVID-19 status,” he added. Most maternal deaths are preventable with the right care at the right time. Women must get access to healthcare, and this care must: ✅ be of high quality. ✅ meet the needs of families ✅ treat them with dignity and respect. https://t.co/DhTF3jxQB0 pic.twitter.com/TNqBsiyyfx — World Health Organization (WHO) (@WHO) October 5, 2021 In 2017, the global maternal mortality ratio was around 211 maternal deaths per 100,000 live births, which was a 38% reduction compared to 2000 – a reduction of around 2,9% per year. “Universal health coverage, including universal access to sexual and reproductive health care, will be key to providing equitable access to quality maternal health services,” said Kanem. Kanem said that her agency, the WHO and partners are “committed to helping countries achieve coverage targets by implementing action-oriented plans, and by tracking progress at the national and sub-national levels”. She stressed that the targets “also incorporate key determinants of maternal health, including a woman’s ability to make decisions about her own sexual and reproductive health”. The SDG 3.1 sets out that by 2030, the global maternal mortality ratio (MMR) should be reduced to less than 70 per 100,000 live births, and no country should have an MMR more than 140 per 100,000 live births. “The latest estimates are 211 per 100,000 live births – but increasing to 415 on average in the poorest countries,” according to the WHO. Pfizer Vaccine Effective Against COVID-19 Hospitalizations for All Variants 05/10/2021 Raisa Santos Two jabs of the Pfizer-BioNTech vaccine are 90% effective against COVID-19 hospitalizations for all variants including Delta, for at least 6 months, confirmed a new study published by The Lancet. The study, conducted by Kaiser Permanete and Pfizer, found that while effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, effectiveness against hospitalizations remains at 90% overall for all variants. “Our study confirms that vaccines are a critical tool for controlling the pandemic and remain highly effective in preventing severe disease and hospitalization, including from the delta and other variants of concern. Protection against infection does decline in the months following a second dose,” said lead author of the study Dr Sara Tartof, of Kaiser Permanente. The study analyzed 3,436,957 electronic health records from the Kaiser Permanente Southern California (KPSC) health system between 4 December 2020 and 8 August 2021 to assess the effectiveness of the Pfizer vaccine against COVID-19 infections and related hospitalizations. Immunity declines after six months In addition, the study also found that effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, falling from 88% within one month after receiving two doses to 47% after six months, underscoring the importance of improving vaccination rates worldwide. Researchers did not observe a difference in waning between variants. While this does provide evidence towards waning immunity against COVID-19, the CDC has called for additional research to determine which groups should be prioritized to receive booster shots. “In line with the recent FDA [3] and CDC recommendations [4], considerations for booster shots should take global COVID-19 vaccine supply into account as people in many countries around the world have not yet received a primary vaccination series,” said Tartof. Vaccine equity and booster shots have prompted increasing debate in recent weeks, with WHO calling for a global moratorium on COVID-19 boosters to be extended until the end of the year, and global health advocates protesting “vaccine apartheid” outside the UN during the General Assembly last month. US and Israeli studies find similar reductions in immunity Other findings from the US Centers for Disease Control (CDC) and the Israeli Ministry of Health had also found reductions of immunity from the Pfizer vaccine after six months. The Israeli findings reported that people over age 60 who received a third dose of the Pfizer vaccine were five times less likely to become severely ill if they had their first shot at least five months earlier. These results in particular were regarded as a critical factor in the recommendation from the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) to amend its emergency use authorization (EUA) last month for the Pfizer vaccine. The FDA now recommends a single booster dose to be administered at least six months after completion for: individuals 65 and older; individuals 18 through 64 at high risk of severe COVID-19; and individuals 18 through 64 with increased exposure of SARS-CoV-2 that puts them at high risk of health complications relating to COVID-19. Image Credits: International Monetary Fund/Ernesto Benavides. Indian Generic Companies Are Ready to Make Merck’s COVID-19 Antiviral Pill 04/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Molnupiravir could make a significant difference to the global response to COVID-19. Indian generic drug manufacturers are poised to make the antiviral pill, molnupiravir, which halved hospitalisations in a trial of high-risk people with COVID-19. Merck, which developed molnupiravir in collaboration with Ridgeback Biotherapeutics, has awarded non-exclusive, voluntary licensing agreements to eight generic companies in India since April in anticipation of positive trial results. According to Merck, it has been producing molnupiravir “at risk” and expects to produce 10 million courses of treatment by the end of 2021, the company said a media release last Friday. Merck cut short the trial of molnupiravir in the light of the good results, and will make an application for emergency use authorisation (EUA) with the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA), “as soon as possible”, the company said. It will also submit “marketing applications to other regulatory bodies worldwide”, it added. Australia’s Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) granted provisional determination for molnupiravir in August. Meanwhile, in anticipation of regulatory approval, the Access to COVID-19 Tools (ACT) Accelerator is working to “secure volumes” of the pills for people in LMICs, according to ACT-Accelerator partner Unitaid. “Effective, simple to use, oral treatments that can avert the progression to severe illness are exactly the kind of breakthroughs we need to get the pandemic under control. Deployed alongside vaccines, such medicines could drive down hospitalizations and deaths due to COVID-19,” said Dr Philippe Duneton, Executive Director of Unitaid shortly after the Merck announcement. Few treatment options At present, there are very few treatment options for people infected with COVID-19, and those that exist – such as remdesivir and dexamethasone – are expensive, given intravenously or by injections and only for severely ill people already in hospital. White House medical adviser Dr Anthony Fauci told CNN on Sunday that the medicine was “extremely important”. “It’s a pill that’s given by mouth, so you don’t need anything special other than taking a pill the way you take any pill. And the results are really quite impressive,” said Fauci. However, he said that it only halved the risk of hospitalisation and to cut this risk by 100% people should “not get infected in the first place”. Back in April, Merck entered into voluntary licensing agreements with five Indian companies – Cipla, Dr Reddy’s Laboratories, Emcure Pharmaceuticals, Hetero Labs and Sun Pharmaceutical Industries. All are World Health Organization (WHO) pre-qualified manufacturing facilities. It has since licensed Aurobindo Pharma, Torrent Pharmaceuticals, and Viatris, to manufacture the drug. At least four of the companies are already manufacturing generic molnupirvir, which they have been supplying to a trial in India and all eight are ready for global supply, according to MSD India. When it announced the licensing back in April, Merck said the intention was to enable the manufacturers to “supply molnupiravir to India and more than 100 low and middle-income countries (LMICs)”. No deaths in trial The molnupiravir trial involved 775 unvaccinated adults with mild-to-moderate COVID-19 with at least one risk factor for serious illness – most commonly, obesity, being over the age of 60, and living with diabetes and heart disease. Only 7,3% of those taking molnupiravir ended up in hospital in comparison to 14,1% of those on the placebo, announced Merck (known as MSD outside the US and Canada) in a media release last Friday. “Twenty-nine days into the trial, no deaths were reported in patients who received molnupiravir, as compared to eight deaths in patients who received placebo,” it added. The trial was conducted globally, including at sites in Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Egypt, France, Germany, Guatemala, Israel, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Philippines, Poland, Russia, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Taiwan, Ukraine, the United Kingdom and the US. Meanwhile, in June the US government ordered approximately 1.7 million courses of molnupiravir at a cost of $1.2 billion – about $700/patient – according to a June media release from Merck. However, this price is equal to about 35 times the estimated sustainable generic price using current market prices for the active pharmaceutical ingredients (API), according to Melissa J Barber from Harvard University’s Department of Global Health and Population and Dzintars Gotham from King’s College Hospital in London. “Assuming optimization of molnupiravir synthesis, and a resulting drop in API cost, the US price would be equal to about 161 times the estimated sustainable generic price,” the two researchers noted in a brief published last Friday. They identified that three companies appeared to be exporting API for molnupiravir – Optimus Drugs Private, Honour Lab, and Maithri Laboratories. Meanwhile, Pfizer and Roche are also racing to develop an antiviral pill for COVID-19, according to Reuters. A New Pandemic Treaty, Revised International Health Regulations, or Both? What is the Actual Roadmap? 02/10/2021 Gian Luca Burci WHO Headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland. The World Health Assembly is set to make a fateful decision in November over whether to negotiate a new international ‘Pandemic Treaty’ to improve future pandemic preparedness and response. However, major players like the United States, backed by some civil society groups, have suggested that revisions of the existing International Health Regulations (IHR) would be a better path. Amidst the hyperbole of oft-heated debate over which route might be easier, quicker or more effective, it’s important to understand that either option will require careful, systematic planning and execution of a process that is oft-misunderstood. At the same time, there are some important technical points that must be kept in mind. WHA agreement to adopt a Pandemic Treaty may have a much more sweeping historical sense, than mere revisions of the existing IHR. But a new treaty will only be enforceable among those member states that have ratified it in what is typically a prolonged process – while any IHR revisions that are agreed to would be applicable to all 196 WHO member states immediately. Ultimately, it is reaching political consensus on the often-charged content of proposed treaty/IHR reforms that matters the most. But to do that, the process also needs careful consideration – and demystification. WHO former legal counsel Gian Luca Burci, Adjunct Professor of international law at the Geneva Graduate Institute, takes apart the procedural issues, and what they mean, ahead of the third working group meeting of member states on the issue, next week. Pandemic Treaty or IHR revisions – exploring the pathways & process In May, the World Health Assembly tasked a Member States’ working group with the critical mission of assessing “the benefits of developing a WHO convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” The Working Group on Strengthening WHO Preparedness and Response to Health Emergencies (WGPR) is now tasked with coming up with a recommendation in time for a WHA special session in November on whether the WHA should establish an intergovernmental process “to draft and negotiate such a convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” Just two months from the deadline, we understand that discussions in the WGPR are moving towards negotiating a new “pandemic treaty” and revising the International Health Regulations (IHR) in parallel after the November WHA – rather than forcing a choice between them. While this would be a welcome compromise, there seems to be some confusion, as well as contradictory positions, about the procedural steps required to pursue either option. Debate is particularly intense over the question of whether amending the IHR or concluding a treaty would be “easier and quicker,” and which option would incentivize more participation and commitment. While the process will eventually depend on a number of, as yet, unpredictable factors, international law and practice point to some likely steps and procedural requirements, which are reviewed here. This is without reference to the potential content of a pandemic treaty or amended IHR – closely related to questions of speed and difficulty of negotiations. This review also does not purport to be exhaustive; more information can be found in the Geneva Graduate Institute’s “Guide to a Pandemic Treaty.” Pandemic Treaty – from negotiation to adoption, ratification & entry into force Launch of the negotiating process Under Article 19 of the WHO Constitution, the WHA can adopt “conventions or agreements with respect to any matter within the competence of the Organization.” The process leading up to a WHO treaty (“treaty,” “convention,” “agreement” are different denominations but do not change the substance) would therefore be launched by a WHA resolution. The resolution could shape negotiations, for example by requesting that certain issues be included in the treaty or given priority. However, that level of prescriptiveness is infrequent in contemporary treaty practice to leave flexibility to the negotiators. Negotiating forum The Health Assembly would establish a dedicated intergovernmental body open to all WHO member states to draft and negotiate the future convention. This step can be articulated in many different ways and there is no single model in international practice. In the case of the WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control (FCTC), for example, the process was subdivided into two parts: 1) a working group was firstly established to discuss possible building blocks of the convention before committing to treaty negotiations and 2) after a green light from WHA, an intergovernmental negotiating body was established. However, in many other cases, a single body (labelled for example an “intergovernmental negotiating committee”) was responsible for the whole preparation and negotiation of the treaty. This occurred, for example, with the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) and later its Kyoto Protocol. WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus delivering the closing speech for the 72nd World Health Assembly in 2019, prior to the COVID-19 pandemic. Negotiating bodies of this nature are invariably open to participation by all member states. In addition, the European Union is a likely invitee with full rights of participation under the rubric of “regional economic integration organizations” (a category that so far includes only the EU). And indeed the EU has already been one of the most vocal advocates of a pandemic treaty. Participation of other non-state actors Beyond member states and possibly the EU, one can expect participation to be extended to other actors identified in the 2016 Framework of Engagement with Non-State Actors, most importantly NGOs, international business associations and philanthropic foundations (the fourth group, academic institutions, are not entitled to participate but are sometimes invited ad hoc as experts). All these actors would participate as “observers” with limited privileges, rather than full negotiators. For example, they usually can only participate in public meetings but are excluded from closed negotiating sessions that often prevail at crucial stages of the process. However, what matters is physical presence at the negotiations to lobby and brief delegates and network with like-minded organizations. Unlike more technical questions such as “one health” and access to pathogen samples, we can expect substantial civil society mobilization and lobbying behind issues such as equity, human rights and access to countermeasures. These considerations are especially relevant if negotiations resume in person; if the sanitary situation still requires online meetings, the process will have to be adapted and the recent sessions of the WHA and the Executive Board offer a blueprint for that. Virtual negotiations of course are less than ideal for all participants. Methods of work – geopolitical representation and the demands of consensus decision-making The body or bodies established by the WHA will have to elect their officers, typically following WHO’s breakdown into six regions. The Assembly can prescribe the make-up of the bureau, as in the case of the WGPR. Appointing the bureau can be a delicate process depending on geopolitical circumstances or competing ambitions. The role of the bureau is not cast in stone but can be decisive for the progress and outcome of work, in particular by working informally behind the scenes to explore options and foster consensus. The bodies concerned will operate under the WHA rules of procedure, but in practice they enjoy considerable discretion in organizing their work. It is customary, and practically a dogma within WHO, that decisions be only taken by consensus without a formal vote. This increases the importance of the process that has to be perceived as fair, legitimate and inclusive to lead to a result that is at least not unacceptable to any state. The requirement of consensus decision-making carries a lot of inertia all the way to the WHA; even though any state can break consensus by formally objecting and requesting a vote, it is in fact a heavy responsibility to do so and it hardly ever happens. Negotiations of long and complex instruments usually require dividing the text, or particularly difficult issues, among subcommittees that work in parallel, formally report to the plenary on their progress and are often coordinated by the bureau. Small delegations have understandable difficulties in managing multiple meetings, and there is an established practice within WHO to avoid more than two parallel meetings. Available UN-system practice, however, shows much flexibility to adapt the organization of work and the mix of formal and informal meetings. Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, WHO Director General, discussing a pandemic treaty in September 2021. Complex WHO intergovernmental negotiations have often been supplemented by intersessional consultations, either on a regional basis or on specific topics. Regional consultations can be particularly effective in reaching common positions and strengthening the negotiating leverage of groups of countries that could otherwise be overpowered individually. Duration and frequency of negotiations are difficult to predict The duration and frequency of treaty negotiations are difficult to predict. The duration of negotiations will depend on a number of factors including the complexity of the issues at hand, the attitude of key countries, the sense of urgency, the diplomatic ability of the bureau, and the intended outcome. A general “framework convention” without detailed and highly prescriptive obligations may be relatively quicker to achieve, but practice shows that even negotiating such instruments requires on average no less than two years. By way of reference, negotiating the UNFCCC took about two years, the FCTC took three years and six negotiating sessions, while its protocol on illicit trade took four years and five sessions. In contrast, negotiating the two IAEA conventions concluded on the heels of the 1986 Chernobyl nuclear accident took just a few months. It is common for the responsible governing body, in our case the WHA, to request progress reports and set a deadline for the conclusion of the negotiations. Even though there are no draconian consequences for not meeting it, it helps focus the negotiations and keep momentum. The frequency of formal meetings usually depends on available financial resources, the capacity of delegations and the secretariat to manage the workload and the calendar of other intergovernmental meetings. One can usually expect no more than two negotiating sessions of 1-2 weeks per year as a maximum. How to get to the initial draft? The initial draft of the treaty is politically and psychologically very important because it inevitably shapes the dynamics of the subsequent negotiations, even for countries opposing it. Even though it is possible for one or more states to come forward with a zero draft text, this is a relatively uncommon step because questions about the motives of the proposing states could affect or derail negotiations. The responsibility to propose a full zero draft therefore can either fall on the chair of the negotiating body (e.g. the FCTC), on the secretariat (e.g. the revised IHR, or in the environmental field the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, drafted by the UNEP Secretariat). An important point in this regard is that a zero draft does not come out of thin air, but is the result of previous consultations or preparatory work. In the case of the IHR, the draft proposed by the secretariat was the culmination of many years of technical work and consultations, thus the text was submitted promptly to negotiations after a round of regional consultations. In the case of the pandemic treaty, so far there has been no real open discussion on its scope and content either in the WHA or the WGPR, and it is unlikely that this will occur before the WHA special session. Consequently, it is foreseeable that the body established by the WHA will devote an initial period to discuss or seek expert input on the possible building blocks of a treaty and their challenges and implications. Given the uncertainties and questions surrounding the recent proposals, it would be counterproductive to try to short-circuit an inclusive and bottom-up process for achieving a quick result at all costs. Adoption of the treaty and next steps The final draft text would be submitted to the WHA for consideration. As noted above, the Assembly will almost certainly adopt the treaty by consensus. In the unlikely event where consensus could not be reached, Article 19 of the Constitution requires a two-thirds majority (calculated on the basis of valid votes excluding abstentions). The virtual World Health Assembly nerve center at WHO’s Geneva headquarters in May 2020. The upcoming WHA Special Session will likely take a similar form. Other steps that can be taken by the WHA will depend on the nature of the treaty and the conclusions of the negotiations. A pandemic treaty will in all probability be a normative instrument establishing its own governance. Relying on precedents including the FCTC, this will include at a minimum a conference of the parties and a secretariat. Initial work on the institutional aspects will require drafting rules of procedure for the conference of the parties and, depending on the institutional arrangements contained in the treaty, financial regulations and a budget. Even though a treaty is a self-contained instrument and its governance will not be part of WHO’s, the latter may end up providing or hosting its secretariat. For all these reasons, the WHA may establish upon the adoption of the treaty a new intergovernmental body to prepare all the foregoing steps and facilitate the work of the first session of the conference of the parties. Signature, ratification and entry into force Multilateral treaties are customarily opened for signature for a defined period of time. What matters for the entry into force of the treaty, however, is reaching the required number of ratifications (or adherence, accession, formal confirmation depending on the final clauses of the treaty) and how fast that will occur. The threshold for entry into force has varied wildly in previous treaties, anywhere between 20 and 60 as an average (it was 40 for the FCTC and its illicit trade protocol). The number agreed upon will in practice depend on a compromise between an early establishment of the new legal regime and the critical mass of states required to make it credible and effective. A review of UN-system treaties shows on average a time gap of between two and four years between adoption and entry into force; the FCTC protocol on illicit trade took six years, probably reflecting its complexity and demands at national level, but the FCTC took only 21 months. A related consideration for the credibility of the treaty will be the attitude of key states, whether and how quickly they will ratify it and whether they will actively oppose it should they choose to remain outside it. A device occasionally used when it is urgent to start applying a treaty is the so-called “provisional application”, whereby contracting parties indicate in the treaty itself or in a separate act (e.g. the WHA resolution adopting a treaty) that they will provisionally implement the treaty pending its entry into force. A classic but atypical example is the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), provisionally applied from 1947 until 1995. I mention this for the sake of completeness, but it is not a common arrangement for self-intuitive sovereignty concerns. Most of the foregoing considerations also apply to the negotiation and conclusion of protocols to the treaty, should it be drafted as a framework convention requiring separate instruments to spell out its obligations. Albeit linked organically to the “mother convention”, protocols are separate treaties in their own right. Certain steps of the negotiations will probably go faster than for the original convention since the latter provides an applicable legal framework. However, the experience of the FCTC protocol – 10 years from beginning of negotiations to entry into force and only 63 parties so far – should induce caution and deter over-optimism about “quick wins” or “low-hanging fruits.” Strategic reflection is required on whether to make the implementation of a possible pandemic treaty depend heavily on the conclusion of separate protocols. A comparison of the processes required for the creation of a pandemic treaty and revising the International Health Regulations. Amending the International Health Regulations – what is similar or different? The step-by-step process for amending the IHR is spelled out in Article 55. Amendments can be proposed by any state party or the WHO Director-General (DG). Given the direction that the WGPR seems to be taking, it is likely that any amendment process will be launched directly by the Assembly, thus shortening this initial step. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen, and been controversial within WHO, well before the COVID-19 pandemic. With the exception of a highly-technical 2014 amendment extending the recognised lifetime of yellow fever vaccines, successive IHR Review Committees [expert bodies appointed by the WHO DG] have advised against amendments, and the WHO Secretariat has also traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. This is due partly to the perceived risk of opening up the entire Regulations to unpredictable and potentially counterproductive revisions that may end up decreasing their credibility and effectiveness. This concern is understandable and legitimate, but, firstly, it applies to any legislative instrument where the risk of unforeseeable outcomes has to be weighed against the need to improve its design and content. Secondly, the WHA can narrow the scope of the amendments by instructing the negotiating body to only deal with specific issues. While this conditionality is infrequent and probably undesirable in the case of treaties, it would be more plausible with regard to the IHR since the Assembly is their parent body and exercises direct oversight functions over them. Similar procedural considerations – but requiring a less steep “learning curve” Most of the procedural considerations involved in the negotiation of a pandemic treaty would apply mutatis mutandis to the amendment of the IHR – and thus are not repeated here. A possible difference concerns the preparatory work preceding and leading to an initial draft of the amendments. The learning curve for a pandemic treaty could be steeper and longer given the absence of an intergovernmental discussion thus far and the lack of familiarity of many delegations. The IHR and its complexities are better known to the public health and foreign affairs officials following WHO affairs, and it is likely that delegations may be willing to move quickly into drafting and negotiations. IHR-specific requirements Article 50 of the IHR provides that the Review Committee shall “make technical recommendations to the Director-General regarding amendments to these Regulations.” The main consideration, time-wise, is whether involving the Review Committee is a compulsory step, since the procedural requirements in the IHR and the way in which they have been implemented by the secretariat so far, are formal and cumbersome and may lead to delays. The second and related consideration is at which stage of the amendment process would the Review Committee intervene? Would it make its recommendations before amendments are drafted, on an initial draft, or rather towards the end of the process? The political implications of those different approaches for the negotiations may be considerable. There are few precedents from which lessons may be learned. The IHR have been amended only once, in 2014, adjusting the requirements for yellow fever vaccination required by some state parties (eg. India) for international travelers arriving from yellow-fever endemic countries (Annex 7). The amendment extended the validity of a well-accepted vaccine from 10 years to lifetime in line with new evidence about the vaccine’s efficacy. An IHR Review Committee was not created for that occasion, setting a precedent. At the same time, the yellow fever vaccine amendment was limited and very technical. It was recommended by the Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on immunization, a dedicated expert group convened by the WHO secretariat, and the WHO Executive Board proposed the amendment to the WHA. In contrast, a broad and substantial amendment of multiple, substantive provisions of the IHR, which might cover sensitive issues around the early warning of outbreaks and WHO’s mandate to investigate and enforce IHR provisions, may be seen as something different legally and politically – warranting the creation of an IHR Review Committee. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen but the WHO Secretariat has traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. The main legal consideration is that the Review Committee is an expert body providing its recommendations to the DG at his request rather than a governance organ partaking of the normative functions of WHO. There can be situations like the one just mentioned, in which that technical input is not necessary or can be provided through different and less time-consuming channels. Moreover, a process initiated by the Executive Board or the WHA is different from a proposal by a member state or the DG. In my view, convening a Review Committee may be politically but not legally necessary. It is indicative in this connection that Article 55 does not mention the Review Committee, which suggests that its participation is not compulsory. Adoption of the amendments and entry into force Article 55 requires that amendments be communicated to state parties at least four months before the opening of the WHA, which may influence the schedule of the negotiating body. As noted above, consensus is the norm in WHO, and that will apply to the adoption of the amendments. In the unlikely event of formal objections, a vote would require a simple majority instead of the two-thirds required for a treaty. The main difference between a pandemic treaty and amendments to the IHR concerns entry into force. Pursuant to Article 22 of the Constitution and Article 59 of the IHR, the latter enter into force for all member states 24 months after the DG’s notification of adoption, except for those member states that either reject the amendments or file a reservation within 18 months from that notification. In case of a reservation, Article 62 provides for a rather complex process to determine whether the reservation is compatible with the object and purpose of the Regulations and can be accepted. The Article 62 procedure makes it very difficult in practice to reject a reservation and, historically, the sole objection that I am aware of was by Australia to the 1969 version of the IHR. Opting out of a regulation (or amendments thereof) is a drastic, highly visible and politically heavy decision that states would probably take only for the most serious reasons. Still, both rejections and successful reservations are possible and would undesirably fragment what should be instead a uniform legal and coordinating framework to achieve global health security. Objections could also create impossibly complex situations, e.g. in case of amendments changing the functions of WHO, because objecting states would remain bound by the different functions enshrined in the original IHR. For these reasons and as noted above with regard to a pandemic treaty, the inclusiveness, fairness and legitimacy of the process are of crucial importance to keep states in the fold even if they are not entirely satisfied of the outcome. Conclusions – both exercises can be more or less difficult, depending on the political atmosphere Among the preliminary conclusions that can be drawn is the fact that the two processes, when compared side-by-side, would be substantially similar. However there are some significant differences which will need careful consideration as well. Significantly, amending the IHR may be faster because: 1) modifying an existing text is presumably easier than negotiating one from scratch, 2) the WHA can define and narrow the scope and purpose of the amendments, and 3) WHO member states are relatively familiar with the Regulations. The need to consult the Review Committee, however, must be clarified – as well as what this might mean for achieving consensus. The timeline for entry into force of a treaty or any IHR amendments may be similar for either of the two options, but the amendments to the IHR would enter into force for all 196 WHO member states. In the case of a new treaty, a subset of countries will be bound by it once it enters into force, but the timeline for all WHO member states to ratify such a new instrument could be much more protracted – and remains unknown. Politically, both exercises can be more or less difficult depending on the political atmosphere, the proposals on the table, the ability of the bureau to build consensus and the myriad other factors characterizing any major multilateral negotiation. In both processes, there is great importance in reaching a real and sustainable consensus. At the same time, joining consensus in the WHA to adopt a pandemic treaty is not necessarily predictive of future ratifications since governments as well as circumstances may change. In both cases, finally, it will be important to maintain momentum but avoid imposing unrealistic timelines for the negotiations. The Independent Panel’s call for concluding a pandemic treaty in six months is an example of an unrealistic goal in this connection. Opting into a treaty requires political will and action, which can be highly appealing to politicians. On the other hand, remaining bound by a revised IHR could also be the positive outcome of political inertia and inaction – that is a country’s reluctance to be seen as opting out. The key questions are what is more politically feasible, and what will build more genuine, sustained political commitment to any improved set of international rules that aim to better govern future outbreaks and reduce pandemic risks. Gian Luca Burci is adjunct professor of international law at the Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies. His areas of expertise are global health law and governance, global health security and the law and practice of international organizations. Between 2005 and 2016 he was Legal Counsel of WHO. Updated on 07.10.2021 with a description of the 2014 IHR amendment on requirements around yellow fever vaccines. Image Credits: Flickr – Guilhem Vellut, Flickr – US Mission Geneva, WHO / Antoine Tardy, WHO, Gian Luca Burci, Wikimedia Commons. Tuberculosis is Here to Stay if We Don’t Mobilise Resources for Diagnoses and Double Fundings, New Data Shows 01/10/2021 Aishwarya Tendolkar Global efforts to eliminate TB have been set back by the COVID-19 pandemic. The COVID-19 pandemic and the consequent diversion of resources toward battling SARS-CoV2 has also set back global efforts to eliminate the world’s second most deadly infectious killer: Tuberculosis, by 2030. Only a doubling of investments next year can pave the way to attainment of the 2030 United Nations Sustainable Development Goals to eliminate the disease, experts and panelists at the Stop TB Partnership said Tuesday. The panel session coincided with the release of new data from a study conducted by the Stop TB Partnership that showed COVID’s impact on TB response this year continues to be as devastating as last year, with 1.2 million fewer people projected to be diagnosed and treated for TB this year, in comparison with 2019. The new estimates, developed in collaboration with USAID, Johns Hopkins University, Avenir Health and Imperial College, are based on data from 27 countries that account for 75 percent of the global TB caseload. That means TB investments for this coming year need to be doubled, in order to meet a 2018-2022 target for diagnosing and treating 40 million people (or 10 million a year), within that four year time frame, the Partnership says. TB kills 4,000 people a day The airborne disease still kills 4,000 people every day, with nearly a quarter of the world’s population estimated to have been infected. Despite being curable and preventable, only an estimated 5.7 million people received treatment for TB in 2020, a decline of 21 percent from the previous year—leaving an estimated 4.3 million people with untreated TB and implying all but certain death for probably half that number, the report showed. A lack of attention to the disease, lack of funding, and a dearth of proper diagnostic tools are responsible, Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership said at a Stop TB briefing Tuesday. “COVID showed that if the government and people are scared, money is not an issue. We are in the middle of a disaster but our attention seems to be in a very wrong place.” Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership. The “orphan disease” does not receive political priority or funding, Obiefuna Austin Arinze, Executive Director of Afro Global Alliance and incoming Vice-Chair of the Stop TB Partnership Board said. At current levels of funding, the world will miss the target set by the United National High-Level Meeting on TB that took place in 2018 for diagnosing and treating 40 million people with TB by 2022. With just 400 days to reach 2022 goals, the diagnostic figure is even more grim for children with TB, Ditiu said. However, with mobilisation of resources – including funding, digital diagnostics and more government-sponsored community interventions – the world could reach the target’s 90% mark – treating some 36 million people, Ditiu said. Annual resource needs and available funding for TB in USD. So why is investing in TB diagnosis and elimination imperative? In simple words, it saves more lives than you would think. “Investing an extra dollar in TB is one of the best dollars spent to help the world,” Dr Bjorn Lomborg, President of the Danish think tank, Copenhagen Consensus, said at the teleconference. According to him, it would only cost US$8.1 billion dollars annually, between now and 2030, to eliminate TB. This investment translates to benefits worth US$348 billion dollars, pegging the benefit-cost ratio at 43. This means that every dollar invested in TB prevention and care yields a return of US$43. But currently, only US$6.5 billion is available annually for TB response globally. Moreover, TB funding has stagnated over the last five years – meaning there are big gaps that need to be overcome now. That’s why, at the UNHLM on TB in 2018, states and non-state actors pledged to commit a total of US$13 billion annually until 2022 to overcome past shortfalls – unfortunately COVID intervened the following year and those pledges were not honored. Some US$13 billion in funding is needed for TB care and prevention per year. TB is traditionally a low GF funding priority – despite a high dependency on Global Fund services in LMICs Despite being curable, preventable, and easily diagnosable, TB sees more deaths (over 1 million annually) than HIV/AIDS and Malaria combined. At the same time, The Global Fund channels only 18 percent of its resources to TB diagnosis and treatment. The remaining 82% is invested in fighting HIV/AIDS, malaria, and more recently, COVID-19 tests and treatments. Although 85% of national TB budgets, on average, are financed by low- and middle-income countries themselves, they remain highly dependent on the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria to fill vital gaps in services. And that adds weight to the Global Fund’s appeals, panelists pointed out. In terms of how those funds should be spent, the World Health Organisation along with the UN Secretary General have outlined priority recommendations to ramp up the TB response, Tereza Kasaeva, Director of WHO’s Global TB Programme said. “Efforts need to be intensified to make these recommendations a reality.” Diagnosis still reliant on less accurate sputum smear microscopy According to WHO, the diagnosis of TB and drug-resistant TB remains a challenge with one-third of people with TB and two-thirds of people with drug-resistant TB not being detected globally. While WHO recommends highly accurate rapid molecular assays as the initial test to diagnose TB, less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool. Only 28 percent of people were diagnosed with MTB using a rapid molecular test in 2019, Ditiu said. This means that nearly three quarters of diagnoses are done using the “clinical” smear microscopy. Smear microscopy, while cost-effective, has a poor track record in diagnosing extra-pulmonary tuberculosis, paediatric tuberculosis, and TB in patients co-infected with HIV and tuberculosis, a paper pointed. “Why don’t we allow people proper diagnostic tools?” she asked, pointing out that an untreated person with TB can transmit the bacteria to nearly 15 people every year. “Now think about this in countries like India with a population of 1.2 billion.” Less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool for TB, despite the existence of highly accurate rapid molecular assays. COVID devastated TB diagnostics To make matters worse, the COVID-19 pandemic devastated the diagnostics investments in TB – whereby existing resources were diverted, and tools like the highly accurate GeneXpert molecular diagnostic platforms were repurposed to diagnose COVID, in the pandemic’s early days. Since then, new rapid COVID diagnostic tests have become widely available, but there has been no significant recovery plan for TB diagnostics put into place, Obiefuna said. The COVID-19 pandemic was not the first time that the health infrastructure for TB was used to tackle other health crises, and particularly those related to airborne diseases, pointed out Cheri Vincent, Chief of USAID’s TB Division, at the meeting. “We saw it [being diverted] for Ebola and airborne influenza,” she said, adding, “If we can’t solve TB, we can’t solve the next airborne pandemic,” she highlighted. In fact, TB doctors were the first to be diverted to tackle the COVID-19 breakout, Ditiu said. The Zambia story, and what it teaches us But not all has been downhill in the fight against TB. Zambia offers an example of a country that has been able to sustain its TB programmes through a combination of domestic funding, government-community partnerships, and diagnostic tools – despite the COVID pandemic. It can provide inspiration for countries battling both diseases at the same time. Already today, Zambia has achieved 89% of its 2022 UNHLM diagnosis and treatment target. Over the past five years, the country invested US$45 million of domestic resources in TB response. “[TB] commodity security is key to achieving our goals,” said Dr. Patrick Lungu, National TB and Leprosy Control Program Manager in Zambia. A ‘TB Situation room’ was created to review TB programmes on a weekly basis to identify issues that may be negatively impacting performance. “We were able to offer more technical support to different levels of the health system – which translates to Zambia envisaging to achieve the UNHLM target in at least two-three key indicators,” Lungu said. Zambia has achieved nearly 89 percent of its UNHLM target so far. Will India achieve its ambitious 2025 TB elimination target? When it comes to countries like India – which bears the heaviest TB burden in the world, the pandemic has slowed-down and diverted efforts to eliminate elimination of TB by 2025 -a huge goal set by the government. According to the Indian Health Ministry’s 2021 Annual Report on Tuberculosis Elimination, reports and notification of confirmed TB diagnoses tumbled 38 percent in March-April 2020 owing to the lockdown. Furthermore, a majority of the country’s TB elimination resources were repurposed for Covid-19. Then just as services were beginning to recoup, a massive second COVID wave hit the country in spring 2021; it remains unclear what dents that made in the progress India had seen toward the end of 2020. In its 2021 official report, the Indian Health Ministry nonetheless suggested that the dedicated Infectious disease hospitals that were established for Covid will contribute “significantly” to future TB Care and management. Despite being scheduled to be a part of Tuesday’s Stop TB Partnership panel, the Indian Health Ministry did not make an appearance – leaving a lack of clarity on trends and progress in 2021. But on a global level, the warning signs are clear. Says Ditui: “we have erased 10-12 years of progress, and are back to 2010-11 levels of TB detection and cases. This becomes all the more alarming with the fact that TB is not a new disease but one that has been around for decades, and has a vaccine. One can only hope that TB receives the undivided effort it needs to be eliminated.” Image Credits: The Global Fund / Evgeny Maloletka, Stop TB Partnership, Dr. Patrick Lungu. Posts navigation Older postsNewer posts This site uses cookies to help give you the best experience on our website. Cookies enable us to collect information that helps us personalise your experience and improve the functionality and performance of our site. By continuing to read our website, we assume you agree to this, otherwise you can adjust your browser settings. Please read our cookie and Privacy Policy. Our Cookies and Privacy Policy Loading Comments... You must be logged in to post a comment.
Jamaica, Nicaragua and Haiti Fail to Reach 10% COVID-19 Vaccination Target 07/10/2021 Raisa Santos Cuba is seeking WHO approval for its COVID-19 vaccines. Jamaica, Nicaragua, and Haiti were the only three member countries of the Pan American Health Organization (PAHO) that failed to meet the World Health Organization (WHO) target of vaccinating 10% of their populations against COVID-19 by the end of September. Around 37% of people in Latin America and the Caribbean have been fully vaccinated against COVID-19, while seven countries in the Americas have vaccinated more than 70% of their populations, according to PAHO. While COVID-19 cases are down in the Americas, some local trends across the region remain worrisome, PAHO officials said during a press briefing Wednesday. The Americas reported a 12% decrease in weekly new cases, according to the newest WHO Weekly Epidemiological Update on COVID-19. Worrying local trends However, local trends paint a different story. Many Southwestern Canadian provinces and the US state of Alaska are reporting their highest hospitalization rates and ICU peaks, with emergency rooms in Alaska overwhelmed with COVID-19. Chile is also seeing a rise in new cases, especially in urban regions, such as the metropolitan region of Santiago, and in port cities such as Coquimbo and Antofagasta. While cases continue to decrease in Central America, Costa Rica and Belize continue to see high rates of hospitalization and ICU peaks. In response, PAHO urged governments to remain vigilant on monitoring local COVID-19 trends in their areas. “We are reminding governments to keep a close eye on local trends because infection dynamics vary within each country, in part due to differences in vaccine availability and uptake. This small localized approach will be key to keep outbreaks under control,” PAHO Director Carissa Etienne implored. Vaccine shortages Although 875,000 vaccine doses have arrived in the region, this is not enough to protect everyone, said Etienne. “We continue to urge countries with surplus doses to share them with countries in our region, where they can have life-saving impact.” PAHO continues to deliver COVAX-funded doses and donations, having already closed agreements with three emergency use listing authorized vaccines – Sinovac, Sinopharm, and AstraZeneca. Nicaragua has recently announced that the country will receive 7 million doses of Cuban vaccines Abdala, Soberana, and Soberana 2 over the next 3 months. Cuba had released information back in June regarding the vaccines – its three-dose Abdala vaccine was 92% effective, and its Soberana 2 vaccine is 91% effective when combined with a booster vaccine called Soberana Plus. The island’s national regulatory agency approved the Abdala vaccine in July and the Soberana 2 vaccine in August. Cuba is currently trying to seek WHO approval for its two home-grown vaccines, which would facilitate their delivery in other countries. PAHO is supporting Cuba’s participation in the vaccine qualification process. “Our interest is that all vaccines are able to participate in the WHO process for granting emergency use authorization because this will broaden the supply of vaccines that we are able to purchase through the Revolving Fund,” said PAHO’s Assistant Director Jarbas Barbosa. For now, PAHO is working with the Nicaraguan government to increase its vaccine access – the country is receiving 223,000 doses from Pfizer starting next week, and an additional 81,900 vaccines from Pfizer are to be received over the rest of the month. Nicaragua is receiving other vaccines through COVAX, as well as vaccine donations from Spain. Image Credits: News Prensa Latina/Twitter. WHO Approves First Ever Malaria Vaccine 06/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Children under the age of five years in sub-Saharan Africa continued to account for approximately two-thirds of global deaths from malaria. The World Health Organization (WHO) has given the go-ahead for children to get the first-ever malaria vaccine in areas where there is a high to moderate risk of infection. The vaccine, known as RTS,S, is the first to have been approved against a parasitic disease. It has been tested on 800,000 children in Ghana, Kenya and Malawi over two years as part of routine immunisations and found to reduce severe malaria-related hospitalisation by 30% and clinical malaria by 40%, researchers revealed at a WHO press conference on Wednesday. “This is a historic moment. The long-awaited malaria vaccine for children is a breakthrough for science, child health and malaria control,” said WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, who started his medical career as a malaria researcher. “Using this vaccine on top of existing tools to prevent malaria could save tens of thousands of young lives each year.” The WHO recommends that the vaccine – which acts against P. falciparum, the deadliest malaria parasite – is given in four doses to children from the age of five months to around 18 months. Tedros said that progress against malaria “has stalled at an unacceptably high level, with more than 200 million cases, and 400,000 deaths every year – two-thirds of which are children under five in Africa”. “Every two minutes, a child under five dies of malaria,” said Dr Matshidiso Moeti, WHO Regional Director for Africa, adding that 94% of malaria cases were in Africa. Dr Matshidiso Moeti, WHO Regional Director of Africa. “We have long hoped for an effective malaria vaccine and now for the first time ever, we have such a vaccine recommended for widespread use.” Moeti added that the WHO would support the production of the vaccine in Africa. However, GlaxoSmithKline (GSK), which has invested US$ 700 million in the development of RTS,S and donated up to 10 million doses for the pilot programme, will be working with an Indian generic producer to manufacture the vaccine for the foreseeable future. “GSK was clear at the time, as we’ve proceeded with this vaccine that, having provided a large degree of development funding and producing the vaccine for the implementation programme, was nevertheless seeking a tech transfer partner for the long term production of this vaccine,” said Dr Kate O’Brien, WHO head of immunisation. “There was a programme opened up to initiate interest from vaccine manufacturers and the partner who will be with GSK for this tech transfer is Bharat Biotech in India.” Protect children’s development Dr Alejandro Cravioto, Chair of the WHO Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on Immunization (SAGE), said that his group recommended the use of the vaccine to ensure the healthy growth and development of children. “The experience we have had before with other infections showed us clearly that a child that is repetitively sick is maimed for life,” said Cravioto. “He or she is not capable of developing the capacities that he or she is born with, in the sense of achieving an adulthood that will be meaningful. So having anything that protects them, or helps them to be less sick during this growth phase, is essential.” Global vaccine alliance, Gavi, health agency Unitaid and the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria committed nearly US$ 70 million to fund the pilot, which was designed to address several outstanding questions related to the public health use of the vaccine following the Phase 3 trial showing efficacy of RTS,S. “We welcome this new tool in the fight against malaria,” said Peter Sands, Executive Director of the Global Fund. “In countries where the Global Fund invests, we have reduced malaria deaths by 45% since 2002 with testing, treatment and prevention tools such as mosquito nets. “In the vaccine pilots, the RTS,S vaccine was most effective when used together with these existing tools. Significant additional resources will be necessary to enable wide deployment of the vaccine alongside other innovations, and as part of a sustained and comprehensive response in the countries that need it the most.” Following the WHO recommendation, global stakeholders, including Gavi, will consider whether and how to finance a new malaria vaccination programme for countries in sub-Saharan Africa, according to a statement by Gavi, the Global Fund and Unitaid. The vaccine will complement other WHO-recommended measures for malaria prevention, including the use of insecticide-treated bed nets, indoor spraying with insecticides, malaria chemoprevention strategies, and the timely use of malaria testing and treatment. Image Credits: WHO. African Medicines Agency Will Come into Being on 5 November – after 15th African Country Ratifies & Deposits AMA Treaty 06/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan The African Medicines Agency’s framework would help combat falsified products Africans are a step closer to speedier access to newer, safer medicines following this week’s notification by 15 African Union (AU) member countries that they have formally ratified and deposited their accord to create a new African Medicines Agency (AMA). Although the AU adopted the treaty to set up the AMA back in February 2019, 15 African countries had to formally notify the AU Commission that they had ratified the treaty before the agency could be set up. On Tuesday, Cameroon became the 15th country to deposit its ratification instrument – finally pushing the AMA over the threshold into reality. According to the Treaty, the AMA will now come into force in 30 days time – on 5 November. The AMA aims to support African countries to better regulate medical products and harmonise the regulation of medicines across the continent. It will also test samples of medicines from time to time to eliminate fakes that plague the continent. The 14 other countries to have both ratified the AMA and “deposited the instrument of ratification” at the AU (a letter from the head of state informing it of ratification) are Algeria, Benin, Burkina Faso, Gabon, Guinea, Mali, Mauritius, Namibia, Niger, Rwanda, Seychelles, Sierra Leone and Zimbabwe. A further three countries have ratified the treaty but not formally informed the AU, while eight more have signed the treaty but not yet ratified it. This means 36 of Africa’s 55 countries – predominantly Francophone countries – have expressed support for the AMA. However, African powerhouses Ethiopia, Nigeria and South Africa have not yet expressed their support for the AMA. Today, we celebrate as AMA made it to the finish line. 15th instrument of ratification received by the @_AfricanUnion and the 30 day count down for AMA to enter into force has officially began! Congratulations to the member states that have made this possible See infographic 👇 pic.twitter.com/4IqLRLEIqP — Dorothy Njagi (@Dottienjagi) October 5, 2021 The COVID-19 pandemic has highlighted the need for countries to speedily assess medicines and vaccines, a capacity that a number of African countries lack. The African Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has played a central role in co-ordinating the health response to the pandemic on the continent, and highlighted the value of a continental player during a health crisis. Greg Perry, Assistant Director-General of the International Federation of Pharmaceutical Manufacturers and Associations (IFPMA), welcomed the AMA’s ratification, describing it as taking “one step closer to achieving a continent-wide regulatory agency”. “We look forward to the full implementation of the AMA,, which will be a game-changer for all Africans to access safe, effective and quality medical products in a timely manner,” said Perry. Pharmaceutical companies have long complained about how complicated it is to get medicines approved in Africa and how long it takes particularly in comparison to Europe, which processes applications via a central European Medicines Agency (EMA). Perry added that for the agency to become fully operational, it was important for the AU to define the appropriate funding model and engage with the African Medicines Regulatory Harmonisation initiative “which has already set strong governance structures and pan-African guidance in place for the approval of COVID-19 treatments and vaccines”. Reduce barriers to African market entry Andy Gray, senior lecturer in pharmacology at the University of KwaZulu-Natal, said that AMA’s greatest potential lies “in the field of harmonisation of regulatory systems, which should reduce the barriers to market entry in Africa”. “The AMA is not intended to be a supranational regulator, and will not make decisions in the way the EMA does, but it could help in bringing national medicines regulatory authorities together, simplifying systems and reducing redundancy,” explained Gray. “It can also make a major difference by promoting transparency of regulatory action across the continent, and showing how that can drive reliance models of regulation.” Gray added that the AMA could learn lessons from the Africa CDC by providing “visible and credible leadership”, ensuring “practical outputs, not just talk” and ensure it had recognition in appropriate global forums. Today is a historic day. #Cameroon became the 15 country to deposit the instrument of ratification of the African Medicines Agency. Now, the treaty will enter into force in 30 days (Nov 5). #AMA is a game change on our continent.@AUC_MoussaFaki @PR_Paul_BIYA pic.twitter.com/0KOYh5EEvk — Michel Sidibé (@MichelSidibe) October 5, 2021 Earlier this year, Michel Sidibé, the former Executive Director of UNAIDS and Mali’s Minister of Health, was appointed as the AU’s Special Envoy for the AMA. He has been leading efforts to ensure that countries ratify the agency, and could be in the running to head it. Announcing Cameroon’s ratification of the AMA on Twitter this week, Sidibé described the agency as a “game-changer for our continent”. Image Credits: United States Army , Marco Verch/Flickr. African Countries are the Focus of New Maternal Mortality Targets 05/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan UNFPA Executive Director Dr Natalia Kanem Nineteen countries have been prioritised for support to implement new global targets aimed at preventing maternal and newborn deaths. This emerged at the launch on Tuesday of the new targets, which were developed by the World Health Organization (WHO), UN Population Fund (UNFPA) and their partners in the Ending Preventable Maternal Mortality (EPMM) initiative. UNFPA Executive Director Dr Natalia Kanem said that while the global community had committed to reducing the global maternal mortality rates to 70 deaths per 100,000 live births by 2030 as part of the sustainable development goals (SDG), it was not moving fast enough. “If the current pace prevails, we will not reach this goal before 2065,” said Kanem. “This is a wake-up call for us to urgently scale up and accelerate our efforts with less than 10 years to go.” Fourteen of the chosen countries are in Africa and include Chad, which has one of the highest maternal mortality rates in the world, as well as Nigeria and Ethiopia. The five non-African countries are Afghanistan, Pakistan, Mexico, Nepal and Laos. The 19 priority countries identified for action against maternal mortality. The 19 countries will get support to implement and monitor the targets, according to the UN agency officials. There are five targets: 90% pregnant women to attend four or more antenatal care visits (towards increasing to eight visits by 2030); 90% of births to be attended by skilled health personnel; 80% of women who have just given birth to access postnatal care within two days of delivery; 60% of the population to have access to emergency obstetric care within two hours of travel time; 65% of women to be able to make informed and empowered decisions regarding sexual relations, contraceptive use, and their reproductive health. Country selection involved a number of factors including a high burden of maternal deaths and stillbirths, the strength of country midwifery and whether there were partners to support the ministries of health, according to World Health Organization’s (WHO) Dr Anshu Banerjee, Director for Maternal, Child and Adolescent Health and Ageing. Preventable deaths Addressing the launch, WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus said that around 295,000 women died each year due to complications of pregnancy and childbirth, and there were two million stillbirths and 2.4 million newborn deaths annually. “Most of these deaths are in low and middle-income countries,” said Tedros. “Most of these [deaths] could have been prevented with quality pre- and post-natal care and birthing assistance from competent maternal and newborn health professionals,” said Tedros. “The COVID 19 pandemic has badly disrupted essential health services around the world, including for maternal and newborn care. WHO is supporting countries to resume these services regardless of a woman’s COVID-19 status,” he added. Most maternal deaths are preventable with the right care at the right time. Women must get access to healthcare, and this care must: ✅ be of high quality. ✅ meet the needs of families ✅ treat them with dignity and respect. https://t.co/DhTF3jxQB0 pic.twitter.com/TNqBsiyyfx — World Health Organization (WHO) (@WHO) October 5, 2021 In 2017, the global maternal mortality ratio was around 211 maternal deaths per 100,000 live births, which was a 38% reduction compared to 2000 – a reduction of around 2,9% per year. “Universal health coverage, including universal access to sexual and reproductive health care, will be key to providing equitable access to quality maternal health services,” said Kanem. Kanem said that her agency, the WHO and partners are “committed to helping countries achieve coverage targets by implementing action-oriented plans, and by tracking progress at the national and sub-national levels”. She stressed that the targets “also incorporate key determinants of maternal health, including a woman’s ability to make decisions about her own sexual and reproductive health”. The SDG 3.1 sets out that by 2030, the global maternal mortality ratio (MMR) should be reduced to less than 70 per 100,000 live births, and no country should have an MMR more than 140 per 100,000 live births. “The latest estimates are 211 per 100,000 live births – but increasing to 415 on average in the poorest countries,” according to the WHO. Pfizer Vaccine Effective Against COVID-19 Hospitalizations for All Variants 05/10/2021 Raisa Santos Two jabs of the Pfizer-BioNTech vaccine are 90% effective against COVID-19 hospitalizations for all variants including Delta, for at least 6 months, confirmed a new study published by The Lancet. The study, conducted by Kaiser Permanete and Pfizer, found that while effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, effectiveness against hospitalizations remains at 90% overall for all variants. “Our study confirms that vaccines are a critical tool for controlling the pandemic and remain highly effective in preventing severe disease and hospitalization, including from the delta and other variants of concern. Protection against infection does decline in the months following a second dose,” said lead author of the study Dr Sara Tartof, of Kaiser Permanente. The study analyzed 3,436,957 electronic health records from the Kaiser Permanente Southern California (KPSC) health system between 4 December 2020 and 8 August 2021 to assess the effectiveness of the Pfizer vaccine against COVID-19 infections and related hospitalizations. Immunity declines after six months In addition, the study also found that effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, falling from 88% within one month after receiving two doses to 47% after six months, underscoring the importance of improving vaccination rates worldwide. Researchers did not observe a difference in waning between variants. While this does provide evidence towards waning immunity against COVID-19, the CDC has called for additional research to determine which groups should be prioritized to receive booster shots. “In line with the recent FDA [3] and CDC recommendations [4], considerations for booster shots should take global COVID-19 vaccine supply into account as people in many countries around the world have not yet received a primary vaccination series,” said Tartof. Vaccine equity and booster shots have prompted increasing debate in recent weeks, with WHO calling for a global moratorium on COVID-19 boosters to be extended until the end of the year, and global health advocates protesting “vaccine apartheid” outside the UN during the General Assembly last month. US and Israeli studies find similar reductions in immunity Other findings from the US Centers for Disease Control (CDC) and the Israeli Ministry of Health had also found reductions of immunity from the Pfizer vaccine after six months. The Israeli findings reported that people over age 60 who received a third dose of the Pfizer vaccine were five times less likely to become severely ill if they had their first shot at least five months earlier. These results in particular were regarded as a critical factor in the recommendation from the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) to amend its emergency use authorization (EUA) last month for the Pfizer vaccine. The FDA now recommends a single booster dose to be administered at least six months after completion for: individuals 65 and older; individuals 18 through 64 at high risk of severe COVID-19; and individuals 18 through 64 with increased exposure of SARS-CoV-2 that puts them at high risk of health complications relating to COVID-19. Image Credits: International Monetary Fund/Ernesto Benavides. Indian Generic Companies Are Ready to Make Merck’s COVID-19 Antiviral Pill 04/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Molnupiravir could make a significant difference to the global response to COVID-19. Indian generic drug manufacturers are poised to make the antiviral pill, molnupiravir, which halved hospitalisations in a trial of high-risk people with COVID-19. Merck, which developed molnupiravir in collaboration with Ridgeback Biotherapeutics, has awarded non-exclusive, voluntary licensing agreements to eight generic companies in India since April in anticipation of positive trial results. According to Merck, it has been producing molnupiravir “at risk” and expects to produce 10 million courses of treatment by the end of 2021, the company said a media release last Friday. Merck cut short the trial of molnupiravir in the light of the good results, and will make an application for emergency use authorisation (EUA) with the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA), “as soon as possible”, the company said. It will also submit “marketing applications to other regulatory bodies worldwide”, it added. Australia’s Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) granted provisional determination for molnupiravir in August. Meanwhile, in anticipation of regulatory approval, the Access to COVID-19 Tools (ACT) Accelerator is working to “secure volumes” of the pills for people in LMICs, according to ACT-Accelerator partner Unitaid. “Effective, simple to use, oral treatments that can avert the progression to severe illness are exactly the kind of breakthroughs we need to get the pandemic under control. Deployed alongside vaccines, such medicines could drive down hospitalizations and deaths due to COVID-19,” said Dr Philippe Duneton, Executive Director of Unitaid shortly after the Merck announcement. Few treatment options At present, there are very few treatment options for people infected with COVID-19, and those that exist – such as remdesivir and dexamethasone – are expensive, given intravenously or by injections and only for severely ill people already in hospital. White House medical adviser Dr Anthony Fauci told CNN on Sunday that the medicine was “extremely important”. “It’s a pill that’s given by mouth, so you don’t need anything special other than taking a pill the way you take any pill. And the results are really quite impressive,” said Fauci. However, he said that it only halved the risk of hospitalisation and to cut this risk by 100% people should “not get infected in the first place”. Back in April, Merck entered into voluntary licensing agreements with five Indian companies – Cipla, Dr Reddy’s Laboratories, Emcure Pharmaceuticals, Hetero Labs and Sun Pharmaceutical Industries. All are World Health Organization (WHO) pre-qualified manufacturing facilities. It has since licensed Aurobindo Pharma, Torrent Pharmaceuticals, and Viatris, to manufacture the drug. At least four of the companies are already manufacturing generic molnupirvir, which they have been supplying to a trial in India and all eight are ready for global supply, according to MSD India. When it announced the licensing back in April, Merck said the intention was to enable the manufacturers to “supply molnupiravir to India and more than 100 low and middle-income countries (LMICs)”. No deaths in trial The molnupiravir trial involved 775 unvaccinated adults with mild-to-moderate COVID-19 with at least one risk factor for serious illness – most commonly, obesity, being over the age of 60, and living with diabetes and heart disease. Only 7,3% of those taking molnupiravir ended up in hospital in comparison to 14,1% of those on the placebo, announced Merck (known as MSD outside the US and Canada) in a media release last Friday. “Twenty-nine days into the trial, no deaths were reported in patients who received molnupiravir, as compared to eight deaths in patients who received placebo,” it added. The trial was conducted globally, including at sites in Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Egypt, France, Germany, Guatemala, Israel, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Philippines, Poland, Russia, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Taiwan, Ukraine, the United Kingdom and the US. Meanwhile, in June the US government ordered approximately 1.7 million courses of molnupiravir at a cost of $1.2 billion – about $700/patient – according to a June media release from Merck. However, this price is equal to about 35 times the estimated sustainable generic price using current market prices for the active pharmaceutical ingredients (API), according to Melissa J Barber from Harvard University’s Department of Global Health and Population and Dzintars Gotham from King’s College Hospital in London. “Assuming optimization of molnupiravir synthesis, and a resulting drop in API cost, the US price would be equal to about 161 times the estimated sustainable generic price,” the two researchers noted in a brief published last Friday. They identified that three companies appeared to be exporting API for molnupiravir – Optimus Drugs Private, Honour Lab, and Maithri Laboratories. Meanwhile, Pfizer and Roche are also racing to develop an antiviral pill for COVID-19, according to Reuters. A New Pandemic Treaty, Revised International Health Regulations, or Both? What is the Actual Roadmap? 02/10/2021 Gian Luca Burci WHO Headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland. The World Health Assembly is set to make a fateful decision in November over whether to negotiate a new international ‘Pandemic Treaty’ to improve future pandemic preparedness and response. However, major players like the United States, backed by some civil society groups, have suggested that revisions of the existing International Health Regulations (IHR) would be a better path. Amidst the hyperbole of oft-heated debate over which route might be easier, quicker or more effective, it’s important to understand that either option will require careful, systematic planning and execution of a process that is oft-misunderstood. At the same time, there are some important technical points that must be kept in mind. WHA agreement to adopt a Pandemic Treaty may have a much more sweeping historical sense, than mere revisions of the existing IHR. But a new treaty will only be enforceable among those member states that have ratified it in what is typically a prolonged process – while any IHR revisions that are agreed to would be applicable to all 196 WHO member states immediately. Ultimately, it is reaching political consensus on the often-charged content of proposed treaty/IHR reforms that matters the most. But to do that, the process also needs careful consideration – and demystification. WHO former legal counsel Gian Luca Burci, Adjunct Professor of international law at the Geneva Graduate Institute, takes apart the procedural issues, and what they mean, ahead of the third working group meeting of member states on the issue, next week. Pandemic Treaty or IHR revisions – exploring the pathways & process In May, the World Health Assembly tasked a Member States’ working group with the critical mission of assessing “the benefits of developing a WHO convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” The Working Group on Strengthening WHO Preparedness and Response to Health Emergencies (WGPR) is now tasked with coming up with a recommendation in time for a WHA special session in November on whether the WHA should establish an intergovernmental process “to draft and negotiate such a convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” Just two months from the deadline, we understand that discussions in the WGPR are moving towards negotiating a new “pandemic treaty” and revising the International Health Regulations (IHR) in parallel after the November WHA – rather than forcing a choice between them. While this would be a welcome compromise, there seems to be some confusion, as well as contradictory positions, about the procedural steps required to pursue either option. Debate is particularly intense over the question of whether amending the IHR or concluding a treaty would be “easier and quicker,” and which option would incentivize more participation and commitment. While the process will eventually depend on a number of, as yet, unpredictable factors, international law and practice point to some likely steps and procedural requirements, which are reviewed here. This is without reference to the potential content of a pandemic treaty or amended IHR – closely related to questions of speed and difficulty of negotiations. This review also does not purport to be exhaustive; more information can be found in the Geneva Graduate Institute’s “Guide to a Pandemic Treaty.” Pandemic Treaty – from negotiation to adoption, ratification & entry into force Launch of the negotiating process Under Article 19 of the WHO Constitution, the WHA can adopt “conventions or agreements with respect to any matter within the competence of the Organization.” The process leading up to a WHO treaty (“treaty,” “convention,” “agreement” are different denominations but do not change the substance) would therefore be launched by a WHA resolution. The resolution could shape negotiations, for example by requesting that certain issues be included in the treaty or given priority. However, that level of prescriptiveness is infrequent in contemporary treaty practice to leave flexibility to the negotiators. Negotiating forum The Health Assembly would establish a dedicated intergovernmental body open to all WHO member states to draft and negotiate the future convention. This step can be articulated in many different ways and there is no single model in international practice. In the case of the WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control (FCTC), for example, the process was subdivided into two parts: 1) a working group was firstly established to discuss possible building blocks of the convention before committing to treaty negotiations and 2) after a green light from WHA, an intergovernmental negotiating body was established. However, in many other cases, a single body (labelled for example an “intergovernmental negotiating committee”) was responsible for the whole preparation and negotiation of the treaty. This occurred, for example, with the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) and later its Kyoto Protocol. WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus delivering the closing speech for the 72nd World Health Assembly in 2019, prior to the COVID-19 pandemic. Negotiating bodies of this nature are invariably open to participation by all member states. In addition, the European Union is a likely invitee with full rights of participation under the rubric of “regional economic integration organizations” (a category that so far includes only the EU). And indeed the EU has already been one of the most vocal advocates of a pandemic treaty. Participation of other non-state actors Beyond member states and possibly the EU, one can expect participation to be extended to other actors identified in the 2016 Framework of Engagement with Non-State Actors, most importantly NGOs, international business associations and philanthropic foundations (the fourth group, academic institutions, are not entitled to participate but are sometimes invited ad hoc as experts). All these actors would participate as “observers” with limited privileges, rather than full negotiators. For example, they usually can only participate in public meetings but are excluded from closed negotiating sessions that often prevail at crucial stages of the process. However, what matters is physical presence at the negotiations to lobby and brief delegates and network with like-minded organizations. Unlike more technical questions such as “one health” and access to pathogen samples, we can expect substantial civil society mobilization and lobbying behind issues such as equity, human rights and access to countermeasures. These considerations are especially relevant if negotiations resume in person; if the sanitary situation still requires online meetings, the process will have to be adapted and the recent sessions of the WHA and the Executive Board offer a blueprint for that. Virtual negotiations of course are less than ideal for all participants. Methods of work – geopolitical representation and the demands of consensus decision-making The body or bodies established by the WHA will have to elect their officers, typically following WHO’s breakdown into six regions. The Assembly can prescribe the make-up of the bureau, as in the case of the WGPR. Appointing the bureau can be a delicate process depending on geopolitical circumstances or competing ambitions. The role of the bureau is not cast in stone but can be decisive for the progress and outcome of work, in particular by working informally behind the scenes to explore options and foster consensus. The bodies concerned will operate under the WHA rules of procedure, but in practice they enjoy considerable discretion in organizing their work. It is customary, and practically a dogma within WHO, that decisions be only taken by consensus without a formal vote. This increases the importance of the process that has to be perceived as fair, legitimate and inclusive to lead to a result that is at least not unacceptable to any state. The requirement of consensus decision-making carries a lot of inertia all the way to the WHA; even though any state can break consensus by formally objecting and requesting a vote, it is in fact a heavy responsibility to do so and it hardly ever happens. Negotiations of long and complex instruments usually require dividing the text, or particularly difficult issues, among subcommittees that work in parallel, formally report to the plenary on their progress and are often coordinated by the bureau. Small delegations have understandable difficulties in managing multiple meetings, and there is an established practice within WHO to avoid more than two parallel meetings. Available UN-system practice, however, shows much flexibility to adapt the organization of work and the mix of formal and informal meetings. Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, WHO Director General, discussing a pandemic treaty in September 2021. Complex WHO intergovernmental negotiations have often been supplemented by intersessional consultations, either on a regional basis or on specific topics. Regional consultations can be particularly effective in reaching common positions and strengthening the negotiating leverage of groups of countries that could otherwise be overpowered individually. Duration and frequency of negotiations are difficult to predict The duration and frequency of treaty negotiations are difficult to predict. The duration of negotiations will depend on a number of factors including the complexity of the issues at hand, the attitude of key countries, the sense of urgency, the diplomatic ability of the bureau, and the intended outcome. A general “framework convention” without detailed and highly prescriptive obligations may be relatively quicker to achieve, but practice shows that even negotiating such instruments requires on average no less than two years. By way of reference, negotiating the UNFCCC took about two years, the FCTC took three years and six negotiating sessions, while its protocol on illicit trade took four years and five sessions. In contrast, negotiating the two IAEA conventions concluded on the heels of the 1986 Chernobyl nuclear accident took just a few months. It is common for the responsible governing body, in our case the WHA, to request progress reports and set a deadline for the conclusion of the negotiations. Even though there are no draconian consequences for not meeting it, it helps focus the negotiations and keep momentum. The frequency of formal meetings usually depends on available financial resources, the capacity of delegations and the secretariat to manage the workload and the calendar of other intergovernmental meetings. One can usually expect no more than two negotiating sessions of 1-2 weeks per year as a maximum. How to get to the initial draft? The initial draft of the treaty is politically and psychologically very important because it inevitably shapes the dynamics of the subsequent negotiations, even for countries opposing it. Even though it is possible for one or more states to come forward with a zero draft text, this is a relatively uncommon step because questions about the motives of the proposing states could affect or derail negotiations. The responsibility to propose a full zero draft therefore can either fall on the chair of the negotiating body (e.g. the FCTC), on the secretariat (e.g. the revised IHR, or in the environmental field the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, drafted by the UNEP Secretariat). An important point in this regard is that a zero draft does not come out of thin air, but is the result of previous consultations or preparatory work. In the case of the IHR, the draft proposed by the secretariat was the culmination of many years of technical work and consultations, thus the text was submitted promptly to negotiations after a round of regional consultations. In the case of the pandemic treaty, so far there has been no real open discussion on its scope and content either in the WHA or the WGPR, and it is unlikely that this will occur before the WHA special session. Consequently, it is foreseeable that the body established by the WHA will devote an initial period to discuss or seek expert input on the possible building blocks of a treaty and their challenges and implications. Given the uncertainties and questions surrounding the recent proposals, it would be counterproductive to try to short-circuit an inclusive and bottom-up process for achieving a quick result at all costs. Adoption of the treaty and next steps The final draft text would be submitted to the WHA for consideration. As noted above, the Assembly will almost certainly adopt the treaty by consensus. In the unlikely event where consensus could not be reached, Article 19 of the Constitution requires a two-thirds majority (calculated on the basis of valid votes excluding abstentions). The virtual World Health Assembly nerve center at WHO’s Geneva headquarters in May 2020. The upcoming WHA Special Session will likely take a similar form. Other steps that can be taken by the WHA will depend on the nature of the treaty and the conclusions of the negotiations. A pandemic treaty will in all probability be a normative instrument establishing its own governance. Relying on precedents including the FCTC, this will include at a minimum a conference of the parties and a secretariat. Initial work on the institutional aspects will require drafting rules of procedure for the conference of the parties and, depending on the institutional arrangements contained in the treaty, financial regulations and a budget. Even though a treaty is a self-contained instrument and its governance will not be part of WHO’s, the latter may end up providing or hosting its secretariat. For all these reasons, the WHA may establish upon the adoption of the treaty a new intergovernmental body to prepare all the foregoing steps and facilitate the work of the first session of the conference of the parties. Signature, ratification and entry into force Multilateral treaties are customarily opened for signature for a defined period of time. What matters for the entry into force of the treaty, however, is reaching the required number of ratifications (or adherence, accession, formal confirmation depending on the final clauses of the treaty) and how fast that will occur. The threshold for entry into force has varied wildly in previous treaties, anywhere between 20 and 60 as an average (it was 40 for the FCTC and its illicit trade protocol). The number agreed upon will in practice depend on a compromise between an early establishment of the new legal regime and the critical mass of states required to make it credible and effective. A review of UN-system treaties shows on average a time gap of between two and four years between adoption and entry into force; the FCTC protocol on illicit trade took six years, probably reflecting its complexity and demands at national level, but the FCTC took only 21 months. A related consideration for the credibility of the treaty will be the attitude of key states, whether and how quickly they will ratify it and whether they will actively oppose it should they choose to remain outside it. A device occasionally used when it is urgent to start applying a treaty is the so-called “provisional application”, whereby contracting parties indicate in the treaty itself or in a separate act (e.g. the WHA resolution adopting a treaty) that they will provisionally implement the treaty pending its entry into force. A classic but atypical example is the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), provisionally applied from 1947 until 1995. I mention this for the sake of completeness, but it is not a common arrangement for self-intuitive sovereignty concerns. Most of the foregoing considerations also apply to the negotiation and conclusion of protocols to the treaty, should it be drafted as a framework convention requiring separate instruments to spell out its obligations. Albeit linked organically to the “mother convention”, protocols are separate treaties in their own right. Certain steps of the negotiations will probably go faster than for the original convention since the latter provides an applicable legal framework. However, the experience of the FCTC protocol – 10 years from beginning of negotiations to entry into force and only 63 parties so far – should induce caution and deter over-optimism about “quick wins” or “low-hanging fruits.” Strategic reflection is required on whether to make the implementation of a possible pandemic treaty depend heavily on the conclusion of separate protocols. A comparison of the processes required for the creation of a pandemic treaty and revising the International Health Regulations. Amending the International Health Regulations – what is similar or different? The step-by-step process for amending the IHR is spelled out in Article 55. Amendments can be proposed by any state party or the WHO Director-General (DG). Given the direction that the WGPR seems to be taking, it is likely that any amendment process will be launched directly by the Assembly, thus shortening this initial step. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen, and been controversial within WHO, well before the COVID-19 pandemic. With the exception of a highly-technical 2014 amendment extending the recognised lifetime of yellow fever vaccines, successive IHR Review Committees [expert bodies appointed by the WHO DG] have advised against amendments, and the WHO Secretariat has also traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. This is due partly to the perceived risk of opening up the entire Regulations to unpredictable and potentially counterproductive revisions that may end up decreasing their credibility and effectiveness. This concern is understandable and legitimate, but, firstly, it applies to any legislative instrument where the risk of unforeseeable outcomes has to be weighed against the need to improve its design and content. Secondly, the WHA can narrow the scope of the amendments by instructing the negotiating body to only deal with specific issues. While this conditionality is infrequent and probably undesirable in the case of treaties, it would be more plausible with regard to the IHR since the Assembly is their parent body and exercises direct oversight functions over them. Similar procedural considerations – but requiring a less steep “learning curve” Most of the procedural considerations involved in the negotiation of a pandemic treaty would apply mutatis mutandis to the amendment of the IHR – and thus are not repeated here. A possible difference concerns the preparatory work preceding and leading to an initial draft of the amendments. The learning curve for a pandemic treaty could be steeper and longer given the absence of an intergovernmental discussion thus far and the lack of familiarity of many delegations. The IHR and its complexities are better known to the public health and foreign affairs officials following WHO affairs, and it is likely that delegations may be willing to move quickly into drafting and negotiations. IHR-specific requirements Article 50 of the IHR provides that the Review Committee shall “make technical recommendations to the Director-General regarding amendments to these Regulations.” The main consideration, time-wise, is whether involving the Review Committee is a compulsory step, since the procedural requirements in the IHR and the way in which they have been implemented by the secretariat so far, are formal and cumbersome and may lead to delays. The second and related consideration is at which stage of the amendment process would the Review Committee intervene? Would it make its recommendations before amendments are drafted, on an initial draft, or rather towards the end of the process? The political implications of those different approaches for the negotiations may be considerable. There are few precedents from which lessons may be learned. The IHR have been amended only once, in 2014, adjusting the requirements for yellow fever vaccination required by some state parties (eg. India) for international travelers arriving from yellow-fever endemic countries (Annex 7). The amendment extended the validity of a well-accepted vaccine from 10 years to lifetime in line with new evidence about the vaccine’s efficacy. An IHR Review Committee was not created for that occasion, setting a precedent. At the same time, the yellow fever vaccine amendment was limited and very technical. It was recommended by the Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on immunization, a dedicated expert group convened by the WHO secretariat, and the WHO Executive Board proposed the amendment to the WHA. In contrast, a broad and substantial amendment of multiple, substantive provisions of the IHR, which might cover sensitive issues around the early warning of outbreaks and WHO’s mandate to investigate and enforce IHR provisions, may be seen as something different legally and politically – warranting the creation of an IHR Review Committee. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen but the WHO Secretariat has traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. The main legal consideration is that the Review Committee is an expert body providing its recommendations to the DG at his request rather than a governance organ partaking of the normative functions of WHO. There can be situations like the one just mentioned, in which that technical input is not necessary or can be provided through different and less time-consuming channels. Moreover, a process initiated by the Executive Board or the WHA is different from a proposal by a member state or the DG. In my view, convening a Review Committee may be politically but not legally necessary. It is indicative in this connection that Article 55 does not mention the Review Committee, which suggests that its participation is not compulsory. Adoption of the amendments and entry into force Article 55 requires that amendments be communicated to state parties at least four months before the opening of the WHA, which may influence the schedule of the negotiating body. As noted above, consensus is the norm in WHO, and that will apply to the adoption of the amendments. In the unlikely event of formal objections, a vote would require a simple majority instead of the two-thirds required for a treaty. The main difference between a pandemic treaty and amendments to the IHR concerns entry into force. Pursuant to Article 22 of the Constitution and Article 59 of the IHR, the latter enter into force for all member states 24 months after the DG’s notification of adoption, except for those member states that either reject the amendments or file a reservation within 18 months from that notification. In case of a reservation, Article 62 provides for a rather complex process to determine whether the reservation is compatible with the object and purpose of the Regulations and can be accepted. The Article 62 procedure makes it very difficult in practice to reject a reservation and, historically, the sole objection that I am aware of was by Australia to the 1969 version of the IHR. Opting out of a regulation (or amendments thereof) is a drastic, highly visible and politically heavy decision that states would probably take only for the most serious reasons. Still, both rejections and successful reservations are possible and would undesirably fragment what should be instead a uniform legal and coordinating framework to achieve global health security. Objections could also create impossibly complex situations, e.g. in case of amendments changing the functions of WHO, because objecting states would remain bound by the different functions enshrined in the original IHR. For these reasons and as noted above with regard to a pandemic treaty, the inclusiveness, fairness and legitimacy of the process are of crucial importance to keep states in the fold even if they are not entirely satisfied of the outcome. Conclusions – both exercises can be more or less difficult, depending on the political atmosphere Among the preliminary conclusions that can be drawn is the fact that the two processes, when compared side-by-side, would be substantially similar. However there are some significant differences which will need careful consideration as well. Significantly, amending the IHR may be faster because: 1) modifying an existing text is presumably easier than negotiating one from scratch, 2) the WHA can define and narrow the scope and purpose of the amendments, and 3) WHO member states are relatively familiar with the Regulations. The need to consult the Review Committee, however, must be clarified – as well as what this might mean for achieving consensus. The timeline for entry into force of a treaty or any IHR amendments may be similar for either of the two options, but the amendments to the IHR would enter into force for all 196 WHO member states. In the case of a new treaty, a subset of countries will be bound by it once it enters into force, but the timeline for all WHO member states to ratify such a new instrument could be much more protracted – and remains unknown. Politically, both exercises can be more or less difficult depending on the political atmosphere, the proposals on the table, the ability of the bureau to build consensus and the myriad other factors characterizing any major multilateral negotiation. In both processes, there is great importance in reaching a real and sustainable consensus. At the same time, joining consensus in the WHA to adopt a pandemic treaty is not necessarily predictive of future ratifications since governments as well as circumstances may change. In both cases, finally, it will be important to maintain momentum but avoid imposing unrealistic timelines for the negotiations. The Independent Panel’s call for concluding a pandemic treaty in six months is an example of an unrealistic goal in this connection. Opting into a treaty requires political will and action, which can be highly appealing to politicians. On the other hand, remaining bound by a revised IHR could also be the positive outcome of political inertia and inaction – that is a country’s reluctance to be seen as opting out. The key questions are what is more politically feasible, and what will build more genuine, sustained political commitment to any improved set of international rules that aim to better govern future outbreaks and reduce pandemic risks. Gian Luca Burci is adjunct professor of international law at the Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies. His areas of expertise are global health law and governance, global health security and the law and practice of international organizations. Between 2005 and 2016 he was Legal Counsel of WHO. Updated on 07.10.2021 with a description of the 2014 IHR amendment on requirements around yellow fever vaccines. Image Credits: Flickr – Guilhem Vellut, Flickr – US Mission Geneva, WHO / Antoine Tardy, WHO, Gian Luca Burci, Wikimedia Commons. Tuberculosis is Here to Stay if We Don’t Mobilise Resources for Diagnoses and Double Fundings, New Data Shows 01/10/2021 Aishwarya Tendolkar Global efforts to eliminate TB have been set back by the COVID-19 pandemic. The COVID-19 pandemic and the consequent diversion of resources toward battling SARS-CoV2 has also set back global efforts to eliminate the world’s second most deadly infectious killer: Tuberculosis, by 2030. Only a doubling of investments next year can pave the way to attainment of the 2030 United Nations Sustainable Development Goals to eliminate the disease, experts and panelists at the Stop TB Partnership said Tuesday. The panel session coincided with the release of new data from a study conducted by the Stop TB Partnership that showed COVID’s impact on TB response this year continues to be as devastating as last year, with 1.2 million fewer people projected to be diagnosed and treated for TB this year, in comparison with 2019. The new estimates, developed in collaboration with USAID, Johns Hopkins University, Avenir Health and Imperial College, are based on data from 27 countries that account for 75 percent of the global TB caseload. That means TB investments for this coming year need to be doubled, in order to meet a 2018-2022 target for diagnosing and treating 40 million people (or 10 million a year), within that four year time frame, the Partnership says. TB kills 4,000 people a day The airborne disease still kills 4,000 people every day, with nearly a quarter of the world’s population estimated to have been infected. Despite being curable and preventable, only an estimated 5.7 million people received treatment for TB in 2020, a decline of 21 percent from the previous year—leaving an estimated 4.3 million people with untreated TB and implying all but certain death for probably half that number, the report showed. A lack of attention to the disease, lack of funding, and a dearth of proper diagnostic tools are responsible, Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership said at a Stop TB briefing Tuesday. “COVID showed that if the government and people are scared, money is not an issue. We are in the middle of a disaster but our attention seems to be in a very wrong place.” Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership. The “orphan disease” does not receive political priority or funding, Obiefuna Austin Arinze, Executive Director of Afro Global Alliance and incoming Vice-Chair of the Stop TB Partnership Board said. At current levels of funding, the world will miss the target set by the United National High-Level Meeting on TB that took place in 2018 for diagnosing and treating 40 million people with TB by 2022. With just 400 days to reach 2022 goals, the diagnostic figure is even more grim for children with TB, Ditiu said. However, with mobilisation of resources – including funding, digital diagnostics and more government-sponsored community interventions – the world could reach the target’s 90% mark – treating some 36 million people, Ditiu said. Annual resource needs and available funding for TB in USD. So why is investing in TB diagnosis and elimination imperative? In simple words, it saves more lives than you would think. “Investing an extra dollar in TB is one of the best dollars spent to help the world,” Dr Bjorn Lomborg, President of the Danish think tank, Copenhagen Consensus, said at the teleconference. According to him, it would only cost US$8.1 billion dollars annually, between now and 2030, to eliminate TB. This investment translates to benefits worth US$348 billion dollars, pegging the benefit-cost ratio at 43. This means that every dollar invested in TB prevention and care yields a return of US$43. But currently, only US$6.5 billion is available annually for TB response globally. Moreover, TB funding has stagnated over the last five years – meaning there are big gaps that need to be overcome now. That’s why, at the UNHLM on TB in 2018, states and non-state actors pledged to commit a total of US$13 billion annually until 2022 to overcome past shortfalls – unfortunately COVID intervened the following year and those pledges were not honored. Some US$13 billion in funding is needed for TB care and prevention per year. TB is traditionally a low GF funding priority – despite a high dependency on Global Fund services in LMICs Despite being curable, preventable, and easily diagnosable, TB sees more deaths (over 1 million annually) than HIV/AIDS and Malaria combined. At the same time, The Global Fund channels only 18 percent of its resources to TB diagnosis and treatment. The remaining 82% is invested in fighting HIV/AIDS, malaria, and more recently, COVID-19 tests and treatments. Although 85% of national TB budgets, on average, are financed by low- and middle-income countries themselves, they remain highly dependent on the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria to fill vital gaps in services. And that adds weight to the Global Fund’s appeals, panelists pointed out. In terms of how those funds should be spent, the World Health Organisation along with the UN Secretary General have outlined priority recommendations to ramp up the TB response, Tereza Kasaeva, Director of WHO’s Global TB Programme said. “Efforts need to be intensified to make these recommendations a reality.” Diagnosis still reliant on less accurate sputum smear microscopy According to WHO, the diagnosis of TB and drug-resistant TB remains a challenge with one-third of people with TB and two-thirds of people with drug-resistant TB not being detected globally. While WHO recommends highly accurate rapid molecular assays as the initial test to diagnose TB, less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool. Only 28 percent of people were diagnosed with MTB using a rapid molecular test in 2019, Ditiu said. This means that nearly three quarters of diagnoses are done using the “clinical” smear microscopy. Smear microscopy, while cost-effective, has a poor track record in diagnosing extra-pulmonary tuberculosis, paediatric tuberculosis, and TB in patients co-infected with HIV and tuberculosis, a paper pointed. “Why don’t we allow people proper diagnostic tools?” she asked, pointing out that an untreated person with TB can transmit the bacteria to nearly 15 people every year. “Now think about this in countries like India with a population of 1.2 billion.” Less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool for TB, despite the existence of highly accurate rapid molecular assays. COVID devastated TB diagnostics To make matters worse, the COVID-19 pandemic devastated the diagnostics investments in TB – whereby existing resources were diverted, and tools like the highly accurate GeneXpert molecular diagnostic platforms were repurposed to diagnose COVID, in the pandemic’s early days. Since then, new rapid COVID diagnostic tests have become widely available, but there has been no significant recovery plan for TB diagnostics put into place, Obiefuna said. The COVID-19 pandemic was not the first time that the health infrastructure for TB was used to tackle other health crises, and particularly those related to airborne diseases, pointed out Cheri Vincent, Chief of USAID’s TB Division, at the meeting. “We saw it [being diverted] for Ebola and airborne influenza,” she said, adding, “If we can’t solve TB, we can’t solve the next airborne pandemic,” she highlighted. In fact, TB doctors were the first to be diverted to tackle the COVID-19 breakout, Ditiu said. The Zambia story, and what it teaches us But not all has been downhill in the fight against TB. Zambia offers an example of a country that has been able to sustain its TB programmes through a combination of domestic funding, government-community partnerships, and diagnostic tools – despite the COVID pandemic. It can provide inspiration for countries battling both diseases at the same time. Already today, Zambia has achieved 89% of its 2022 UNHLM diagnosis and treatment target. Over the past five years, the country invested US$45 million of domestic resources in TB response. “[TB] commodity security is key to achieving our goals,” said Dr. Patrick Lungu, National TB and Leprosy Control Program Manager in Zambia. A ‘TB Situation room’ was created to review TB programmes on a weekly basis to identify issues that may be negatively impacting performance. “We were able to offer more technical support to different levels of the health system – which translates to Zambia envisaging to achieve the UNHLM target in at least two-three key indicators,” Lungu said. Zambia has achieved nearly 89 percent of its UNHLM target so far. Will India achieve its ambitious 2025 TB elimination target? When it comes to countries like India – which bears the heaviest TB burden in the world, the pandemic has slowed-down and diverted efforts to eliminate elimination of TB by 2025 -a huge goal set by the government. According to the Indian Health Ministry’s 2021 Annual Report on Tuberculosis Elimination, reports and notification of confirmed TB diagnoses tumbled 38 percent in March-April 2020 owing to the lockdown. Furthermore, a majority of the country’s TB elimination resources were repurposed for Covid-19. Then just as services were beginning to recoup, a massive second COVID wave hit the country in spring 2021; it remains unclear what dents that made in the progress India had seen toward the end of 2020. In its 2021 official report, the Indian Health Ministry nonetheless suggested that the dedicated Infectious disease hospitals that were established for Covid will contribute “significantly” to future TB Care and management. Despite being scheduled to be a part of Tuesday’s Stop TB Partnership panel, the Indian Health Ministry did not make an appearance – leaving a lack of clarity on trends and progress in 2021. But on a global level, the warning signs are clear. Says Ditui: “we have erased 10-12 years of progress, and are back to 2010-11 levels of TB detection and cases. This becomes all the more alarming with the fact that TB is not a new disease but one that has been around for decades, and has a vaccine. One can only hope that TB receives the undivided effort it needs to be eliminated.” Image Credits: The Global Fund / Evgeny Maloletka, Stop TB Partnership, Dr. Patrick Lungu. Posts navigation Older postsNewer posts This site uses cookies to help give you the best experience on our website. Cookies enable us to collect information that helps us personalise your experience and improve the functionality and performance of our site. By continuing to read our website, we assume you agree to this, otherwise you can adjust your browser settings. Please read our cookie and Privacy Policy. Our Cookies and Privacy Policy Loading Comments... You must be logged in to post a comment.
WHO Approves First Ever Malaria Vaccine 06/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Children under the age of five years in sub-Saharan Africa continued to account for approximately two-thirds of global deaths from malaria. The World Health Organization (WHO) has given the go-ahead for children to get the first-ever malaria vaccine in areas where there is a high to moderate risk of infection. The vaccine, known as RTS,S, is the first to have been approved against a parasitic disease. It has been tested on 800,000 children in Ghana, Kenya and Malawi over two years as part of routine immunisations and found to reduce severe malaria-related hospitalisation by 30% and clinical malaria by 40%, researchers revealed at a WHO press conference on Wednesday. “This is a historic moment. The long-awaited malaria vaccine for children is a breakthrough for science, child health and malaria control,” said WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, who started his medical career as a malaria researcher. “Using this vaccine on top of existing tools to prevent malaria could save tens of thousands of young lives each year.” The WHO recommends that the vaccine – which acts against P. falciparum, the deadliest malaria parasite – is given in four doses to children from the age of five months to around 18 months. Tedros said that progress against malaria “has stalled at an unacceptably high level, with more than 200 million cases, and 400,000 deaths every year – two-thirds of which are children under five in Africa”. “Every two minutes, a child under five dies of malaria,” said Dr Matshidiso Moeti, WHO Regional Director for Africa, adding that 94% of malaria cases were in Africa. Dr Matshidiso Moeti, WHO Regional Director of Africa. “We have long hoped for an effective malaria vaccine and now for the first time ever, we have such a vaccine recommended for widespread use.” Moeti added that the WHO would support the production of the vaccine in Africa. However, GlaxoSmithKline (GSK), which has invested US$ 700 million in the development of RTS,S and donated up to 10 million doses for the pilot programme, will be working with an Indian generic producer to manufacture the vaccine for the foreseeable future. “GSK was clear at the time, as we’ve proceeded with this vaccine that, having provided a large degree of development funding and producing the vaccine for the implementation programme, was nevertheless seeking a tech transfer partner for the long term production of this vaccine,” said Dr Kate O’Brien, WHO head of immunisation. “There was a programme opened up to initiate interest from vaccine manufacturers and the partner who will be with GSK for this tech transfer is Bharat Biotech in India.” Protect children’s development Dr Alejandro Cravioto, Chair of the WHO Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on Immunization (SAGE), said that his group recommended the use of the vaccine to ensure the healthy growth and development of children. “The experience we have had before with other infections showed us clearly that a child that is repetitively sick is maimed for life,” said Cravioto. “He or she is not capable of developing the capacities that he or she is born with, in the sense of achieving an adulthood that will be meaningful. So having anything that protects them, or helps them to be less sick during this growth phase, is essential.” Global vaccine alliance, Gavi, health agency Unitaid and the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria committed nearly US$ 70 million to fund the pilot, which was designed to address several outstanding questions related to the public health use of the vaccine following the Phase 3 trial showing efficacy of RTS,S. “We welcome this new tool in the fight against malaria,” said Peter Sands, Executive Director of the Global Fund. “In countries where the Global Fund invests, we have reduced malaria deaths by 45% since 2002 with testing, treatment and prevention tools such as mosquito nets. “In the vaccine pilots, the RTS,S vaccine was most effective when used together with these existing tools. Significant additional resources will be necessary to enable wide deployment of the vaccine alongside other innovations, and as part of a sustained and comprehensive response in the countries that need it the most.” Following the WHO recommendation, global stakeholders, including Gavi, will consider whether and how to finance a new malaria vaccination programme for countries in sub-Saharan Africa, according to a statement by Gavi, the Global Fund and Unitaid. The vaccine will complement other WHO-recommended measures for malaria prevention, including the use of insecticide-treated bed nets, indoor spraying with insecticides, malaria chemoprevention strategies, and the timely use of malaria testing and treatment. Image Credits: WHO. African Medicines Agency Will Come into Being on 5 November – after 15th African Country Ratifies & Deposits AMA Treaty 06/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan The African Medicines Agency’s framework would help combat falsified products Africans are a step closer to speedier access to newer, safer medicines following this week’s notification by 15 African Union (AU) member countries that they have formally ratified and deposited their accord to create a new African Medicines Agency (AMA). Although the AU adopted the treaty to set up the AMA back in February 2019, 15 African countries had to formally notify the AU Commission that they had ratified the treaty before the agency could be set up. On Tuesday, Cameroon became the 15th country to deposit its ratification instrument – finally pushing the AMA over the threshold into reality. According to the Treaty, the AMA will now come into force in 30 days time – on 5 November. The AMA aims to support African countries to better regulate medical products and harmonise the regulation of medicines across the continent. It will also test samples of medicines from time to time to eliminate fakes that plague the continent. The 14 other countries to have both ratified the AMA and “deposited the instrument of ratification” at the AU (a letter from the head of state informing it of ratification) are Algeria, Benin, Burkina Faso, Gabon, Guinea, Mali, Mauritius, Namibia, Niger, Rwanda, Seychelles, Sierra Leone and Zimbabwe. A further three countries have ratified the treaty but not formally informed the AU, while eight more have signed the treaty but not yet ratified it. This means 36 of Africa’s 55 countries – predominantly Francophone countries – have expressed support for the AMA. However, African powerhouses Ethiopia, Nigeria and South Africa have not yet expressed their support for the AMA. Today, we celebrate as AMA made it to the finish line. 15th instrument of ratification received by the @_AfricanUnion and the 30 day count down for AMA to enter into force has officially began! Congratulations to the member states that have made this possible See infographic 👇 pic.twitter.com/4IqLRLEIqP — Dorothy Njagi (@Dottienjagi) October 5, 2021 The COVID-19 pandemic has highlighted the need for countries to speedily assess medicines and vaccines, a capacity that a number of African countries lack. The African Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has played a central role in co-ordinating the health response to the pandemic on the continent, and highlighted the value of a continental player during a health crisis. Greg Perry, Assistant Director-General of the International Federation of Pharmaceutical Manufacturers and Associations (IFPMA), welcomed the AMA’s ratification, describing it as taking “one step closer to achieving a continent-wide regulatory agency”. “We look forward to the full implementation of the AMA,, which will be a game-changer for all Africans to access safe, effective and quality medical products in a timely manner,” said Perry. Pharmaceutical companies have long complained about how complicated it is to get medicines approved in Africa and how long it takes particularly in comparison to Europe, which processes applications via a central European Medicines Agency (EMA). Perry added that for the agency to become fully operational, it was important for the AU to define the appropriate funding model and engage with the African Medicines Regulatory Harmonisation initiative “which has already set strong governance structures and pan-African guidance in place for the approval of COVID-19 treatments and vaccines”. Reduce barriers to African market entry Andy Gray, senior lecturer in pharmacology at the University of KwaZulu-Natal, said that AMA’s greatest potential lies “in the field of harmonisation of regulatory systems, which should reduce the barriers to market entry in Africa”. “The AMA is not intended to be a supranational regulator, and will not make decisions in the way the EMA does, but it could help in bringing national medicines regulatory authorities together, simplifying systems and reducing redundancy,” explained Gray. “It can also make a major difference by promoting transparency of regulatory action across the continent, and showing how that can drive reliance models of regulation.” Gray added that the AMA could learn lessons from the Africa CDC by providing “visible and credible leadership”, ensuring “practical outputs, not just talk” and ensure it had recognition in appropriate global forums. Today is a historic day. #Cameroon became the 15 country to deposit the instrument of ratification of the African Medicines Agency. Now, the treaty will enter into force in 30 days (Nov 5). #AMA is a game change on our continent.@AUC_MoussaFaki @PR_Paul_BIYA pic.twitter.com/0KOYh5EEvk — Michel Sidibé (@MichelSidibe) October 5, 2021 Earlier this year, Michel Sidibé, the former Executive Director of UNAIDS and Mali’s Minister of Health, was appointed as the AU’s Special Envoy for the AMA. He has been leading efforts to ensure that countries ratify the agency, and could be in the running to head it. Announcing Cameroon’s ratification of the AMA on Twitter this week, Sidibé described the agency as a “game-changer for our continent”. Image Credits: United States Army , Marco Verch/Flickr. African Countries are the Focus of New Maternal Mortality Targets 05/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan UNFPA Executive Director Dr Natalia Kanem Nineteen countries have been prioritised for support to implement new global targets aimed at preventing maternal and newborn deaths. This emerged at the launch on Tuesday of the new targets, which were developed by the World Health Organization (WHO), UN Population Fund (UNFPA) and their partners in the Ending Preventable Maternal Mortality (EPMM) initiative. UNFPA Executive Director Dr Natalia Kanem said that while the global community had committed to reducing the global maternal mortality rates to 70 deaths per 100,000 live births by 2030 as part of the sustainable development goals (SDG), it was not moving fast enough. “If the current pace prevails, we will not reach this goal before 2065,” said Kanem. “This is a wake-up call for us to urgently scale up and accelerate our efforts with less than 10 years to go.” Fourteen of the chosen countries are in Africa and include Chad, which has one of the highest maternal mortality rates in the world, as well as Nigeria and Ethiopia. The five non-African countries are Afghanistan, Pakistan, Mexico, Nepal and Laos. The 19 priority countries identified for action against maternal mortality. The 19 countries will get support to implement and monitor the targets, according to the UN agency officials. There are five targets: 90% pregnant women to attend four or more antenatal care visits (towards increasing to eight visits by 2030); 90% of births to be attended by skilled health personnel; 80% of women who have just given birth to access postnatal care within two days of delivery; 60% of the population to have access to emergency obstetric care within two hours of travel time; 65% of women to be able to make informed and empowered decisions regarding sexual relations, contraceptive use, and their reproductive health. Country selection involved a number of factors including a high burden of maternal deaths and stillbirths, the strength of country midwifery and whether there were partners to support the ministries of health, according to World Health Organization’s (WHO) Dr Anshu Banerjee, Director for Maternal, Child and Adolescent Health and Ageing. Preventable deaths Addressing the launch, WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus said that around 295,000 women died each year due to complications of pregnancy and childbirth, and there were two million stillbirths and 2.4 million newborn deaths annually. “Most of these deaths are in low and middle-income countries,” said Tedros. “Most of these [deaths] could have been prevented with quality pre- and post-natal care and birthing assistance from competent maternal and newborn health professionals,” said Tedros. “The COVID 19 pandemic has badly disrupted essential health services around the world, including for maternal and newborn care. WHO is supporting countries to resume these services regardless of a woman’s COVID-19 status,” he added. Most maternal deaths are preventable with the right care at the right time. Women must get access to healthcare, and this care must: ✅ be of high quality. ✅ meet the needs of families ✅ treat them with dignity and respect. https://t.co/DhTF3jxQB0 pic.twitter.com/TNqBsiyyfx — World Health Organization (WHO) (@WHO) October 5, 2021 In 2017, the global maternal mortality ratio was around 211 maternal deaths per 100,000 live births, which was a 38% reduction compared to 2000 – a reduction of around 2,9% per year. “Universal health coverage, including universal access to sexual and reproductive health care, will be key to providing equitable access to quality maternal health services,” said Kanem. Kanem said that her agency, the WHO and partners are “committed to helping countries achieve coverage targets by implementing action-oriented plans, and by tracking progress at the national and sub-national levels”. She stressed that the targets “also incorporate key determinants of maternal health, including a woman’s ability to make decisions about her own sexual and reproductive health”. The SDG 3.1 sets out that by 2030, the global maternal mortality ratio (MMR) should be reduced to less than 70 per 100,000 live births, and no country should have an MMR more than 140 per 100,000 live births. “The latest estimates are 211 per 100,000 live births – but increasing to 415 on average in the poorest countries,” according to the WHO. Pfizer Vaccine Effective Against COVID-19 Hospitalizations for All Variants 05/10/2021 Raisa Santos Two jabs of the Pfizer-BioNTech vaccine are 90% effective against COVID-19 hospitalizations for all variants including Delta, for at least 6 months, confirmed a new study published by The Lancet. The study, conducted by Kaiser Permanete and Pfizer, found that while effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, effectiveness against hospitalizations remains at 90% overall for all variants. “Our study confirms that vaccines are a critical tool for controlling the pandemic and remain highly effective in preventing severe disease and hospitalization, including from the delta and other variants of concern. Protection against infection does decline in the months following a second dose,” said lead author of the study Dr Sara Tartof, of Kaiser Permanente. The study analyzed 3,436,957 electronic health records from the Kaiser Permanente Southern California (KPSC) health system between 4 December 2020 and 8 August 2021 to assess the effectiveness of the Pfizer vaccine against COVID-19 infections and related hospitalizations. Immunity declines after six months In addition, the study also found that effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, falling from 88% within one month after receiving two doses to 47% after six months, underscoring the importance of improving vaccination rates worldwide. Researchers did not observe a difference in waning between variants. While this does provide evidence towards waning immunity against COVID-19, the CDC has called for additional research to determine which groups should be prioritized to receive booster shots. “In line with the recent FDA [3] and CDC recommendations [4], considerations for booster shots should take global COVID-19 vaccine supply into account as people in many countries around the world have not yet received a primary vaccination series,” said Tartof. Vaccine equity and booster shots have prompted increasing debate in recent weeks, with WHO calling for a global moratorium on COVID-19 boosters to be extended until the end of the year, and global health advocates protesting “vaccine apartheid” outside the UN during the General Assembly last month. US and Israeli studies find similar reductions in immunity Other findings from the US Centers for Disease Control (CDC) and the Israeli Ministry of Health had also found reductions of immunity from the Pfizer vaccine after six months. The Israeli findings reported that people over age 60 who received a third dose of the Pfizer vaccine were five times less likely to become severely ill if they had their first shot at least five months earlier. These results in particular were regarded as a critical factor in the recommendation from the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) to amend its emergency use authorization (EUA) last month for the Pfizer vaccine. The FDA now recommends a single booster dose to be administered at least six months after completion for: individuals 65 and older; individuals 18 through 64 at high risk of severe COVID-19; and individuals 18 through 64 with increased exposure of SARS-CoV-2 that puts them at high risk of health complications relating to COVID-19. Image Credits: International Monetary Fund/Ernesto Benavides. Indian Generic Companies Are Ready to Make Merck’s COVID-19 Antiviral Pill 04/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Molnupiravir could make a significant difference to the global response to COVID-19. Indian generic drug manufacturers are poised to make the antiviral pill, molnupiravir, which halved hospitalisations in a trial of high-risk people with COVID-19. Merck, which developed molnupiravir in collaboration with Ridgeback Biotherapeutics, has awarded non-exclusive, voluntary licensing agreements to eight generic companies in India since April in anticipation of positive trial results. According to Merck, it has been producing molnupiravir “at risk” and expects to produce 10 million courses of treatment by the end of 2021, the company said a media release last Friday. Merck cut short the trial of molnupiravir in the light of the good results, and will make an application for emergency use authorisation (EUA) with the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA), “as soon as possible”, the company said. It will also submit “marketing applications to other regulatory bodies worldwide”, it added. Australia’s Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) granted provisional determination for molnupiravir in August. Meanwhile, in anticipation of regulatory approval, the Access to COVID-19 Tools (ACT) Accelerator is working to “secure volumes” of the pills for people in LMICs, according to ACT-Accelerator partner Unitaid. “Effective, simple to use, oral treatments that can avert the progression to severe illness are exactly the kind of breakthroughs we need to get the pandemic under control. Deployed alongside vaccines, such medicines could drive down hospitalizations and deaths due to COVID-19,” said Dr Philippe Duneton, Executive Director of Unitaid shortly after the Merck announcement. Few treatment options At present, there are very few treatment options for people infected with COVID-19, and those that exist – such as remdesivir and dexamethasone – are expensive, given intravenously or by injections and only for severely ill people already in hospital. White House medical adviser Dr Anthony Fauci told CNN on Sunday that the medicine was “extremely important”. “It’s a pill that’s given by mouth, so you don’t need anything special other than taking a pill the way you take any pill. And the results are really quite impressive,” said Fauci. However, he said that it only halved the risk of hospitalisation and to cut this risk by 100% people should “not get infected in the first place”. Back in April, Merck entered into voluntary licensing agreements with five Indian companies – Cipla, Dr Reddy’s Laboratories, Emcure Pharmaceuticals, Hetero Labs and Sun Pharmaceutical Industries. All are World Health Organization (WHO) pre-qualified manufacturing facilities. It has since licensed Aurobindo Pharma, Torrent Pharmaceuticals, and Viatris, to manufacture the drug. At least four of the companies are already manufacturing generic molnupirvir, which they have been supplying to a trial in India and all eight are ready for global supply, according to MSD India. When it announced the licensing back in April, Merck said the intention was to enable the manufacturers to “supply molnupiravir to India and more than 100 low and middle-income countries (LMICs)”. No deaths in trial The molnupiravir trial involved 775 unvaccinated adults with mild-to-moderate COVID-19 with at least one risk factor for serious illness – most commonly, obesity, being over the age of 60, and living with diabetes and heart disease. Only 7,3% of those taking molnupiravir ended up in hospital in comparison to 14,1% of those on the placebo, announced Merck (known as MSD outside the US and Canada) in a media release last Friday. “Twenty-nine days into the trial, no deaths were reported in patients who received molnupiravir, as compared to eight deaths in patients who received placebo,” it added. The trial was conducted globally, including at sites in Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Egypt, France, Germany, Guatemala, Israel, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Philippines, Poland, Russia, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Taiwan, Ukraine, the United Kingdom and the US. Meanwhile, in June the US government ordered approximately 1.7 million courses of molnupiravir at a cost of $1.2 billion – about $700/patient – according to a June media release from Merck. However, this price is equal to about 35 times the estimated sustainable generic price using current market prices for the active pharmaceutical ingredients (API), according to Melissa J Barber from Harvard University’s Department of Global Health and Population and Dzintars Gotham from King’s College Hospital in London. “Assuming optimization of molnupiravir synthesis, and a resulting drop in API cost, the US price would be equal to about 161 times the estimated sustainable generic price,” the two researchers noted in a brief published last Friday. They identified that three companies appeared to be exporting API for molnupiravir – Optimus Drugs Private, Honour Lab, and Maithri Laboratories. Meanwhile, Pfizer and Roche are also racing to develop an antiviral pill for COVID-19, according to Reuters. A New Pandemic Treaty, Revised International Health Regulations, or Both? What is the Actual Roadmap? 02/10/2021 Gian Luca Burci WHO Headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland. The World Health Assembly is set to make a fateful decision in November over whether to negotiate a new international ‘Pandemic Treaty’ to improve future pandemic preparedness and response. However, major players like the United States, backed by some civil society groups, have suggested that revisions of the existing International Health Regulations (IHR) would be a better path. Amidst the hyperbole of oft-heated debate over which route might be easier, quicker or more effective, it’s important to understand that either option will require careful, systematic planning and execution of a process that is oft-misunderstood. At the same time, there are some important technical points that must be kept in mind. WHA agreement to adopt a Pandemic Treaty may have a much more sweeping historical sense, than mere revisions of the existing IHR. But a new treaty will only be enforceable among those member states that have ratified it in what is typically a prolonged process – while any IHR revisions that are agreed to would be applicable to all 196 WHO member states immediately. Ultimately, it is reaching political consensus on the often-charged content of proposed treaty/IHR reforms that matters the most. But to do that, the process also needs careful consideration – and demystification. WHO former legal counsel Gian Luca Burci, Adjunct Professor of international law at the Geneva Graduate Institute, takes apart the procedural issues, and what they mean, ahead of the third working group meeting of member states on the issue, next week. Pandemic Treaty or IHR revisions – exploring the pathways & process In May, the World Health Assembly tasked a Member States’ working group with the critical mission of assessing “the benefits of developing a WHO convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” The Working Group on Strengthening WHO Preparedness and Response to Health Emergencies (WGPR) is now tasked with coming up with a recommendation in time for a WHA special session in November on whether the WHA should establish an intergovernmental process “to draft and negotiate such a convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” Just two months from the deadline, we understand that discussions in the WGPR are moving towards negotiating a new “pandemic treaty” and revising the International Health Regulations (IHR) in parallel after the November WHA – rather than forcing a choice between them. While this would be a welcome compromise, there seems to be some confusion, as well as contradictory positions, about the procedural steps required to pursue either option. Debate is particularly intense over the question of whether amending the IHR or concluding a treaty would be “easier and quicker,” and which option would incentivize more participation and commitment. While the process will eventually depend on a number of, as yet, unpredictable factors, international law and practice point to some likely steps and procedural requirements, which are reviewed here. This is without reference to the potential content of a pandemic treaty or amended IHR – closely related to questions of speed and difficulty of negotiations. This review also does not purport to be exhaustive; more information can be found in the Geneva Graduate Institute’s “Guide to a Pandemic Treaty.” Pandemic Treaty – from negotiation to adoption, ratification & entry into force Launch of the negotiating process Under Article 19 of the WHO Constitution, the WHA can adopt “conventions or agreements with respect to any matter within the competence of the Organization.” The process leading up to a WHO treaty (“treaty,” “convention,” “agreement” are different denominations but do not change the substance) would therefore be launched by a WHA resolution. The resolution could shape negotiations, for example by requesting that certain issues be included in the treaty or given priority. However, that level of prescriptiveness is infrequent in contemporary treaty practice to leave flexibility to the negotiators. Negotiating forum The Health Assembly would establish a dedicated intergovernmental body open to all WHO member states to draft and negotiate the future convention. This step can be articulated in many different ways and there is no single model in international practice. In the case of the WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control (FCTC), for example, the process was subdivided into two parts: 1) a working group was firstly established to discuss possible building blocks of the convention before committing to treaty negotiations and 2) after a green light from WHA, an intergovernmental negotiating body was established. However, in many other cases, a single body (labelled for example an “intergovernmental negotiating committee”) was responsible for the whole preparation and negotiation of the treaty. This occurred, for example, with the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) and later its Kyoto Protocol. WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus delivering the closing speech for the 72nd World Health Assembly in 2019, prior to the COVID-19 pandemic. Negotiating bodies of this nature are invariably open to participation by all member states. In addition, the European Union is a likely invitee with full rights of participation under the rubric of “regional economic integration organizations” (a category that so far includes only the EU). And indeed the EU has already been one of the most vocal advocates of a pandemic treaty. Participation of other non-state actors Beyond member states and possibly the EU, one can expect participation to be extended to other actors identified in the 2016 Framework of Engagement with Non-State Actors, most importantly NGOs, international business associations and philanthropic foundations (the fourth group, academic institutions, are not entitled to participate but are sometimes invited ad hoc as experts). All these actors would participate as “observers” with limited privileges, rather than full negotiators. For example, they usually can only participate in public meetings but are excluded from closed negotiating sessions that often prevail at crucial stages of the process. However, what matters is physical presence at the negotiations to lobby and brief delegates and network with like-minded organizations. Unlike more technical questions such as “one health” and access to pathogen samples, we can expect substantial civil society mobilization and lobbying behind issues such as equity, human rights and access to countermeasures. These considerations are especially relevant if negotiations resume in person; if the sanitary situation still requires online meetings, the process will have to be adapted and the recent sessions of the WHA and the Executive Board offer a blueprint for that. Virtual negotiations of course are less than ideal for all participants. Methods of work – geopolitical representation and the demands of consensus decision-making The body or bodies established by the WHA will have to elect their officers, typically following WHO’s breakdown into six regions. The Assembly can prescribe the make-up of the bureau, as in the case of the WGPR. Appointing the bureau can be a delicate process depending on geopolitical circumstances or competing ambitions. The role of the bureau is not cast in stone but can be decisive for the progress and outcome of work, in particular by working informally behind the scenes to explore options and foster consensus. The bodies concerned will operate under the WHA rules of procedure, but in practice they enjoy considerable discretion in organizing their work. It is customary, and practically a dogma within WHO, that decisions be only taken by consensus without a formal vote. This increases the importance of the process that has to be perceived as fair, legitimate and inclusive to lead to a result that is at least not unacceptable to any state. The requirement of consensus decision-making carries a lot of inertia all the way to the WHA; even though any state can break consensus by formally objecting and requesting a vote, it is in fact a heavy responsibility to do so and it hardly ever happens. Negotiations of long and complex instruments usually require dividing the text, or particularly difficult issues, among subcommittees that work in parallel, formally report to the plenary on their progress and are often coordinated by the bureau. Small delegations have understandable difficulties in managing multiple meetings, and there is an established practice within WHO to avoid more than two parallel meetings. Available UN-system practice, however, shows much flexibility to adapt the organization of work and the mix of formal and informal meetings. Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, WHO Director General, discussing a pandemic treaty in September 2021. Complex WHO intergovernmental negotiations have often been supplemented by intersessional consultations, either on a regional basis or on specific topics. Regional consultations can be particularly effective in reaching common positions and strengthening the negotiating leverage of groups of countries that could otherwise be overpowered individually. Duration and frequency of negotiations are difficult to predict The duration and frequency of treaty negotiations are difficult to predict. The duration of negotiations will depend on a number of factors including the complexity of the issues at hand, the attitude of key countries, the sense of urgency, the diplomatic ability of the bureau, and the intended outcome. A general “framework convention” without detailed and highly prescriptive obligations may be relatively quicker to achieve, but practice shows that even negotiating such instruments requires on average no less than two years. By way of reference, negotiating the UNFCCC took about two years, the FCTC took three years and six negotiating sessions, while its protocol on illicit trade took four years and five sessions. In contrast, negotiating the two IAEA conventions concluded on the heels of the 1986 Chernobyl nuclear accident took just a few months. It is common for the responsible governing body, in our case the WHA, to request progress reports and set a deadline for the conclusion of the negotiations. Even though there are no draconian consequences for not meeting it, it helps focus the negotiations and keep momentum. The frequency of formal meetings usually depends on available financial resources, the capacity of delegations and the secretariat to manage the workload and the calendar of other intergovernmental meetings. One can usually expect no more than two negotiating sessions of 1-2 weeks per year as a maximum. How to get to the initial draft? The initial draft of the treaty is politically and psychologically very important because it inevitably shapes the dynamics of the subsequent negotiations, even for countries opposing it. Even though it is possible for one or more states to come forward with a zero draft text, this is a relatively uncommon step because questions about the motives of the proposing states could affect or derail negotiations. The responsibility to propose a full zero draft therefore can either fall on the chair of the negotiating body (e.g. the FCTC), on the secretariat (e.g. the revised IHR, or in the environmental field the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, drafted by the UNEP Secretariat). An important point in this regard is that a zero draft does not come out of thin air, but is the result of previous consultations or preparatory work. In the case of the IHR, the draft proposed by the secretariat was the culmination of many years of technical work and consultations, thus the text was submitted promptly to negotiations after a round of regional consultations. In the case of the pandemic treaty, so far there has been no real open discussion on its scope and content either in the WHA or the WGPR, and it is unlikely that this will occur before the WHA special session. Consequently, it is foreseeable that the body established by the WHA will devote an initial period to discuss or seek expert input on the possible building blocks of a treaty and their challenges and implications. Given the uncertainties and questions surrounding the recent proposals, it would be counterproductive to try to short-circuit an inclusive and bottom-up process for achieving a quick result at all costs. Adoption of the treaty and next steps The final draft text would be submitted to the WHA for consideration. As noted above, the Assembly will almost certainly adopt the treaty by consensus. In the unlikely event where consensus could not be reached, Article 19 of the Constitution requires a two-thirds majority (calculated on the basis of valid votes excluding abstentions). The virtual World Health Assembly nerve center at WHO’s Geneva headquarters in May 2020. The upcoming WHA Special Session will likely take a similar form. Other steps that can be taken by the WHA will depend on the nature of the treaty and the conclusions of the negotiations. A pandemic treaty will in all probability be a normative instrument establishing its own governance. Relying on precedents including the FCTC, this will include at a minimum a conference of the parties and a secretariat. Initial work on the institutional aspects will require drafting rules of procedure for the conference of the parties and, depending on the institutional arrangements contained in the treaty, financial regulations and a budget. Even though a treaty is a self-contained instrument and its governance will not be part of WHO’s, the latter may end up providing or hosting its secretariat. For all these reasons, the WHA may establish upon the adoption of the treaty a new intergovernmental body to prepare all the foregoing steps and facilitate the work of the first session of the conference of the parties. Signature, ratification and entry into force Multilateral treaties are customarily opened for signature for a defined period of time. What matters for the entry into force of the treaty, however, is reaching the required number of ratifications (or adherence, accession, formal confirmation depending on the final clauses of the treaty) and how fast that will occur. The threshold for entry into force has varied wildly in previous treaties, anywhere between 20 and 60 as an average (it was 40 for the FCTC and its illicit trade protocol). The number agreed upon will in practice depend on a compromise between an early establishment of the new legal regime and the critical mass of states required to make it credible and effective. A review of UN-system treaties shows on average a time gap of between two and four years between adoption and entry into force; the FCTC protocol on illicit trade took six years, probably reflecting its complexity and demands at national level, but the FCTC took only 21 months. A related consideration for the credibility of the treaty will be the attitude of key states, whether and how quickly they will ratify it and whether they will actively oppose it should they choose to remain outside it. A device occasionally used when it is urgent to start applying a treaty is the so-called “provisional application”, whereby contracting parties indicate in the treaty itself or in a separate act (e.g. the WHA resolution adopting a treaty) that they will provisionally implement the treaty pending its entry into force. A classic but atypical example is the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), provisionally applied from 1947 until 1995. I mention this for the sake of completeness, but it is not a common arrangement for self-intuitive sovereignty concerns. Most of the foregoing considerations also apply to the negotiation and conclusion of protocols to the treaty, should it be drafted as a framework convention requiring separate instruments to spell out its obligations. Albeit linked organically to the “mother convention”, protocols are separate treaties in their own right. Certain steps of the negotiations will probably go faster than for the original convention since the latter provides an applicable legal framework. However, the experience of the FCTC protocol – 10 years from beginning of negotiations to entry into force and only 63 parties so far – should induce caution and deter over-optimism about “quick wins” or “low-hanging fruits.” Strategic reflection is required on whether to make the implementation of a possible pandemic treaty depend heavily on the conclusion of separate protocols. A comparison of the processes required for the creation of a pandemic treaty and revising the International Health Regulations. Amending the International Health Regulations – what is similar or different? The step-by-step process for amending the IHR is spelled out in Article 55. Amendments can be proposed by any state party or the WHO Director-General (DG). Given the direction that the WGPR seems to be taking, it is likely that any amendment process will be launched directly by the Assembly, thus shortening this initial step. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen, and been controversial within WHO, well before the COVID-19 pandemic. With the exception of a highly-technical 2014 amendment extending the recognised lifetime of yellow fever vaccines, successive IHR Review Committees [expert bodies appointed by the WHO DG] have advised against amendments, and the WHO Secretariat has also traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. This is due partly to the perceived risk of opening up the entire Regulations to unpredictable and potentially counterproductive revisions that may end up decreasing their credibility and effectiveness. This concern is understandable and legitimate, but, firstly, it applies to any legislative instrument where the risk of unforeseeable outcomes has to be weighed against the need to improve its design and content. Secondly, the WHA can narrow the scope of the amendments by instructing the negotiating body to only deal with specific issues. While this conditionality is infrequent and probably undesirable in the case of treaties, it would be more plausible with regard to the IHR since the Assembly is their parent body and exercises direct oversight functions over them. Similar procedural considerations – but requiring a less steep “learning curve” Most of the procedural considerations involved in the negotiation of a pandemic treaty would apply mutatis mutandis to the amendment of the IHR – and thus are not repeated here. A possible difference concerns the preparatory work preceding and leading to an initial draft of the amendments. The learning curve for a pandemic treaty could be steeper and longer given the absence of an intergovernmental discussion thus far and the lack of familiarity of many delegations. The IHR and its complexities are better known to the public health and foreign affairs officials following WHO affairs, and it is likely that delegations may be willing to move quickly into drafting and negotiations. IHR-specific requirements Article 50 of the IHR provides that the Review Committee shall “make technical recommendations to the Director-General regarding amendments to these Regulations.” The main consideration, time-wise, is whether involving the Review Committee is a compulsory step, since the procedural requirements in the IHR and the way in which they have been implemented by the secretariat so far, are formal and cumbersome and may lead to delays. The second and related consideration is at which stage of the amendment process would the Review Committee intervene? Would it make its recommendations before amendments are drafted, on an initial draft, or rather towards the end of the process? The political implications of those different approaches for the negotiations may be considerable. There are few precedents from which lessons may be learned. The IHR have been amended only once, in 2014, adjusting the requirements for yellow fever vaccination required by some state parties (eg. India) for international travelers arriving from yellow-fever endemic countries (Annex 7). The amendment extended the validity of a well-accepted vaccine from 10 years to lifetime in line with new evidence about the vaccine’s efficacy. An IHR Review Committee was not created for that occasion, setting a precedent. At the same time, the yellow fever vaccine amendment was limited and very technical. It was recommended by the Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on immunization, a dedicated expert group convened by the WHO secretariat, and the WHO Executive Board proposed the amendment to the WHA. In contrast, a broad and substantial amendment of multiple, substantive provisions of the IHR, which might cover sensitive issues around the early warning of outbreaks and WHO’s mandate to investigate and enforce IHR provisions, may be seen as something different legally and politically – warranting the creation of an IHR Review Committee. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen but the WHO Secretariat has traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. The main legal consideration is that the Review Committee is an expert body providing its recommendations to the DG at his request rather than a governance organ partaking of the normative functions of WHO. There can be situations like the one just mentioned, in which that technical input is not necessary or can be provided through different and less time-consuming channels. Moreover, a process initiated by the Executive Board or the WHA is different from a proposal by a member state or the DG. In my view, convening a Review Committee may be politically but not legally necessary. It is indicative in this connection that Article 55 does not mention the Review Committee, which suggests that its participation is not compulsory. Adoption of the amendments and entry into force Article 55 requires that amendments be communicated to state parties at least four months before the opening of the WHA, which may influence the schedule of the negotiating body. As noted above, consensus is the norm in WHO, and that will apply to the adoption of the amendments. In the unlikely event of formal objections, a vote would require a simple majority instead of the two-thirds required for a treaty. The main difference between a pandemic treaty and amendments to the IHR concerns entry into force. Pursuant to Article 22 of the Constitution and Article 59 of the IHR, the latter enter into force for all member states 24 months after the DG’s notification of adoption, except for those member states that either reject the amendments or file a reservation within 18 months from that notification. In case of a reservation, Article 62 provides for a rather complex process to determine whether the reservation is compatible with the object and purpose of the Regulations and can be accepted. The Article 62 procedure makes it very difficult in practice to reject a reservation and, historically, the sole objection that I am aware of was by Australia to the 1969 version of the IHR. Opting out of a regulation (or amendments thereof) is a drastic, highly visible and politically heavy decision that states would probably take only for the most serious reasons. Still, both rejections and successful reservations are possible and would undesirably fragment what should be instead a uniform legal and coordinating framework to achieve global health security. Objections could also create impossibly complex situations, e.g. in case of amendments changing the functions of WHO, because objecting states would remain bound by the different functions enshrined in the original IHR. For these reasons and as noted above with regard to a pandemic treaty, the inclusiveness, fairness and legitimacy of the process are of crucial importance to keep states in the fold even if they are not entirely satisfied of the outcome. Conclusions – both exercises can be more or less difficult, depending on the political atmosphere Among the preliminary conclusions that can be drawn is the fact that the two processes, when compared side-by-side, would be substantially similar. However there are some significant differences which will need careful consideration as well. Significantly, amending the IHR may be faster because: 1) modifying an existing text is presumably easier than negotiating one from scratch, 2) the WHA can define and narrow the scope and purpose of the amendments, and 3) WHO member states are relatively familiar with the Regulations. The need to consult the Review Committee, however, must be clarified – as well as what this might mean for achieving consensus. The timeline for entry into force of a treaty or any IHR amendments may be similar for either of the two options, but the amendments to the IHR would enter into force for all 196 WHO member states. In the case of a new treaty, a subset of countries will be bound by it once it enters into force, but the timeline for all WHO member states to ratify such a new instrument could be much more protracted – and remains unknown. Politically, both exercises can be more or less difficult depending on the political atmosphere, the proposals on the table, the ability of the bureau to build consensus and the myriad other factors characterizing any major multilateral negotiation. In both processes, there is great importance in reaching a real and sustainable consensus. At the same time, joining consensus in the WHA to adopt a pandemic treaty is not necessarily predictive of future ratifications since governments as well as circumstances may change. In both cases, finally, it will be important to maintain momentum but avoid imposing unrealistic timelines for the negotiations. The Independent Panel’s call for concluding a pandemic treaty in six months is an example of an unrealistic goal in this connection. Opting into a treaty requires political will and action, which can be highly appealing to politicians. On the other hand, remaining bound by a revised IHR could also be the positive outcome of political inertia and inaction – that is a country’s reluctance to be seen as opting out. The key questions are what is more politically feasible, and what will build more genuine, sustained political commitment to any improved set of international rules that aim to better govern future outbreaks and reduce pandemic risks. Gian Luca Burci is adjunct professor of international law at the Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies. His areas of expertise are global health law and governance, global health security and the law and practice of international organizations. Between 2005 and 2016 he was Legal Counsel of WHO. Updated on 07.10.2021 with a description of the 2014 IHR amendment on requirements around yellow fever vaccines. Image Credits: Flickr – Guilhem Vellut, Flickr – US Mission Geneva, WHO / Antoine Tardy, WHO, Gian Luca Burci, Wikimedia Commons. Tuberculosis is Here to Stay if We Don’t Mobilise Resources for Diagnoses and Double Fundings, New Data Shows 01/10/2021 Aishwarya Tendolkar Global efforts to eliminate TB have been set back by the COVID-19 pandemic. The COVID-19 pandemic and the consequent diversion of resources toward battling SARS-CoV2 has also set back global efforts to eliminate the world’s second most deadly infectious killer: Tuberculosis, by 2030. Only a doubling of investments next year can pave the way to attainment of the 2030 United Nations Sustainable Development Goals to eliminate the disease, experts and panelists at the Stop TB Partnership said Tuesday. The panel session coincided with the release of new data from a study conducted by the Stop TB Partnership that showed COVID’s impact on TB response this year continues to be as devastating as last year, with 1.2 million fewer people projected to be diagnosed and treated for TB this year, in comparison with 2019. The new estimates, developed in collaboration with USAID, Johns Hopkins University, Avenir Health and Imperial College, are based on data from 27 countries that account for 75 percent of the global TB caseload. That means TB investments for this coming year need to be doubled, in order to meet a 2018-2022 target for diagnosing and treating 40 million people (or 10 million a year), within that four year time frame, the Partnership says. TB kills 4,000 people a day The airborne disease still kills 4,000 people every day, with nearly a quarter of the world’s population estimated to have been infected. Despite being curable and preventable, only an estimated 5.7 million people received treatment for TB in 2020, a decline of 21 percent from the previous year—leaving an estimated 4.3 million people with untreated TB and implying all but certain death for probably half that number, the report showed. A lack of attention to the disease, lack of funding, and a dearth of proper diagnostic tools are responsible, Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership said at a Stop TB briefing Tuesday. “COVID showed that if the government and people are scared, money is not an issue. We are in the middle of a disaster but our attention seems to be in a very wrong place.” Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership. The “orphan disease” does not receive political priority or funding, Obiefuna Austin Arinze, Executive Director of Afro Global Alliance and incoming Vice-Chair of the Stop TB Partnership Board said. At current levels of funding, the world will miss the target set by the United National High-Level Meeting on TB that took place in 2018 for diagnosing and treating 40 million people with TB by 2022. With just 400 days to reach 2022 goals, the diagnostic figure is even more grim for children with TB, Ditiu said. However, with mobilisation of resources – including funding, digital diagnostics and more government-sponsored community interventions – the world could reach the target’s 90% mark – treating some 36 million people, Ditiu said. Annual resource needs and available funding for TB in USD. So why is investing in TB diagnosis and elimination imperative? In simple words, it saves more lives than you would think. “Investing an extra dollar in TB is one of the best dollars spent to help the world,” Dr Bjorn Lomborg, President of the Danish think tank, Copenhagen Consensus, said at the teleconference. According to him, it would only cost US$8.1 billion dollars annually, between now and 2030, to eliminate TB. This investment translates to benefits worth US$348 billion dollars, pegging the benefit-cost ratio at 43. This means that every dollar invested in TB prevention and care yields a return of US$43. But currently, only US$6.5 billion is available annually for TB response globally. Moreover, TB funding has stagnated over the last five years – meaning there are big gaps that need to be overcome now. That’s why, at the UNHLM on TB in 2018, states and non-state actors pledged to commit a total of US$13 billion annually until 2022 to overcome past shortfalls – unfortunately COVID intervened the following year and those pledges were not honored. Some US$13 billion in funding is needed for TB care and prevention per year. TB is traditionally a low GF funding priority – despite a high dependency on Global Fund services in LMICs Despite being curable, preventable, and easily diagnosable, TB sees more deaths (over 1 million annually) than HIV/AIDS and Malaria combined. At the same time, The Global Fund channels only 18 percent of its resources to TB diagnosis and treatment. The remaining 82% is invested in fighting HIV/AIDS, malaria, and more recently, COVID-19 tests and treatments. Although 85% of national TB budgets, on average, are financed by low- and middle-income countries themselves, they remain highly dependent on the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria to fill vital gaps in services. And that adds weight to the Global Fund’s appeals, panelists pointed out. In terms of how those funds should be spent, the World Health Organisation along with the UN Secretary General have outlined priority recommendations to ramp up the TB response, Tereza Kasaeva, Director of WHO’s Global TB Programme said. “Efforts need to be intensified to make these recommendations a reality.” Diagnosis still reliant on less accurate sputum smear microscopy According to WHO, the diagnosis of TB and drug-resistant TB remains a challenge with one-third of people with TB and two-thirds of people with drug-resistant TB not being detected globally. While WHO recommends highly accurate rapid molecular assays as the initial test to diagnose TB, less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool. Only 28 percent of people were diagnosed with MTB using a rapid molecular test in 2019, Ditiu said. This means that nearly three quarters of diagnoses are done using the “clinical” smear microscopy. Smear microscopy, while cost-effective, has a poor track record in diagnosing extra-pulmonary tuberculosis, paediatric tuberculosis, and TB in patients co-infected with HIV and tuberculosis, a paper pointed. “Why don’t we allow people proper diagnostic tools?” she asked, pointing out that an untreated person with TB can transmit the bacteria to nearly 15 people every year. “Now think about this in countries like India with a population of 1.2 billion.” Less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool for TB, despite the existence of highly accurate rapid molecular assays. COVID devastated TB diagnostics To make matters worse, the COVID-19 pandemic devastated the diagnostics investments in TB – whereby existing resources were diverted, and tools like the highly accurate GeneXpert molecular diagnostic platforms were repurposed to diagnose COVID, in the pandemic’s early days. Since then, new rapid COVID diagnostic tests have become widely available, but there has been no significant recovery plan for TB diagnostics put into place, Obiefuna said. The COVID-19 pandemic was not the first time that the health infrastructure for TB was used to tackle other health crises, and particularly those related to airborne diseases, pointed out Cheri Vincent, Chief of USAID’s TB Division, at the meeting. “We saw it [being diverted] for Ebola and airborne influenza,” she said, adding, “If we can’t solve TB, we can’t solve the next airborne pandemic,” she highlighted. In fact, TB doctors were the first to be diverted to tackle the COVID-19 breakout, Ditiu said. The Zambia story, and what it teaches us But not all has been downhill in the fight against TB. Zambia offers an example of a country that has been able to sustain its TB programmes through a combination of domestic funding, government-community partnerships, and diagnostic tools – despite the COVID pandemic. It can provide inspiration for countries battling both diseases at the same time. Already today, Zambia has achieved 89% of its 2022 UNHLM diagnosis and treatment target. Over the past five years, the country invested US$45 million of domestic resources in TB response. “[TB] commodity security is key to achieving our goals,” said Dr. Patrick Lungu, National TB and Leprosy Control Program Manager in Zambia. A ‘TB Situation room’ was created to review TB programmes on a weekly basis to identify issues that may be negatively impacting performance. “We were able to offer more technical support to different levels of the health system – which translates to Zambia envisaging to achieve the UNHLM target in at least two-three key indicators,” Lungu said. Zambia has achieved nearly 89 percent of its UNHLM target so far. Will India achieve its ambitious 2025 TB elimination target? When it comes to countries like India – which bears the heaviest TB burden in the world, the pandemic has slowed-down and diverted efforts to eliminate elimination of TB by 2025 -a huge goal set by the government. According to the Indian Health Ministry’s 2021 Annual Report on Tuberculosis Elimination, reports and notification of confirmed TB diagnoses tumbled 38 percent in March-April 2020 owing to the lockdown. Furthermore, a majority of the country’s TB elimination resources were repurposed for Covid-19. Then just as services were beginning to recoup, a massive second COVID wave hit the country in spring 2021; it remains unclear what dents that made in the progress India had seen toward the end of 2020. In its 2021 official report, the Indian Health Ministry nonetheless suggested that the dedicated Infectious disease hospitals that were established for Covid will contribute “significantly” to future TB Care and management. Despite being scheduled to be a part of Tuesday’s Stop TB Partnership panel, the Indian Health Ministry did not make an appearance – leaving a lack of clarity on trends and progress in 2021. But on a global level, the warning signs are clear. Says Ditui: “we have erased 10-12 years of progress, and are back to 2010-11 levels of TB detection and cases. This becomes all the more alarming with the fact that TB is not a new disease but one that has been around for decades, and has a vaccine. One can only hope that TB receives the undivided effort it needs to be eliminated.” Image Credits: The Global Fund / Evgeny Maloletka, Stop TB Partnership, Dr. Patrick Lungu. Posts navigation Older postsNewer posts This site uses cookies to help give you the best experience on our website. Cookies enable us to collect information that helps us personalise your experience and improve the functionality and performance of our site. By continuing to read our website, we assume you agree to this, otherwise you can adjust your browser settings. Please read our cookie and Privacy Policy. Our Cookies and Privacy Policy Loading Comments... You must be logged in to post a comment.
African Medicines Agency Will Come into Being on 5 November – after 15th African Country Ratifies & Deposits AMA Treaty 06/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan The African Medicines Agency’s framework would help combat falsified products Africans are a step closer to speedier access to newer, safer medicines following this week’s notification by 15 African Union (AU) member countries that they have formally ratified and deposited their accord to create a new African Medicines Agency (AMA). Although the AU adopted the treaty to set up the AMA back in February 2019, 15 African countries had to formally notify the AU Commission that they had ratified the treaty before the agency could be set up. On Tuesday, Cameroon became the 15th country to deposit its ratification instrument – finally pushing the AMA over the threshold into reality. According to the Treaty, the AMA will now come into force in 30 days time – on 5 November. The AMA aims to support African countries to better regulate medical products and harmonise the regulation of medicines across the continent. It will also test samples of medicines from time to time to eliminate fakes that plague the continent. The 14 other countries to have both ratified the AMA and “deposited the instrument of ratification” at the AU (a letter from the head of state informing it of ratification) are Algeria, Benin, Burkina Faso, Gabon, Guinea, Mali, Mauritius, Namibia, Niger, Rwanda, Seychelles, Sierra Leone and Zimbabwe. A further three countries have ratified the treaty but not formally informed the AU, while eight more have signed the treaty but not yet ratified it. This means 36 of Africa’s 55 countries – predominantly Francophone countries – have expressed support for the AMA. However, African powerhouses Ethiopia, Nigeria and South Africa have not yet expressed their support for the AMA. Today, we celebrate as AMA made it to the finish line. 15th instrument of ratification received by the @_AfricanUnion and the 30 day count down for AMA to enter into force has officially began! Congratulations to the member states that have made this possible See infographic 👇 pic.twitter.com/4IqLRLEIqP — Dorothy Njagi (@Dottienjagi) October 5, 2021 The COVID-19 pandemic has highlighted the need for countries to speedily assess medicines and vaccines, a capacity that a number of African countries lack. The African Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has played a central role in co-ordinating the health response to the pandemic on the continent, and highlighted the value of a continental player during a health crisis. Greg Perry, Assistant Director-General of the International Federation of Pharmaceutical Manufacturers and Associations (IFPMA), welcomed the AMA’s ratification, describing it as taking “one step closer to achieving a continent-wide regulatory agency”. “We look forward to the full implementation of the AMA,, which will be a game-changer for all Africans to access safe, effective and quality medical products in a timely manner,” said Perry. Pharmaceutical companies have long complained about how complicated it is to get medicines approved in Africa and how long it takes particularly in comparison to Europe, which processes applications via a central European Medicines Agency (EMA). Perry added that for the agency to become fully operational, it was important for the AU to define the appropriate funding model and engage with the African Medicines Regulatory Harmonisation initiative “which has already set strong governance structures and pan-African guidance in place for the approval of COVID-19 treatments and vaccines”. Reduce barriers to African market entry Andy Gray, senior lecturer in pharmacology at the University of KwaZulu-Natal, said that AMA’s greatest potential lies “in the field of harmonisation of regulatory systems, which should reduce the barriers to market entry in Africa”. “The AMA is not intended to be a supranational regulator, and will not make decisions in the way the EMA does, but it could help in bringing national medicines regulatory authorities together, simplifying systems and reducing redundancy,” explained Gray. “It can also make a major difference by promoting transparency of regulatory action across the continent, and showing how that can drive reliance models of regulation.” Gray added that the AMA could learn lessons from the Africa CDC by providing “visible and credible leadership”, ensuring “practical outputs, not just talk” and ensure it had recognition in appropriate global forums. Today is a historic day. #Cameroon became the 15 country to deposit the instrument of ratification of the African Medicines Agency. Now, the treaty will enter into force in 30 days (Nov 5). #AMA is a game change on our continent.@AUC_MoussaFaki @PR_Paul_BIYA pic.twitter.com/0KOYh5EEvk — Michel Sidibé (@MichelSidibe) October 5, 2021 Earlier this year, Michel Sidibé, the former Executive Director of UNAIDS and Mali’s Minister of Health, was appointed as the AU’s Special Envoy for the AMA. He has been leading efforts to ensure that countries ratify the agency, and could be in the running to head it. Announcing Cameroon’s ratification of the AMA on Twitter this week, Sidibé described the agency as a “game-changer for our continent”. Image Credits: United States Army , Marco Verch/Flickr. African Countries are the Focus of New Maternal Mortality Targets 05/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan UNFPA Executive Director Dr Natalia Kanem Nineteen countries have been prioritised for support to implement new global targets aimed at preventing maternal and newborn deaths. This emerged at the launch on Tuesday of the new targets, which were developed by the World Health Organization (WHO), UN Population Fund (UNFPA) and their partners in the Ending Preventable Maternal Mortality (EPMM) initiative. UNFPA Executive Director Dr Natalia Kanem said that while the global community had committed to reducing the global maternal mortality rates to 70 deaths per 100,000 live births by 2030 as part of the sustainable development goals (SDG), it was not moving fast enough. “If the current pace prevails, we will not reach this goal before 2065,” said Kanem. “This is a wake-up call for us to urgently scale up and accelerate our efforts with less than 10 years to go.” Fourteen of the chosen countries are in Africa and include Chad, which has one of the highest maternal mortality rates in the world, as well as Nigeria and Ethiopia. The five non-African countries are Afghanistan, Pakistan, Mexico, Nepal and Laos. The 19 priority countries identified for action against maternal mortality. The 19 countries will get support to implement and monitor the targets, according to the UN agency officials. There are five targets: 90% pregnant women to attend four or more antenatal care visits (towards increasing to eight visits by 2030); 90% of births to be attended by skilled health personnel; 80% of women who have just given birth to access postnatal care within two days of delivery; 60% of the population to have access to emergency obstetric care within two hours of travel time; 65% of women to be able to make informed and empowered decisions regarding sexual relations, contraceptive use, and their reproductive health. Country selection involved a number of factors including a high burden of maternal deaths and stillbirths, the strength of country midwifery and whether there were partners to support the ministries of health, according to World Health Organization’s (WHO) Dr Anshu Banerjee, Director for Maternal, Child and Adolescent Health and Ageing. Preventable deaths Addressing the launch, WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus said that around 295,000 women died each year due to complications of pregnancy and childbirth, and there were two million stillbirths and 2.4 million newborn deaths annually. “Most of these deaths are in low and middle-income countries,” said Tedros. “Most of these [deaths] could have been prevented with quality pre- and post-natal care and birthing assistance from competent maternal and newborn health professionals,” said Tedros. “The COVID 19 pandemic has badly disrupted essential health services around the world, including for maternal and newborn care. WHO is supporting countries to resume these services regardless of a woman’s COVID-19 status,” he added. Most maternal deaths are preventable with the right care at the right time. Women must get access to healthcare, and this care must: ✅ be of high quality. ✅ meet the needs of families ✅ treat them with dignity and respect. https://t.co/DhTF3jxQB0 pic.twitter.com/TNqBsiyyfx — World Health Organization (WHO) (@WHO) October 5, 2021 In 2017, the global maternal mortality ratio was around 211 maternal deaths per 100,000 live births, which was a 38% reduction compared to 2000 – a reduction of around 2,9% per year. “Universal health coverage, including universal access to sexual and reproductive health care, will be key to providing equitable access to quality maternal health services,” said Kanem. Kanem said that her agency, the WHO and partners are “committed to helping countries achieve coverage targets by implementing action-oriented plans, and by tracking progress at the national and sub-national levels”. She stressed that the targets “also incorporate key determinants of maternal health, including a woman’s ability to make decisions about her own sexual and reproductive health”. The SDG 3.1 sets out that by 2030, the global maternal mortality ratio (MMR) should be reduced to less than 70 per 100,000 live births, and no country should have an MMR more than 140 per 100,000 live births. “The latest estimates are 211 per 100,000 live births – but increasing to 415 on average in the poorest countries,” according to the WHO. Pfizer Vaccine Effective Against COVID-19 Hospitalizations for All Variants 05/10/2021 Raisa Santos Two jabs of the Pfizer-BioNTech vaccine are 90% effective against COVID-19 hospitalizations for all variants including Delta, for at least 6 months, confirmed a new study published by The Lancet. The study, conducted by Kaiser Permanete and Pfizer, found that while effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, effectiveness against hospitalizations remains at 90% overall for all variants. “Our study confirms that vaccines are a critical tool for controlling the pandemic and remain highly effective in preventing severe disease and hospitalization, including from the delta and other variants of concern. Protection against infection does decline in the months following a second dose,” said lead author of the study Dr Sara Tartof, of Kaiser Permanente. The study analyzed 3,436,957 electronic health records from the Kaiser Permanente Southern California (KPSC) health system between 4 December 2020 and 8 August 2021 to assess the effectiveness of the Pfizer vaccine against COVID-19 infections and related hospitalizations. Immunity declines after six months In addition, the study also found that effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, falling from 88% within one month after receiving two doses to 47% after six months, underscoring the importance of improving vaccination rates worldwide. Researchers did not observe a difference in waning between variants. While this does provide evidence towards waning immunity against COVID-19, the CDC has called for additional research to determine which groups should be prioritized to receive booster shots. “In line with the recent FDA [3] and CDC recommendations [4], considerations for booster shots should take global COVID-19 vaccine supply into account as people in many countries around the world have not yet received a primary vaccination series,” said Tartof. Vaccine equity and booster shots have prompted increasing debate in recent weeks, with WHO calling for a global moratorium on COVID-19 boosters to be extended until the end of the year, and global health advocates protesting “vaccine apartheid” outside the UN during the General Assembly last month. US and Israeli studies find similar reductions in immunity Other findings from the US Centers for Disease Control (CDC) and the Israeli Ministry of Health had also found reductions of immunity from the Pfizer vaccine after six months. The Israeli findings reported that people over age 60 who received a third dose of the Pfizer vaccine were five times less likely to become severely ill if they had their first shot at least five months earlier. These results in particular were regarded as a critical factor in the recommendation from the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) to amend its emergency use authorization (EUA) last month for the Pfizer vaccine. The FDA now recommends a single booster dose to be administered at least six months after completion for: individuals 65 and older; individuals 18 through 64 at high risk of severe COVID-19; and individuals 18 through 64 with increased exposure of SARS-CoV-2 that puts them at high risk of health complications relating to COVID-19. Image Credits: International Monetary Fund/Ernesto Benavides. Indian Generic Companies Are Ready to Make Merck’s COVID-19 Antiviral Pill 04/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Molnupiravir could make a significant difference to the global response to COVID-19. Indian generic drug manufacturers are poised to make the antiviral pill, molnupiravir, which halved hospitalisations in a trial of high-risk people with COVID-19. Merck, which developed molnupiravir in collaboration with Ridgeback Biotherapeutics, has awarded non-exclusive, voluntary licensing agreements to eight generic companies in India since April in anticipation of positive trial results. According to Merck, it has been producing molnupiravir “at risk” and expects to produce 10 million courses of treatment by the end of 2021, the company said a media release last Friday. Merck cut short the trial of molnupiravir in the light of the good results, and will make an application for emergency use authorisation (EUA) with the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA), “as soon as possible”, the company said. It will also submit “marketing applications to other regulatory bodies worldwide”, it added. Australia’s Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) granted provisional determination for molnupiravir in August. Meanwhile, in anticipation of regulatory approval, the Access to COVID-19 Tools (ACT) Accelerator is working to “secure volumes” of the pills for people in LMICs, according to ACT-Accelerator partner Unitaid. “Effective, simple to use, oral treatments that can avert the progression to severe illness are exactly the kind of breakthroughs we need to get the pandemic under control. Deployed alongside vaccines, such medicines could drive down hospitalizations and deaths due to COVID-19,” said Dr Philippe Duneton, Executive Director of Unitaid shortly after the Merck announcement. Few treatment options At present, there are very few treatment options for people infected with COVID-19, and those that exist – such as remdesivir and dexamethasone – are expensive, given intravenously or by injections and only for severely ill people already in hospital. White House medical adviser Dr Anthony Fauci told CNN on Sunday that the medicine was “extremely important”. “It’s a pill that’s given by mouth, so you don’t need anything special other than taking a pill the way you take any pill. And the results are really quite impressive,” said Fauci. However, he said that it only halved the risk of hospitalisation and to cut this risk by 100% people should “not get infected in the first place”. Back in April, Merck entered into voluntary licensing agreements with five Indian companies – Cipla, Dr Reddy’s Laboratories, Emcure Pharmaceuticals, Hetero Labs and Sun Pharmaceutical Industries. All are World Health Organization (WHO) pre-qualified manufacturing facilities. It has since licensed Aurobindo Pharma, Torrent Pharmaceuticals, and Viatris, to manufacture the drug. At least four of the companies are already manufacturing generic molnupirvir, which they have been supplying to a trial in India and all eight are ready for global supply, according to MSD India. When it announced the licensing back in April, Merck said the intention was to enable the manufacturers to “supply molnupiravir to India and more than 100 low and middle-income countries (LMICs)”. No deaths in trial The molnupiravir trial involved 775 unvaccinated adults with mild-to-moderate COVID-19 with at least one risk factor for serious illness – most commonly, obesity, being over the age of 60, and living with diabetes and heart disease. Only 7,3% of those taking molnupiravir ended up in hospital in comparison to 14,1% of those on the placebo, announced Merck (known as MSD outside the US and Canada) in a media release last Friday. “Twenty-nine days into the trial, no deaths were reported in patients who received molnupiravir, as compared to eight deaths in patients who received placebo,” it added. The trial was conducted globally, including at sites in Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Egypt, France, Germany, Guatemala, Israel, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Philippines, Poland, Russia, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Taiwan, Ukraine, the United Kingdom and the US. Meanwhile, in June the US government ordered approximately 1.7 million courses of molnupiravir at a cost of $1.2 billion – about $700/patient – according to a June media release from Merck. However, this price is equal to about 35 times the estimated sustainable generic price using current market prices for the active pharmaceutical ingredients (API), according to Melissa J Barber from Harvard University’s Department of Global Health and Population and Dzintars Gotham from King’s College Hospital in London. “Assuming optimization of molnupiravir synthesis, and a resulting drop in API cost, the US price would be equal to about 161 times the estimated sustainable generic price,” the two researchers noted in a brief published last Friday. They identified that three companies appeared to be exporting API for molnupiravir – Optimus Drugs Private, Honour Lab, and Maithri Laboratories. Meanwhile, Pfizer and Roche are also racing to develop an antiviral pill for COVID-19, according to Reuters. A New Pandemic Treaty, Revised International Health Regulations, or Both? What is the Actual Roadmap? 02/10/2021 Gian Luca Burci WHO Headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland. The World Health Assembly is set to make a fateful decision in November over whether to negotiate a new international ‘Pandemic Treaty’ to improve future pandemic preparedness and response. However, major players like the United States, backed by some civil society groups, have suggested that revisions of the existing International Health Regulations (IHR) would be a better path. Amidst the hyperbole of oft-heated debate over which route might be easier, quicker or more effective, it’s important to understand that either option will require careful, systematic planning and execution of a process that is oft-misunderstood. At the same time, there are some important technical points that must be kept in mind. WHA agreement to adopt a Pandemic Treaty may have a much more sweeping historical sense, than mere revisions of the existing IHR. But a new treaty will only be enforceable among those member states that have ratified it in what is typically a prolonged process – while any IHR revisions that are agreed to would be applicable to all 196 WHO member states immediately. Ultimately, it is reaching political consensus on the often-charged content of proposed treaty/IHR reforms that matters the most. But to do that, the process also needs careful consideration – and demystification. WHO former legal counsel Gian Luca Burci, Adjunct Professor of international law at the Geneva Graduate Institute, takes apart the procedural issues, and what they mean, ahead of the third working group meeting of member states on the issue, next week. Pandemic Treaty or IHR revisions – exploring the pathways & process In May, the World Health Assembly tasked a Member States’ working group with the critical mission of assessing “the benefits of developing a WHO convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” The Working Group on Strengthening WHO Preparedness and Response to Health Emergencies (WGPR) is now tasked with coming up with a recommendation in time for a WHA special session in November on whether the WHA should establish an intergovernmental process “to draft and negotiate such a convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” Just two months from the deadline, we understand that discussions in the WGPR are moving towards negotiating a new “pandemic treaty” and revising the International Health Regulations (IHR) in parallel after the November WHA – rather than forcing a choice between them. While this would be a welcome compromise, there seems to be some confusion, as well as contradictory positions, about the procedural steps required to pursue either option. Debate is particularly intense over the question of whether amending the IHR or concluding a treaty would be “easier and quicker,” and which option would incentivize more participation and commitment. While the process will eventually depend on a number of, as yet, unpredictable factors, international law and practice point to some likely steps and procedural requirements, which are reviewed here. This is without reference to the potential content of a pandemic treaty or amended IHR – closely related to questions of speed and difficulty of negotiations. This review also does not purport to be exhaustive; more information can be found in the Geneva Graduate Institute’s “Guide to a Pandemic Treaty.” Pandemic Treaty – from negotiation to adoption, ratification & entry into force Launch of the negotiating process Under Article 19 of the WHO Constitution, the WHA can adopt “conventions or agreements with respect to any matter within the competence of the Organization.” The process leading up to a WHO treaty (“treaty,” “convention,” “agreement” are different denominations but do not change the substance) would therefore be launched by a WHA resolution. The resolution could shape negotiations, for example by requesting that certain issues be included in the treaty or given priority. However, that level of prescriptiveness is infrequent in contemporary treaty practice to leave flexibility to the negotiators. Negotiating forum The Health Assembly would establish a dedicated intergovernmental body open to all WHO member states to draft and negotiate the future convention. This step can be articulated in many different ways and there is no single model in international practice. In the case of the WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control (FCTC), for example, the process was subdivided into two parts: 1) a working group was firstly established to discuss possible building blocks of the convention before committing to treaty negotiations and 2) after a green light from WHA, an intergovernmental negotiating body was established. However, in many other cases, a single body (labelled for example an “intergovernmental negotiating committee”) was responsible for the whole preparation and negotiation of the treaty. This occurred, for example, with the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) and later its Kyoto Protocol. WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus delivering the closing speech for the 72nd World Health Assembly in 2019, prior to the COVID-19 pandemic. Negotiating bodies of this nature are invariably open to participation by all member states. In addition, the European Union is a likely invitee with full rights of participation under the rubric of “regional economic integration organizations” (a category that so far includes only the EU). And indeed the EU has already been one of the most vocal advocates of a pandemic treaty. Participation of other non-state actors Beyond member states and possibly the EU, one can expect participation to be extended to other actors identified in the 2016 Framework of Engagement with Non-State Actors, most importantly NGOs, international business associations and philanthropic foundations (the fourth group, academic institutions, are not entitled to participate but are sometimes invited ad hoc as experts). All these actors would participate as “observers” with limited privileges, rather than full negotiators. For example, they usually can only participate in public meetings but are excluded from closed negotiating sessions that often prevail at crucial stages of the process. However, what matters is physical presence at the negotiations to lobby and brief delegates and network with like-minded organizations. Unlike more technical questions such as “one health” and access to pathogen samples, we can expect substantial civil society mobilization and lobbying behind issues such as equity, human rights and access to countermeasures. These considerations are especially relevant if negotiations resume in person; if the sanitary situation still requires online meetings, the process will have to be adapted and the recent sessions of the WHA and the Executive Board offer a blueprint for that. Virtual negotiations of course are less than ideal for all participants. Methods of work – geopolitical representation and the demands of consensus decision-making The body or bodies established by the WHA will have to elect their officers, typically following WHO’s breakdown into six regions. The Assembly can prescribe the make-up of the bureau, as in the case of the WGPR. Appointing the bureau can be a delicate process depending on geopolitical circumstances or competing ambitions. The role of the bureau is not cast in stone but can be decisive for the progress and outcome of work, in particular by working informally behind the scenes to explore options and foster consensus. The bodies concerned will operate under the WHA rules of procedure, but in practice they enjoy considerable discretion in organizing their work. It is customary, and practically a dogma within WHO, that decisions be only taken by consensus without a formal vote. This increases the importance of the process that has to be perceived as fair, legitimate and inclusive to lead to a result that is at least not unacceptable to any state. The requirement of consensus decision-making carries a lot of inertia all the way to the WHA; even though any state can break consensus by formally objecting and requesting a vote, it is in fact a heavy responsibility to do so and it hardly ever happens. Negotiations of long and complex instruments usually require dividing the text, or particularly difficult issues, among subcommittees that work in parallel, formally report to the plenary on their progress and are often coordinated by the bureau. Small delegations have understandable difficulties in managing multiple meetings, and there is an established practice within WHO to avoid more than two parallel meetings. Available UN-system practice, however, shows much flexibility to adapt the organization of work and the mix of formal and informal meetings. Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, WHO Director General, discussing a pandemic treaty in September 2021. Complex WHO intergovernmental negotiations have often been supplemented by intersessional consultations, either on a regional basis or on specific topics. Regional consultations can be particularly effective in reaching common positions and strengthening the negotiating leverage of groups of countries that could otherwise be overpowered individually. Duration and frequency of negotiations are difficult to predict The duration and frequency of treaty negotiations are difficult to predict. The duration of negotiations will depend on a number of factors including the complexity of the issues at hand, the attitude of key countries, the sense of urgency, the diplomatic ability of the bureau, and the intended outcome. A general “framework convention” without detailed and highly prescriptive obligations may be relatively quicker to achieve, but practice shows that even negotiating such instruments requires on average no less than two years. By way of reference, negotiating the UNFCCC took about two years, the FCTC took three years and six negotiating sessions, while its protocol on illicit trade took four years and five sessions. In contrast, negotiating the two IAEA conventions concluded on the heels of the 1986 Chernobyl nuclear accident took just a few months. It is common for the responsible governing body, in our case the WHA, to request progress reports and set a deadline for the conclusion of the negotiations. Even though there are no draconian consequences for not meeting it, it helps focus the negotiations and keep momentum. The frequency of formal meetings usually depends on available financial resources, the capacity of delegations and the secretariat to manage the workload and the calendar of other intergovernmental meetings. One can usually expect no more than two negotiating sessions of 1-2 weeks per year as a maximum. How to get to the initial draft? The initial draft of the treaty is politically and psychologically very important because it inevitably shapes the dynamics of the subsequent negotiations, even for countries opposing it. Even though it is possible for one or more states to come forward with a zero draft text, this is a relatively uncommon step because questions about the motives of the proposing states could affect or derail negotiations. The responsibility to propose a full zero draft therefore can either fall on the chair of the negotiating body (e.g. the FCTC), on the secretariat (e.g. the revised IHR, or in the environmental field the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, drafted by the UNEP Secretariat). An important point in this regard is that a zero draft does not come out of thin air, but is the result of previous consultations or preparatory work. In the case of the IHR, the draft proposed by the secretariat was the culmination of many years of technical work and consultations, thus the text was submitted promptly to negotiations after a round of regional consultations. In the case of the pandemic treaty, so far there has been no real open discussion on its scope and content either in the WHA or the WGPR, and it is unlikely that this will occur before the WHA special session. Consequently, it is foreseeable that the body established by the WHA will devote an initial period to discuss or seek expert input on the possible building blocks of a treaty and their challenges and implications. Given the uncertainties and questions surrounding the recent proposals, it would be counterproductive to try to short-circuit an inclusive and bottom-up process for achieving a quick result at all costs. Adoption of the treaty and next steps The final draft text would be submitted to the WHA for consideration. As noted above, the Assembly will almost certainly adopt the treaty by consensus. In the unlikely event where consensus could not be reached, Article 19 of the Constitution requires a two-thirds majority (calculated on the basis of valid votes excluding abstentions). The virtual World Health Assembly nerve center at WHO’s Geneva headquarters in May 2020. The upcoming WHA Special Session will likely take a similar form. Other steps that can be taken by the WHA will depend on the nature of the treaty and the conclusions of the negotiations. A pandemic treaty will in all probability be a normative instrument establishing its own governance. Relying on precedents including the FCTC, this will include at a minimum a conference of the parties and a secretariat. Initial work on the institutional aspects will require drafting rules of procedure for the conference of the parties and, depending on the institutional arrangements contained in the treaty, financial regulations and a budget. Even though a treaty is a self-contained instrument and its governance will not be part of WHO’s, the latter may end up providing or hosting its secretariat. For all these reasons, the WHA may establish upon the adoption of the treaty a new intergovernmental body to prepare all the foregoing steps and facilitate the work of the first session of the conference of the parties. Signature, ratification and entry into force Multilateral treaties are customarily opened for signature for a defined period of time. What matters for the entry into force of the treaty, however, is reaching the required number of ratifications (or adherence, accession, formal confirmation depending on the final clauses of the treaty) and how fast that will occur. The threshold for entry into force has varied wildly in previous treaties, anywhere between 20 and 60 as an average (it was 40 for the FCTC and its illicit trade protocol). The number agreed upon will in practice depend on a compromise between an early establishment of the new legal regime and the critical mass of states required to make it credible and effective. A review of UN-system treaties shows on average a time gap of between two and four years between adoption and entry into force; the FCTC protocol on illicit trade took six years, probably reflecting its complexity and demands at national level, but the FCTC took only 21 months. A related consideration for the credibility of the treaty will be the attitude of key states, whether and how quickly they will ratify it and whether they will actively oppose it should they choose to remain outside it. A device occasionally used when it is urgent to start applying a treaty is the so-called “provisional application”, whereby contracting parties indicate in the treaty itself or in a separate act (e.g. the WHA resolution adopting a treaty) that they will provisionally implement the treaty pending its entry into force. A classic but atypical example is the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), provisionally applied from 1947 until 1995. I mention this for the sake of completeness, but it is not a common arrangement for self-intuitive sovereignty concerns. Most of the foregoing considerations also apply to the negotiation and conclusion of protocols to the treaty, should it be drafted as a framework convention requiring separate instruments to spell out its obligations. Albeit linked organically to the “mother convention”, protocols are separate treaties in their own right. Certain steps of the negotiations will probably go faster than for the original convention since the latter provides an applicable legal framework. However, the experience of the FCTC protocol – 10 years from beginning of negotiations to entry into force and only 63 parties so far – should induce caution and deter over-optimism about “quick wins” or “low-hanging fruits.” Strategic reflection is required on whether to make the implementation of a possible pandemic treaty depend heavily on the conclusion of separate protocols. A comparison of the processes required for the creation of a pandemic treaty and revising the International Health Regulations. Amending the International Health Regulations – what is similar or different? The step-by-step process for amending the IHR is spelled out in Article 55. Amendments can be proposed by any state party or the WHO Director-General (DG). Given the direction that the WGPR seems to be taking, it is likely that any amendment process will be launched directly by the Assembly, thus shortening this initial step. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen, and been controversial within WHO, well before the COVID-19 pandemic. With the exception of a highly-technical 2014 amendment extending the recognised lifetime of yellow fever vaccines, successive IHR Review Committees [expert bodies appointed by the WHO DG] have advised against amendments, and the WHO Secretariat has also traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. This is due partly to the perceived risk of opening up the entire Regulations to unpredictable and potentially counterproductive revisions that may end up decreasing their credibility and effectiveness. This concern is understandable and legitimate, but, firstly, it applies to any legislative instrument where the risk of unforeseeable outcomes has to be weighed against the need to improve its design and content. Secondly, the WHA can narrow the scope of the amendments by instructing the negotiating body to only deal with specific issues. While this conditionality is infrequent and probably undesirable in the case of treaties, it would be more plausible with regard to the IHR since the Assembly is their parent body and exercises direct oversight functions over them. Similar procedural considerations – but requiring a less steep “learning curve” Most of the procedural considerations involved in the negotiation of a pandemic treaty would apply mutatis mutandis to the amendment of the IHR – and thus are not repeated here. A possible difference concerns the preparatory work preceding and leading to an initial draft of the amendments. The learning curve for a pandemic treaty could be steeper and longer given the absence of an intergovernmental discussion thus far and the lack of familiarity of many delegations. The IHR and its complexities are better known to the public health and foreign affairs officials following WHO affairs, and it is likely that delegations may be willing to move quickly into drafting and negotiations. IHR-specific requirements Article 50 of the IHR provides that the Review Committee shall “make technical recommendations to the Director-General regarding amendments to these Regulations.” The main consideration, time-wise, is whether involving the Review Committee is a compulsory step, since the procedural requirements in the IHR and the way in which they have been implemented by the secretariat so far, are formal and cumbersome and may lead to delays. The second and related consideration is at which stage of the amendment process would the Review Committee intervene? Would it make its recommendations before amendments are drafted, on an initial draft, or rather towards the end of the process? The political implications of those different approaches for the negotiations may be considerable. There are few precedents from which lessons may be learned. The IHR have been amended only once, in 2014, adjusting the requirements for yellow fever vaccination required by some state parties (eg. India) for international travelers arriving from yellow-fever endemic countries (Annex 7). The amendment extended the validity of a well-accepted vaccine from 10 years to lifetime in line with new evidence about the vaccine’s efficacy. An IHR Review Committee was not created for that occasion, setting a precedent. At the same time, the yellow fever vaccine amendment was limited and very technical. It was recommended by the Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on immunization, a dedicated expert group convened by the WHO secretariat, and the WHO Executive Board proposed the amendment to the WHA. In contrast, a broad and substantial amendment of multiple, substantive provisions of the IHR, which might cover sensitive issues around the early warning of outbreaks and WHO’s mandate to investigate and enforce IHR provisions, may be seen as something different legally and politically – warranting the creation of an IHR Review Committee. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen but the WHO Secretariat has traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. The main legal consideration is that the Review Committee is an expert body providing its recommendations to the DG at his request rather than a governance organ partaking of the normative functions of WHO. There can be situations like the one just mentioned, in which that technical input is not necessary or can be provided through different and less time-consuming channels. Moreover, a process initiated by the Executive Board or the WHA is different from a proposal by a member state or the DG. In my view, convening a Review Committee may be politically but not legally necessary. It is indicative in this connection that Article 55 does not mention the Review Committee, which suggests that its participation is not compulsory. Adoption of the amendments and entry into force Article 55 requires that amendments be communicated to state parties at least four months before the opening of the WHA, which may influence the schedule of the negotiating body. As noted above, consensus is the norm in WHO, and that will apply to the adoption of the amendments. In the unlikely event of formal objections, a vote would require a simple majority instead of the two-thirds required for a treaty. The main difference between a pandemic treaty and amendments to the IHR concerns entry into force. Pursuant to Article 22 of the Constitution and Article 59 of the IHR, the latter enter into force for all member states 24 months after the DG’s notification of adoption, except for those member states that either reject the amendments or file a reservation within 18 months from that notification. In case of a reservation, Article 62 provides for a rather complex process to determine whether the reservation is compatible with the object and purpose of the Regulations and can be accepted. The Article 62 procedure makes it very difficult in practice to reject a reservation and, historically, the sole objection that I am aware of was by Australia to the 1969 version of the IHR. Opting out of a regulation (or amendments thereof) is a drastic, highly visible and politically heavy decision that states would probably take only for the most serious reasons. Still, both rejections and successful reservations are possible and would undesirably fragment what should be instead a uniform legal and coordinating framework to achieve global health security. Objections could also create impossibly complex situations, e.g. in case of amendments changing the functions of WHO, because objecting states would remain bound by the different functions enshrined in the original IHR. For these reasons and as noted above with regard to a pandemic treaty, the inclusiveness, fairness and legitimacy of the process are of crucial importance to keep states in the fold even if they are not entirely satisfied of the outcome. Conclusions – both exercises can be more or less difficult, depending on the political atmosphere Among the preliminary conclusions that can be drawn is the fact that the two processes, when compared side-by-side, would be substantially similar. However there are some significant differences which will need careful consideration as well. Significantly, amending the IHR may be faster because: 1) modifying an existing text is presumably easier than negotiating one from scratch, 2) the WHA can define and narrow the scope and purpose of the amendments, and 3) WHO member states are relatively familiar with the Regulations. The need to consult the Review Committee, however, must be clarified – as well as what this might mean for achieving consensus. The timeline for entry into force of a treaty or any IHR amendments may be similar for either of the two options, but the amendments to the IHR would enter into force for all 196 WHO member states. In the case of a new treaty, a subset of countries will be bound by it once it enters into force, but the timeline for all WHO member states to ratify such a new instrument could be much more protracted – and remains unknown. Politically, both exercises can be more or less difficult depending on the political atmosphere, the proposals on the table, the ability of the bureau to build consensus and the myriad other factors characterizing any major multilateral negotiation. In both processes, there is great importance in reaching a real and sustainable consensus. At the same time, joining consensus in the WHA to adopt a pandemic treaty is not necessarily predictive of future ratifications since governments as well as circumstances may change. In both cases, finally, it will be important to maintain momentum but avoid imposing unrealistic timelines for the negotiations. The Independent Panel’s call for concluding a pandemic treaty in six months is an example of an unrealistic goal in this connection. Opting into a treaty requires political will and action, which can be highly appealing to politicians. On the other hand, remaining bound by a revised IHR could also be the positive outcome of political inertia and inaction – that is a country’s reluctance to be seen as opting out. The key questions are what is more politically feasible, and what will build more genuine, sustained political commitment to any improved set of international rules that aim to better govern future outbreaks and reduce pandemic risks. Gian Luca Burci is adjunct professor of international law at the Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies. His areas of expertise are global health law and governance, global health security and the law and practice of international organizations. Between 2005 and 2016 he was Legal Counsel of WHO. Updated on 07.10.2021 with a description of the 2014 IHR amendment on requirements around yellow fever vaccines. Image Credits: Flickr – Guilhem Vellut, Flickr – US Mission Geneva, WHO / Antoine Tardy, WHO, Gian Luca Burci, Wikimedia Commons. Tuberculosis is Here to Stay if We Don’t Mobilise Resources for Diagnoses and Double Fundings, New Data Shows 01/10/2021 Aishwarya Tendolkar Global efforts to eliminate TB have been set back by the COVID-19 pandemic. The COVID-19 pandemic and the consequent diversion of resources toward battling SARS-CoV2 has also set back global efforts to eliminate the world’s second most deadly infectious killer: Tuberculosis, by 2030. Only a doubling of investments next year can pave the way to attainment of the 2030 United Nations Sustainable Development Goals to eliminate the disease, experts and panelists at the Stop TB Partnership said Tuesday. The panel session coincided with the release of new data from a study conducted by the Stop TB Partnership that showed COVID’s impact on TB response this year continues to be as devastating as last year, with 1.2 million fewer people projected to be diagnosed and treated for TB this year, in comparison with 2019. The new estimates, developed in collaboration with USAID, Johns Hopkins University, Avenir Health and Imperial College, are based on data from 27 countries that account for 75 percent of the global TB caseload. That means TB investments for this coming year need to be doubled, in order to meet a 2018-2022 target for diagnosing and treating 40 million people (or 10 million a year), within that four year time frame, the Partnership says. TB kills 4,000 people a day The airborne disease still kills 4,000 people every day, with nearly a quarter of the world’s population estimated to have been infected. Despite being curable and preventable, only an estimated 5.7 million people received treatment for TB in 2020, a decline of 21 percent from the previous year—leaving an estimated 4.3 million people with untreated TB and implying all but certain death for probably half that number, the report showed. A lack of attention to the disease, lack of funding, and a dearth of proper diagnostic tools are responsible, Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership said at a Stop TB briefing Tuesday. “COVID showed that if the government and people are scared, money is not an issue. We are in the middle of a disaster but our attention seems to be in a very wrong place.” Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership. The “orphan disease” does not receive political priority or funding, Obiefuna Austin Arinze, Executive Director of Afro Global Alliance and incoming Vice-Chair of the Stop TB Partnership Board said. At current levels of funding, the world will miss the target set by the United National High-Level Meeting on TB that took place in 2018 for diagnosing and treating 40 million people with TB by 2022. With just 400 days to reach 2022 goals, the diagnostic figure is even more grim for children with TB, Ditiu said. However, with mobilisation of resources – including funding, digital diagnostics and more government-sponsored community interventions – the world could reach the target’s 90% mark – treating some 36 million people, Ditiu said. Annual resource needs and available funding for TB in USD. So why is investing in TB diagnosis and elimination imperative? In simple words, it saves more lives than you would think. “Investing an extra dollar in TB is one of the best dollars spent to help the world,” Dr Bjorn Lomborg, President of the Danish think tank, Copenhagen Consensus, said at the teleconference. According to him, it would only cost US$8.1 billion dollars annually, between now and 2030, to eliminate TB. This investment translates to benefits worth US$348 billion dollars, pegging the benefit-cost ratio at 43. This means that every dollar invested in TB prevention and care yields a return of US$43. But currently, only US$6.5 billion is available annually for TB response globally. Moreover, TB funding has stagnated over the last five years – meaning there are big gaps that need to be overcome now. That’s why, at the UNHLM on TB in 2018, states and non-state actors pledged to commit a total of US$13 billion annually until 2022 to overcome past shortfalls – unfortunately COVID intervened the following year and those pledges were not honored. Some US$13 billion in funding is needed for TB care and prevention per year. TB is traditionally a low GF funding priority – despite a high dependency on Global Fund services in LMICs Despite being curable, preventable, and easily diagnosable, TB sees more deaths (over 1 million annually) than HIV/AIDS and Malaria combined. At the same time, The Global Fund channels only 18 percent of its resources to TB diagnosis and treatment. The remaining 82% is invested in fighting HIV/AIDS, malaria, and more recently, COVID-19 tests and treatments. Although 85% of national TB budgets, on average, are financed by low- and middle-income countries themselves, they remain highly dependent on the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria to fill vital gaps in services. And that adds weight to the Global Fund’s appeals, panelists pointed out. In terms of how those funds should be spent, the World Health Organisation along with the UN Secretary General have outlined priority recommendations to ramp up the TB response, Tereza Kasaeva, Director of WHO’s Global TB Programme said. “Efforts need to be intensified to make these recommendations a reality.” Diagnosis still reliant on less accurate sputum smear microscopy According to WHO, the diagnosis of TB and drug-resistant TB remains a challenge with one-third of people with TB and two-thirds of people with drug-resistant TB not being detected globally. While WHO recommends highly accurate rapid molecular assays as the initial test to diagnose TB, less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool. Only 28 percent of people were diagnosed with MTB using a rapid molecular test in 2019, Ditiu said. This means that nearly three quarters of diagnoses are done using the “clinical” smear microscopy. Smear microscopy, while cost-effective, has a poor track record in diagnosing extra-pulmonary tuberculosis, paediatric tuberculosis, and TB in patients co-infected with HIV and tuberculosis, a paper pointed. “Why don’t we allow people proper diagnostic tools?” she asked, pointing out that an untreated person with TB can transmit the bacteria to nearly 15 people every year. “Now think about this in countries like India with a population of 1.2 billion.” Less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool for TB, despite the existence of highly accurate rapid molecular assays. COVID devastated TB diagnostics To make matters worse, the COVID-19 pandemic devastated the diagnostics investments in TB – whereby existing resources were diverted, and tools like the highly accurate GeneXpert molecular diagnostic platforms were repurposed to diagnose COVID, in the pandemic’s early days. Since then, new rapid COVID diagnostic tests have become widely available, but there has been no significant recovery plan for TB diagnostics put into place, Obiefuna said. The COVID-19 pandemic was not the first time that the health infrastructure for TB was used to tackle other health crises, and particularly those related to airborne diseases, pointed out Cheri Vincent, Chief of USAID’s TB Division, at the meeting. “We saw it [being diverted] for Ebola and airborne influenza,” she said, adding, “If we can’t solve TB, we can’t solve the next airborne pandemic,” she highlighted. In fact, TB doctors were the first to be diverted to tackle the COVID-19 breakout, Ditiu said. The Zambia story, and what it teaches us But not all has been downhill in the fight against TB. Zambia offers an example of a country that has been able to sustain its TB programmes through a combination of domestic funding, government-community partnerships, and diagnostic tools – despite the COVID pandemic. It can provide inspiration for countries battling both diseases at the same time. Already today, Zambia has achieved 89% of its 2022 UNHLM diagnosis and treatment target. Over the past five years, the country invested US$45 million of domestic resources in TB response. “[TB] commodity security is key to achieving our goals,” said Dr. Patrick Lungu, National TB and Leprosy Control Program Manager in Zambia. A ‘TB Situation room’ was created to review TB programmes on a weekly basis to identify issues that may be negatively impacting performance. “We were able to offer more technical support to different levels of the health system – which translates to Zambia envisaging to achieve the UNHLM target in at least two-three key indicators,” Lungu said. Zambia has achieved nearly 89 percent of its UNHLM target so far. Will India achieve its ambitious 2025 TB elimination target? When it comes to countries like India – which bears the heaviest TB burden in the world, the pandemic has slowed-down and diverted efforts to eliminate elimination of TB by 2025 -a huge goal set by the government. According to the Indian Health Ministry’s 2021 Annual Report on Tuberculosis Elimination, reports and notification of confirmed TB diagnoses tumbled 38 percent in March-April 2020 owing to the lockdown. Furthermore, a majority of the country’s TB elimination resources were repurposed for Covid-19. Then just as services were beginning to recoup, a massive second COVID wave hit the country in spring 2021; it remains unclear what dents that made in the progress India had seen toward the end of 2020. In its 2021 official report, the Indian Health Ministry nonetheless suggested that the dedicated Infectious disease hospitals that were established for Covid will contribute “significantly” to future TB Care and management. Despite being scheduled to be a part of Tuesday’s Stop TB Partnership panel, the Indian Health Ministry did not make an appearance – leaving a lack of clarity on trends and progress in 2021. But on a global level, the warning signs are clear. Says Ditui: “we have erased 10-12 years of progress, and are back to 2010-11 levels of TB detection and cases. This becomes all the more alarming with the fact that TB is not a new disease but one that has been around for decades, and has a vaccine. One can only hope that TB receives the undivided effort it needs to be eliminated.” Image Credits: The Global Fund / Evgeny Maloletka, Stop TB Partnership, Dr. Patrick Lungu. Posts navigation Older postsNewer posts This site uses cookies to help give you the best experience on our website. Cookies enable us to collect information that helps us personalise your experience and improve the functionality and performance of our site. By continuing to read our website, we assume you agree to this, otherwise you can adjust your browser settings. Please read our cookie and Privacy Policy. Our Cookies and Privacy Policy Loading Comments... You must be logged in to post a comment.
African Countries are the Focus of New Maternal Mortality Targets 05/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan UNFPA Executive Director Dr Natalia Kanem Nineteen countries have been prioritised for support to implement new global targets aimed at preventing maternal and newborn deaths. This emerged at the launch on Tuesday of the new targets, which were developed by the World Health Organization (WHO), UN Population Fund (UNFPA) and their partners in the Ending Preventable Maternal Mortality (EPMM) initiative. UNFPA Executive Director Dr Natalia Kanem said that while the global community had committed to reducing the global maternal mortality rates to 70 deaths per 100,000 live births by 2030 as part of the sustainable development goals (SDG), it was not moving fast enough. “If the current pace prevails, we will not reach this goal before 2065,” said Kanem. “This is a wake-up call for us to urgently scale up and accelerate our efforts with less than 10 years to go.” Fourteen of the chosen countries are in Africa and include Chad, which has one of the highest maternal mortality rates in the world, as well as Nigeria and Ethiopia. The five non-African countries are Afghanistan, Pakistan, Mexico, Nepal and Laos. The 19 priority countries identified for action against maternal mortality. The 19 countries will get support to implement and monitor the targets, according to the UN agency officials. There are five targets: 90% pregnant women to attend four or more antenatal care visits (towards increasing to eight visits by 2030); 90% of births to be attended by skilled health personnel; 80% of women who have just given birth to access postnatal care within two days of delivery; 60% of the population to have access to emergency obstetric care within two hours of travel time; 65% of women to be able to make informed and empowered decisions regarding sexual relations, contraceptive use, and their reproductive health. Country selection involved a number of factors including a high burden of maternal deaths and stillbirths, the strength of country midwifery and whether there were partners to support the ministries of health, according to World Health Organization’s (WHO) Dr Anshu Banerjee, Director for Maternal, Child and Adolescent Health and Ageing. Preventable deaths Addressing the launch, WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus said that around 295,000 women died each year due to complications of pregnancy and childbirth, and there were two million stillbirths and 2.4 million newborn deaths annually. “Most of these deaths are in low and middle-income countries,” said Tedros. “Most of these [deaths] could have been prevented with quality pre- and post-natal care and birthing assistance from competent maternal and newborn health professionals,” said Tedros. “The COVID 19 pandemic has badly disrupted essential health services around the world, including for maternal and newborn care. WHO is supporting countries to resume these services regardless of a woman’s COVID-19 status,” he added. Most maternal deaths are preventable with the right care at the right time. Women must get access to healthcare, and this care must: ✅ be of high quality. ✅ meet the needs of families ✅ treat them with dignity and respect. https://t.co/DhTF3jxQB0 pic.twitter.com/TNqBsiyyfx — World Health Organization (WHO) (@WHO) October 5, 2021 In 2017, the global maternal mortality ratio was around 211 maternal deaths per 100,000 live births, which was a 38% reduction compared to 2000 – a reduction of around 2,9% per year. “Universal health coverage, including universal access to sexual and reproductive health care, will be key to providing equitable access to quality maternal health services,” said Kanem. Kanem said that her agency, the WHO and partners are “committed to helping countries achieve coverage targets by implementing action-oriented plans, and by tracking progress at the national and sub-national levels”. She stressed that the targets “also incorporate key determinants of maternal health, including a woman’s ability to make decisions about her own sexual and reproductive health”. The SDG 3.1 sets out that by 2030, the global maternal mortality ratio (MMR) should be reduced to less than 70 per 100,000 live births, and no country should have an MMR more than 140 per 100,000 live births. “The latest estimates are 211 per 100,000 live births – but increasing to 415 on average in the poorest countries,” according to the WHO. Pfizer Vaccine Effective Against COVID-19 Hospitalizations for All Variants 05/10/2021 Raisa Santos Two jabs of the Pfizer-BioNTech vaccine are 90% effective against COVID-19 hospitalizations for all variants including Delta, for at least 6 months, confirmed a new study published by The Lancet. The study, conducted by Kaiser Permanete and Pfizer, found that while effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, effectiveness against hospitalizations remains at 90% overall for all variants. “Our study confirms that vaccines are a critical tool for controlling the pandemic and remain highly effective in preventing severe disease and hospitalization, including from the delta and other variants of concern. Protection against infection does decline in the months following a second dose,” said lead author of the study Dr Sara Tartof, of Kaiser Permanente. The study analyzed 3,436,957 electronic health records from the Kaiser Permanente Southern California (KPSC) health system between 4 December 2020 and 8 August 2021 to assess the effectiveness of the Pfizer vaccine against COVID-19 infections and related hospitalizations. Immunity declines after six months In addition, the study also found that effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, falling from 88% within one month after receiving two doses to 47% after six months, underscoring the importance of improving vaccination rates worldwide. Researchers did not observe a difference in waning between variants. While this does provide evidence towards waning immunity against COVID-19, the CDC has called for additional research to determine which groups should be prioritized to receive booster shots. “In line with the recent FDA [3] and CDC recommendations [4], considerations for booster shots should take global COVID-19 vaccine supply into account as people in many countries around the world have not yet received a primary vaccination series,” said Tartof. Vaccine equity and booster shots have prompted increasing debate in recent weeks, with WHO calling for a global moratorium on COVID-19 boosters to be extended until the end of the year, and global health advocates protesting “vaccine apartheid” outside the UN during the General Assembly last month. US and Israeli studies find similar reductions in immunity Other findings from the US Centers for Disease Control (CDC) and the Israeli Ministry of Health had also found reductions of immunity from the Pfizer vaccine after six months. The Israeli findings reported that people over age 60 who received a third dose of the Pfizer vaccine were five times less likely to become severely ill if they had their first shot at least five months earlier. These results in particular were regarded as a critical factor in the recommendation from the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) to amend its emergency use authorization (EUA) last month for the Pfizer vaccine. The FDA now recommends a single booster dose to be administered at least six months after completion for: individuals 65 and older; individuals 18 through 64 at high risk of severe COVID-19; and individuals 18 through 64 with increased exposure of SARS-CoV-2 that puts them at high risk of health complications relating to COVID-19. Image Credits: International Monetary Fund/Ernesto Benavides. Indian Generic Companies Are Ready to Make Merck’s COVID-19 Antiviral Pill 04/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Molnupiravir could make a significant difference to the global response to COVID-19. Indian generic drug manufacturers are poised to make the antiviral pill, molnupiravir, which halved hospitalisations in a trial of high-risk people with COVID-19. Merck, which developed molnupiravir in collaboration with Ridgeback Biotherapeutics, has awarded non-exclusive, voluntary licensing agreements to eight generic companies in India since April in anticipation of positive trial results. According to Merck, it has been producing molnupiravir “at risk” and expects to produce 10 million courses of treatment by the end of 2021, the company said a media release last Friday. Merck cut short the trial of molnupiravir in the light of the good results, and will make an application for emergency use authorisation (EUA) with the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA), “as soon as possible”, the company said. It will also submit “marketing applications to other regulatory bodies worldwide”, it added. Australia’s Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) granted provisional determination for molnupiravir in August. Meanwhile, in anticipation of regulatory approval, the Access to COVID-19 Tools (ACT) Accelerator is working to “secure volumes” of the pills for people in LMICs, according to ACT-Accelerator partner Unitaid. “Effective, simple to use, oral treatments that can avert the progression to severe illness are exactly the kind of breakthroughs we need to get the pandemic under control. Deployed alongside vaccines, such medicines could drive down hospitalizations and deaths due to COVID-19,” said Dr Philippe Duneton, Executive Director of Unitaid shortly after the Merck announcement. Few treatment options At present, there are very few treatment options for people infected with COVID-19, and those that exist – such as remdesivir and dexamethasone – are expensive, given intravenously or by injections and only for severely ill people already in hospital. White House medical adviser Dr Anthony Fauci told CNN on Sunday that the medicine was “extremely important”. “It’s a pill that’s given by mouth, so you don’t need anything special other than taking a pill the way you take any pill. And the results are really quite impressive,” said Fauci. However, he said that it only halved the risk of hospitalisation and to cut this risk by 100% people should “not get infected in the first place”. Back in April, Merck entered into voluntary licensing agreements with five Indian companies – Cipla, Dr Reddy’s Laboratories, Emcure Pharmaceuticals, Hetero Labs and Sun Pharmaceutical Industries. All are World Health Organization (WHO) pre-qualified manufacturing facilities. It has since licensed Aurobindo Pharma, Torrent Pharmaceuticals, and Viatris, to manufacture the drug. At least four of the companies are already manufacturing generic molnupirvir, which they have been supplying to a trial in India and all eight are ready for global supply, according to MSD India. When it announced the licensing back in April, Merck said the intention was to enable the manufacturers to “supply molnupiravir to India and more than 100 low and middle-income countries (LMICs)”. No deaths in trial The molnupiravir trial involved 775 unvaccinated adults with mild-to-moderate COVID-19 with at least one risk factor for serious illness – most commonly, obesity, being over the age of 60, and living with diabetes and heart disease. Only 7,3% of those taking molnupiravir ended up in hospital in comparison to 14,1% of those on the placebo, announced Merck (known as MSD outside the US and Canada) in a media release last Friday. “Twenty-nine days into the trial, no deaths were reported in patients who received molnupiravir, as compared to eight deaths in patients who received placebo,” it added. The trial was conducted globally, including at sites in Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Egypt, France, Germany, Guatemala, Israel, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Philippines, Poland, Russia, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Taiwan, Ukraine, the United Kingdom and the US. Meanwhile, in June the US government ordered approximately 1.7 million courses of molnupiravir at a cost of $1.2 billion – about $700/patient – according to a June media release from Merck. However, this price is equal to about 35 times the estimated sustainable generic price using current market prices for the active pharmaceutical ingredients (API), according to Melissa J Barber from Harvard University’s Department of Global Health and Population and Dzintars Gotham from King’s College Hospital in London. “Assuming optimization of molnupiravir synthesis, and a resulting drop in API cost, the US price would be equal to about 161 times the estimated sustainable generic price,” the two researchers noted in a brief published last Friday. They identified that three companies appeared to be exporting API for molnupiravir – Optimus Drugs Private, Honour Lab, and Maithri Laboratories. Meanwhile, Pfizer and Roche are also racing to develop an antiviral pill for COVID-19, according to Reuters. A New Pandemic Treaty, Revised International Health Regulations, or Both? What is the Actual Roadmap? 02/10/2021 Gian Luca Burci WHO Headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland. The World Health Assembly is set to make a fateful decision in November over whether to negotiate a new international ‘Pandemic Treaty’ to improve future pandemic preparedness and response. However, major players like the United States, backed by some civil society groups, have suggested that revisions of the existing International Health Regulations (IHR) would be a better path. Amidst the hyperbole of oft-heated debate over which route might be easier, quicker or more effective, it’s important to understand that either option will require careful, systematic planning and execution of a process that is oft-misunderstood. At the same time, there are some important technical points that must be kept in mind. WHA agreement to adopt a Pandemic Treaty may have a much more sweeping historical sense, than mere revisions of the existing IHR. But a new treaty will only be enforceable among those member states that have ratified it in what is typically a prolonged process – while any IHR revisions that are agreed to would be applicable to all 196 WHO member states immediately. Ultimately, it is reaching political consensus on the often-charged content of proposed treaty/IHR reforms that matters the most. But to do that, the process also needs careful consideration – and demystification. WHO former legal counsel Gian Luca Burci, Adjunct Professor of international law at the Geneva Graduate Institute, takes apart the procedural issues, and what they mean, ahead of the third working group meeting of member states on the issue, next week. Pandemic Treaty or IHR revisions – exploring the pathways & process In May, the World Health Assembly tasked a Member States’ working group with the critical mission of assessing “the benefits of developing a WHO convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” The Working Group on Strengthening WHO Preparedness and Response to Health Emergencies (WGPR) is now tasked with coming up with a recommendation in time for a WHA special session in November on whether the WHA should establish an intergovernmental process “to draft and negotiate such a convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” Just two months from the deadline, we understand that discussions in the WGPR are moving towards negotiating a new “pandemic treaty” and revising the International Health Regulations (IHR) in parallel after the November WHA – rather than forcing a choice between them. While this would be a welcome compromise, there seems to be some confusion, as well as contradictory positions, about the procedural steps required to pursue either option. Debate is particularly intense over the question of whether amending the IHR or concluding a treaty would be “easier and quicker,” and which option would incentivize more participation and commitment. While the process will eventually depend on a number of, as yet, unpredictable factors, international law and practice point to some likely steps and procedural requirements, which are reviewed here. This is without reference to the potential content of a pandemic treaty or amended IHR – closely related to questions of speed and difficulty of negotiations. This review also does not purport to be exhaustive; more information can be found in the Geneva Graduate Institute’s “Guide to a Pandemic Treaty.” Pandemic Treaty – from negotiation to adoption, ratification & entry into force Launch of the negotiating process Under Article 19 of the WHO Constitution, the WHA can adopt “conventions or agreements with respect to any matter within the competence of the Organization.” The process leading up to a WHO treaty (“treaty,” “convention,” “agreement” are different denominations but do not change the substance) would therefore be launched by a WHA resolution. The resolution could shape negotiations, for example by requesting that certain issues be included in the treaty or given priority. However, that level of prescriptiveness is infrequent in contemporary treaty practice to leave flexibility to the negotiators. Negotiating forum The Health Assembly would establish a dedicated intergovernmental body open to all WHO member states to draft and negotiate the future convention. This step can be articulated in many different ways and there is no single model in international practice. In the case of the WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control (FCTC), for example, the process was subdivided into two parts: 1) a working group was firstly established to discuss possible building blocks of the convention before committing to treaty negotiations and 2) after a green light from WHA, an intergovernmental negotiating body was established. However, in many other cases, a single body (labelled for example an “intergovernmental negotiating committee”) was responsible for the whole preparation and negotiation of the treaty. This occurred, for example, with the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) and later its Kyoto Protocol. WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus delivering the closing speech for the 72nd World Health Assembly in 2019, prior to the COVID-19 pandemic. Negotiating bodies of this nature are invariably open to participation by all member states. In addition, the European Union is a likely invitee with full rights of participation under the rubric of “regional economic integration organizations” (a category that so far includes only the EU). And indeed the EU has already been one of the most vocal advocates of a pandemic treaty. Participation of other non-state actors Beyond member states and possibly the EU, one can expect participation to be extended to other actors identified in the 2016 Framework of Engagement with Non-State Actors, most importantly NGOs, international business associations and philanthropic foundations (the fourth group, academic institutions, are not entitled to participate but are sometimes invited ad hoc as experts). All these actors would participate as “observers” with limited privileges, rather than full negotiators. For example, they usually can only participate in public meetings but are excluded from closed negotiating sessions that often prevail at crucial stages of the process. However, what matters is physical presence at the negotiations to lobby and brief delegates and network with like-minded organizations. Unlike more technical questions such as “one health” and access to pathogen samples, we can expect substantial civil society mobilization and lobbying behind issues such as equity, human rights and access to countermeasures. These considerations are especially relevant if negotiations resume in person; if the sanitary situation still requires online meetings, the process will have to be adapted and the recent sessions of the WHA and the Executive Board offer a blueprint for that. Virtual negotiations of course are less than ideal for all participants. Methods of work – geopolitical representation and the demands of consensus decision-making The body or bodies established by the WHA will have to elect their officers, typically following WHO’s breakdown into six regions. The Assembly can prescribe the make-up of the bureau, as in the case of the WGPR. Appointing the bureau can be a delicate process depending on geopolitical circumstances or competing ambitions. The role of the bureau is not cast in stone but can be decisive for the progress and outcome of work, in particular by working informally behind the scenes to explore options and foster consensus. The bodies concerned will operate under the WHA rules of procedure, but in practice they enjoy considerable discretion in organizing their work. It is customary, and practically a dogma within WHO, that decisions be only taken by consensus without a formal vote. This increases the importance of the process that has to be perceived as fair, legitimate and inclusive to lead to a result that is at least not unacceptable to any state. The requirement of consensus decision-making carries a lot of inertia all the way to the WHA; even though any state can break consensus by formally objecting and requesting a vote, it is in fact a heavy responsibility to do so and it hardly ever happens. Negotiations of long and complex instruments usually require dividing the text, or particularly difficult issues, among subcommittees that work in parallel, formally report to the plenary on their progress and are often coordinated by the bureau. Small delegations have understandable difficulties in managing multiple meetings, and there is an established practice within WHO to avoid more than two parallel meetings. Available UN-system practice, however, shows much flexibility to adapt the organization of work and the mix of formal and informal meetings. Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, WHO Director General, discussing a pandemic treaty in September 2021. Complex WHO intergovernmental negotiations have often been supplemented by intersessional consultations, either on a regional basis or on specific topics. Regional consultations can be particularly effective in reaching common positions and strengthening the negotiating leverage of groups of countries that could otherwise be overpowered individually. Duration and frequency of negotiations are difficult to predict The duration and frequency of treaty negotiations are difficult to predict. The duration of negotiations will depend on a number of factors including the complexity of the issues at hand, the attitude of key countries, the sense of urgency, the diplomatic ability of the bureau, and the intended outcome. A general “framework convention” without detailed and highly prescriptive obligations may be relatively quicker to achieve, but practice shows that even negotiating such instruments requires on average no less than two years. By way of reference, negotiating the UNFCCC took about two years, the FCTC took three years and six negotiating sessions, while its protocol on illicit trade took four years and five sessions. In contrast, negotiating the two IAEA conventions concluded on the heels of the 1986 Chernobyl nuclear accident took just a few months. It is common for the responsible governing body, in our case the WHA, to request progress reports and set a deadline for the conclusion of the negotiations. Even though there are no draconian consequences for not meeting it, it helps focus the negotiations and keep momentum. The frequency of formal meetings usually depends on available financial resources, the capacity of delegations and the secretariat to manage the workload and the calendar of other intergovernmental meetings. One can usually expect no more than two negotiating sessions of 1-2 weeks per year as a maximum. How to get to the initial draft? The initial draft of the treaty is politically and psychologically very important because it inevitably shapes the dynamics of the subsequent negotiations, even for countries opposing it. Even though it is possible for one or more states to come forward with a zero draft text, this is a relatively uncommon step because questions about the motives of the proposing states could affect or derail negotiations. The responsibility to propose a full zero draft therefore can either fall on the chair of the negotiating body (e.g. the FCTC), on the secretariat (e.g. the revised IHR, or in the environmental field the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, drafted by the UNEP Secretariat). An important point in this regard is that a zero draft does not come out of thin air, but is the result of previous consultations or preparatory work. In the case of the IHR, the draft proposed by the secretariat was the culmination of many years of technical work and consultations, thus the text was submitted promptly to negotiations after a round of regional consultations. In the case of the pandemic treaty, so far there has been no real open discussion on its scope and content either in the WHA or the WGPR, and it is unlikely that this will occur before the WHA special session. Consequently, it is foreseeable that the body established by the WHA will devote an initial period to discuss or seek expert input on the possible building blocks of a treaty and their challenges and implications. Given the uncertainties and questions surrounding the recent proposals, it would be counterproductive to try to short-circuit an inclusive and bottom-up process for achieving a quick result at all costs. Adoption of the treaty and next steps The final draft text would be submitted to the WHA for consideration. As noted above, the Assembly will almost certainly adopt the treaty by consensus. In the unlikely event where consensus could not be reached, Article 19 of the Constitution requires a two-thirds majority (calculated on the basis of valid votes excluding abstentions). The virtual World Health Assembly nerve center at WHO’s Geneva headquarters in May 2020. The upcoming WHA Special Session will likely take a similar form. Other steps that can be taken by the WHA will depend on the nature of the treaty and the conclusions of the negotiations. A pandemic treaty will in all probability be a normative instrument establishing its own governance. Relying on precedents including the FCTC, this will include at a minimum a conference of the parties and a secretariat. Initial work on the institutional aspects will require drafting rules of procedure for the conference of the parties and, depending on the institutional arrangements contained in the treaty, financial regulations and a budget. Even though a treaty is a self-contained instrument and its governance will not be part of WHO’s, the latter may end up providing or hosting its secretariat. For all these reasons, the WHA may establish upon the adoption of the treaty a new intergovernmental body to prepare all the foregoing steps and facilitate the work of the first session of the conference of the parties. Signature, ratification and entry into force Multilateral treaties are customarily opened for signature for a defined period of time. What matters for the entry into force of the treaty, however, is reaching the required number of ratifications (or adherence, accession, formal confirmation depending on the final clauses of the treaty) and how fast that will occur. The threshold for entry into force has varied wildly in previous treaties, anywhere between 20 and 60 as an average (it was 40 for the FCTC and its illicit trade protocol). The number agreed upon will in practice depend on a compromise between an early establishment of the new legal regime and the critical mass of states required to make it credible and effective. A review of UN-system treaties shows on average a time gap of between two and four years between adoption and entry into force; the FCTC protocol on illicit trade took six years, probably reflecting its complexity and demands at national level, but the FCTC took only 21 months. A related consideration for the credibility of the treaty will be the attitude of key states, whether and how quickly they will ratify it and whether they will actively oppose it should they choose to remain outside it. A device occasionally used when it is urgent to start applying a treaty is the so-called “provisional application”, whereby contracting parties indicate in the treaty itself or in a separate act (e.g. the WHA resolution adopting a treaty) that they will provisionally implement the treaty pending its entry into force. A classic but atypical example is the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), provisionally applied from 1947 until 1995. I mention this for the sake of completeness, but it is not a common arrangement for self-intuitive sovereignty concerns. Most of the foregoing considerations also apply to the negotiation and conclusion of protocols to the treaty, should it be drafted as a framework convention requiring separate instruments to spell out its obligations. Albeit linked organically to the “mother convention”, protocols are separate treaties in their own right. Certain steps of the negotiations will probably go faster than for the original convention since the latter provides an applicable legal framework. However, the experience of the FCTC protocol – 10 years from beginning of negotiations to entry into force and only 63 parties so far – should induce caution and deter over-optimism about “quick wins” or “low-hanging fruits.” Strategic reflection is required on whether to make the implementation of a possible pandemic treaty depend heavily on the conclusion of separate protocols. A comparison of the processes required for the creation of a pandemic treaty and revising the International Health Regulations. Amending the International Health Regulations – what is similar or different? The step-by-step process for amending the IHR is spelled out in Article 55. Amendments can be proposed by any state party or the WHO Director-General (DG). Given the direction that the WGPR seems to be taking, it is likely that any amendment process will be launched directly by the Assembly, thus shortening this initial step. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen, and been controversial within WHO, well before the COVID-19 pandemic. With the exception of a highly-technical 2014 amendment extending the recognised lifetime of yellow fever vaccines, successive IHR Review Committees [expert bodies appointed by the WHO DG] have advised against amendments, and the WHO Secretariat has also traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. This is due partly to the perceived risk of opening up the entire Regulations to unpredictable and potentially counterproductive revisions that may end up decreasing their credibility and effectiveness. This concern is understandable and legitimate, but, firstly, it applies to any legislative instrument where the risk of unforeseeable outcomes has to be weighed against the need to improve its design and content. Secondly, the WHA can narrow the scope of the amendments by instructing the negotiating body to only deal with specific issues. While this conditionality is infrequent and probably undesirable in the case of treaties, it would be more plausible with regard to the IHR since the Assembly is their parent body and exercises direct oversight functions over them. Similar procedural considerations – but requiring a less steep “learning curve” Most of the procedural considerations involved in the negotiation of a pandemic treaty would apply mutatis mutandis to the amendment of the IHR – and thus are not repeated here. A possible difference concerns the preparatory work preceding and leading to an initial draft of the amendments. The learning curve for a pandemic treaty could be steeper and longer given the absence of an intergovernmental discussion thus far and the lack of familiarity of many delegations. The IHR and its complexities are better known to the public health and foreign affairs officials following WHO affairs, and it is likely that delegations may be willing to move quickly into drafting and negotiations. IHR-specific requirements Article 50 of the IHR provides that the Review Committee shall “make technical recommendations to the Director-General regarding amendments to these Regulations.” The main consideration, time-wise, is whether involving the Review Committee is a compulsory step, since the procedural requirements in the IHR and the way in which they have been implemented by the secretariat so far, are formal and cumbersome and may lead to delays. The second and related consideration is at which stage of the amendment process would the Review Committee intervene? Would it make its recommendations before amendments are drafted, on an initial draft, or rather towards the end of the process? The political implications of those different approaches for the negotiations may be considerable. There are few precedents from which lessons may be learned. The IHR have been amended only once, in 2014, adjusting the requirements for yellow fever vaccination required by some state parties (eg. India) for international travelers arriving from yellow-fever endemic countries (Annex 7). The amendment extended the validity of a well-accepted vaccine from 10 years to lifetime in line with new evidence about the vaccine’s efficacy. An IHR Review Committee was not created for that occasion, setting a precedent. At the same time, the yellow fever vaccine amendment was limited and very technical. It was recommended by the Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on immunization, a dedicated expert group convened by the WHO secretariat, and the WHO Executive Board proposed the amendment to the WHA. In contrast, a broad and substantial amendment of multiple, substantive provisions of the IHR, which might cover sensitive issues around the early warning of outbreaks and WHO’s mandate to investigate and enforce IHR provisions, may be seen as something different legally and politically – warranting the creation of an IHR Review Committee. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen but the WHO Secretariat has traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. The main legal consideration is that the Review Committee is an expert body providing its recommendations to the DG at his request rather than a governance organ partaking of the normative functions of WHO. There can be situations like the one just mentioned, in which that technical input is not necessary or can be provided through different and less time-consuming channels. Moreover, a process initiated by the Executive Board or the WHA is different from a proposal by a member state or the DG. In my view, convening a Review Committee may be politically but not legally necessary. It is indicative in this connection that Article 55 does not mention the Review Committee, which suggests that its participation is not compulsory. Adoption of the amendments and entry into force Article 55 requires that amendments be communicated to state parties at least four months before the opening of the WHA, which may influence the schedule of the negotiating body. As noted above, consensus is the norm in WHO, and that will apply to the adoption of the amendments. In the unlikely event of formal objections, a vote would require a simple majority instead of the two-thirds required for a treaty. The main difference between a pandemic treaty and amendments to the IHR concerns entry into force. Pursuant to Article 22 of the Constitution and Article 59 of the IHR, the latter enter into force for all member states 24 months after the DG’s notification of adoption, except for those member states that either reject the amendments or file a reservation within 18 months from that notification. In case of a reservation, Article 62 provides for a rather complex process to determine whether the reservation is compatible with the object and purpose of the Regulations and can be accepted. The Article 62 procedure makes it very difficult in practice to reject a reservation and, historically, the sole objection that I am aware of was by Australia to the 1969 version of the IHR. Opting out of a regulation (or amendments thereof) is a drastic, highly visible and politically heavy decision that states would probably take only for the most serious reasons. Still, both rejections and successful reservations are possible and would undesirably fragment what should be instead a uniform legal and coordinating framework to achieve global health security. Objections could also create impossibly complex situations, e.g. in case of amendments changing the functions of WHO, because objecting states would remain bound by the different functions enshrined in the original IHR. For these reasons and as noted above with regard to a pandemic treaty, the inclusiveness, fairness and legitimacy of the process are of crucial importance to keep states in the fold even if they are not entirely satisfied of the outcome. Conclusions – both exercises can be more or less difficult, depending on the political atmosphere Among the preliminary conclusions that can be drawn is the fact that the two processes, when compared side-by-side, would be substantially similar. However there are some significant differences which will need careful consideration as well. Significantly, amending the IHR may be faster because: 1) modifying an existing text is presumably easier than negotiating one from scratch, 2) the WHA can define and narrow the scope and purpose of the amendments, and 3) WHO member states are relatively familiar with the Regulations. The need to consult the Review Committee, however, must be clarified – as well as what this might mean for achieving consensus. The timeline for entry into force of a treaty or any IHR amendments may be similar for either of the two options, but the amendments to the IHR would enter into force for all 196 WHO member states. In the case of a new treaty, a subset of countries will be bound by it once it enters into force, but the timeline for all WHO member states to ratify such a new instrument could be much more protracted – and remains unknown. Politically, both exercises can be more or less difficult depending on the political atmosphere, the proposals on the table, the ability of the bureau to build consensus and the myriad other factors characterizing any major multilateral negotiation. In both processes, there is great importance in reaching a real and sustainable consensus. At the same time, joining consensus in the WHA to adopt a pandemic treaty is not necessarily predictive of future ratifications since governments as well as circumstances may change. In both cases, finally, it will be important to maintain momentum but avoid imposing unrealistic timelines for the negotiations. The Independent Panel’s call for concluding a pandemic treaty in six months is an example of an unrealistic goal in this connection. Opting into a treaty requires political will and action, which can be highly appealing to politicians. On the other hand, remaining bound by a revised IHR could also be the positive outcome of political inertia and inaction – that is a country’s reluctance to be seen as opting out. The key questions are what is more politically feasible, and what will build more genuine, sustained political commitment to any improved set of international rules that aim to better govern future outbreaks and reduce pandemic risks. Gian Luca Burci is adjunct professor of international law at the Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies. His areas of expertise are global health law and governance, global health security and the law and practice of international organizations. Between 2005 and 2016 he was Legal Counsel of WHO. Updated on 07.10.2021 with a description of the 2014 IHR amendment on requirements around yellow fever vaccines. Image Credits: Flickr – Guilhem Vellut, Flickr – US Mission Geneva, WHO / Antoine Tardy, WHO, Gian Luca Burci, Wikimedia Commons. Tuberculosis is Here to Stay if We Don’t Mobilise Resources for Diagnoses and Double Fundings, New Data Shows 01/10/2021 Aishwarya Tendolkar Global efforts to eliminate TB have been set back by the COVID-19 pandemic. The COVID-19 pandemic and the consequent diversion of resources toward battling SARS-CoV2 has also set back global efforts to eliminate the world’s second most deadly infectious killer: Tuberculosis, by 2030. Only a doubling of investments next year can pave the way to attainment of the 2030 United Nations Sustainable Development Goals to eliminate the disease, experts and panelists at the Stop TB Partnership said Tuesday. The panel session coincided with the release of new data from a study conducted by the Stop TB Partnership that showed COVID’s impact on TB response this year continues to be as devastating as last year, with 1.2 million fewer people projected to be diagnosed and treated for TB this year, in comparison with 2019. The new estimates, developed in collaboration with USAID, Johns Hopkins University, Avenir Health and Imperial College, are based on data from 27 countries that account for 75 percent of the global TB caseload. That means TB investments for this coming year need to be doubled, in order to meet a 2018-2022 target for diagnosing and treating 40 million people (or 10 million a year), within that four year time frame, the Partnership says. TB kills 4,000 people a day The airborne disease still kills 4,000 people every day, with nearly a quarter of the world’s population estimated to have been infected. Despite being curable and preventable, only an estimated 5.7 million people received treatment for TB in 2020, a decline of 21 percent from the previous year—leaving an estimated 4.3 million people with untreated TB and implying all but certain death for probably half that number, the report showed. A lack of attention to the disease, lack of funding, and a dearth of proper diagnostic tools are responsible, Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership said at a Stop TB briefing Tuesday. “COVID showed that if the government and people are scared, money is not an issue. We are in the middle of a disaster but our attention seems to be in a very wrong place.” Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership. The “orphan disease” does not receive political priority or funding, Obiefuna Austin Arinze, Executive Director of Afro Global Alliance and incoming Vice-Chair of the Stop TB Partnership Board said. At current levels of funding, the world will miss the target set by the United National High-Level Meeting on TB that took place in 2018 for diagnosing and treating 40 million people with TB by 2022. With just 400 days to reach 2022 goals, the diagnostic figure is even more grim for children with TB, Ditiu said. However, with mobilisation of resources – including funding, digital diagnostics and more government-sponsored community interventions – the world could reach the target’s 90% mark – treating some 36 million people, Ditiu said. Annual resource needs and available funding for TB in USD. So why is investing in TB diagnosis and elimination imperative? In simple words, it saves more lives than you would think. “Investing an extra dollar in TB is one of the best dollars spent to help the world,” Dr Bjorn Lomborg, President of the Danish think tank, Copenhagen Consensus, said at the teleconference. According to him, it would only cost US$8.1 billion dollars annually, between now and 2030, to eliminate TB. This investment translates to benefits worth US$348 billion dollars, pegging the benefit-cost ratio at 43. This means that every dollar invested in TB prevention and care yields a return of US$43. But currently, only US$6.5 billion is available annually for TB response globally. Moreover, TB funding has stagnated over the last five years – meaning there are big gaps that need to be overcome now. That’s why, at the UNHLM on TB in 2018, states and non-state actors pledged to commit a total of US$13 billion annually until 2022 to overcome past shortfalls – unfortunately COVID intervened the following year and those pledges were not honored. Some US$13 billion in funding is needed for TB care and prevention per year. TB is traditionally a low GF funding priority – despite a high dependency on Global Fund services in LMICs Despite being curable, preventable, and easily diagnosable, TB sees more deaths (over 1 million annually) than HIV/AIDS and Malaria combined. At the same time, The Global Fund channels only 18 percent of its resources to TB diagnosis and treatment. The remaining 82% is invested in fighting HIV/AIDS, malaria, and more recently, COVID-19 tests and treatments. Although 85% of national TB budgets, on average, are financed by low- and middle-income countries themselves, they remain highly dependent on the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria to fill vital gaps in services. And that adds weight to the Global Fund’s appeals, panelists pointed out. In terms of how those funds should be spent, the World Health Organisation along with the UN Secretary General have outlined priority recommendations to ramp up the TB response, Tereza Kasaeva, Director of WHO’s Global TB Programme said. “Efforts need to be intensified to make these recommendations a reality.” Diagnosis still reliant on less accurate sputum smear microscopy According to WHO, the diagnosis of TB and drug-resistant TB remains a challenge with one-third of people with TB and two-thirds of people with drug-resistant TB not being detected globally. While WHO recommends highly accurate rapid molecular assays as the initial test to diagnose TB, less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool. Only 28 percent of people were diagnosed with MTB using a rapid molecular test in 2019, Ditiu said. This means that nearly three quarters of diagnoses are done using the “clinical” smear microscopy. Smear microscopy, while cost-effective, has a poor track record in diagnosing extra-pulmonary tuberculosis, paediatric tuberculosis, and TB in patients co-infected with HIV and tuberculosis, a paper pointed. “Why don’t we allow people proper diagnostic tools?” she asked, pointing out that an untreated person with TB can transmit the bacteria to nearly 15 people every year. “Now think about this in countries like India with a population of 1.2 billion.” Less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool for TB, despite the existence of highly accurate rapid molecular assays. COVID devastated TB diagnostics To make matters worse, the COVID-19 pandemic devastated the diagnostics investments in TB – whereby existing resources were diverted, and tools like the highly accurate GeneXpert molecular diagnostic platforms were repurposed to diagnose COVID, in the pandemic’s early days. Since then, new rapid COVID diagnostic tests have become widely available, but there has been no significant recovery plan for TB diagnostics put into place, Obiefuna said. The COVID-19 pandemic was not the first time that the health infrastructure for TB was used to tackle other health crises, and particularly those related to airborne diseases, pointed out Cheri Vincent, Chief of USAID’s TB Division, at the meeting. “We saw it [being diverted] for Ebola and airborne influenza,” she said, adding, “If we can’t solve TB, we can’t solve the next airborne pandemic,” she highlighted. In fact, TB doctors were the first to be diverted to tackle the COVID-19 breakout, Ditiu said. The Zambia story, and what it teaches us But not all has been downhill in the fight against TB. Zambia offers an example of a country that has been able to sustain its TB programmes through a combination of domestic funding, government-community partnerships, and diagnostic tools – despite the COVID pandemic. It can provide inspiration for countries battling both diseases at the same time. Already today, Zambia has achieved 89% of its 2022 UNHLM diagnosis and treatment target. Over the past five years, the country invested US$45 million of domestic resources in TB response. “[TB] commodity security is key to achieving our goals,” said Dr. Patrick Lungu, National TB and Leprosy Control Program Manager in Zambia. A ‘TB Situation room’ was created to review TB programmes on a weekly basis to identify issues that may be negatively impacting performance. “We were able to offer more technical support to different levels of the health system – which translates to Zambia envisaging to achieve the UNHLM target in at least two-three key indicators,” Lungu said. Zambia has achieved nearly 89 percent of its UNHLM target so far. Will India achieve its ambitious 2025 TB elimination target? When it comes to countries like India – which bears the heaviest TB burden in the world, the pandemic has slowed-down and diverted efforts to eliminate elimination of TB by 2025 -a huge goal set by the government. According to the Indian Health Ministry’s 2021 Annual Report on Tuberculosis Elimination, reports and notification of confirmed TB diagnoses tumbled 38 percent in March-April 2020 owing to the lockdown. Furthermore, a majority of the country’s TB elimination resources were repurposed for Covid-19. Then just as services were beginning to recoup, a massive second COVID wave hit the country in spring 2021; it remains unclear what dents that made in the progress India had seen toward the end of 2020. In its 2021 official report, the Indian Health Ministry nonetheless suggested that the dedicated Infectious disease hospitals that were established for Covid will contribute “significantly” to future TB Care and management. Despite being scheduled to be a part of Tuesday’s Stop TB Partnership panel, the Indian Health Ministry did not make an appearance – leaving a lack of clarity on trends and progress in 2021. But on a global level, the warning signs are clear. Says Ditui: “we have erased 10-12 years of progress, and are back to 2010-11 levels of TB detection and cases. This becomes all the more alarming with the fact that TB is not a new disease but one that has been around for decades, and has a vaccine. One can only hope that TB receives the undivided effort it needs to be eliminated.” Image Credits: The Global Fund / Evgeny Maloletka, Stop TB Partnership, Dr. Patrick Lungu. Posts navigation Older postsNewer posts This site uses cookies to help give you the best experience on our website. Cookies enable us to collect information that helps us personalise your experience and improve the functionality and performance of our site. By continuing to read our website, we assume you agree to this, otherwise you can adjust your browser settings. Please read our cookie and Privacy Policy. Our Cookies and Privacy Policy Loading Comments... You must be logged in to post a comment.
Pfizer Vaccine Effective Against COVID-19 Hospitalizations for All Variants 05/10/2021 Raisa Santos Two jabs of the Pfizer-BioNTech vaccine are 90% effective against COVID-19 hospitalizations for all variants including Delta, for at least 6 months, confirmed a new study published by The Lancet. The study, conducted by Kaiser Permanete and Pfizer, found that while effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, effectiveness against hospitalizations remains at 90% overall for all variants. “Our study confirms that vaccines are a critical tool for controlling the pandemic and remain highly effective in preventing severe disease and hospitalization, including from the delta and other variants of concern. Protection against infection does decline in the months following a second dose,” said lead author of the study Dr Sara Tartof, of Kaiser Permanente. The study analyzed 3,436,957 electronic health records from the Kaiser Permanente Southern California (KPSC) health system between 4 December 2020 and 8 August 2021 to assess the effectiveness of the Pfizer vaccine against COVID-19 infections and related hospitalizations. Immunity declines after six months In addition, the study also found that effectiveness against all SARS-CoV-2 infections declined over the study period, falling from 88% within one month after receiving two doses to 47% after six months, underscoring the importance of improving vaccination rates worldwide. Researchers did not observe a difference in waning between variants. While this does provide evidence towards waning immunity against COVID-19, the CDC has called for additional research to determine which groups should be prioritized to receive booster shots. “In line with the recent FDA [3] and CDC recommendations [4], considerations for booster shots should take global COVID-19 vaccine supply into account as people in many countries around the world have not yet received a primary vaccination series,” said Tartof. Vaccine equity and booster shots have prompted increasing debate in recent weeks, with WHO calling for a global moratorium on COVID-19 boosters to be extended until the end of the year, and global health advocates protesting “vaccine apartheid” outside the UN during the General Assembly last month. US and Israeli studies find similar reductions in immunity Other findings from the US Centers for Disease Control (CDC) and the Israeli Ministry of Health had also found reductions of immunity from the Pfizer vaccine after six months. The Israeli findings reported that people over age 60 who received a third dose of the Pfizer vaccine were five times less likely to become severely ill if they had their first shot at least five months earlier. These results in particular were regarded as a critical factor in the recommendation from the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) to amend its emergency use authorization (EUA) last month for the Pfizer vaccine. The FDA now recommends a single booster dose to be administered at least six months after completion for: individuals 65 and older; individuals 18 through 64 at high risk of severe COVID-19; and individuals 18 through 64 with increased exposure of SARS-CoV-2 that puts them at high risk of health complications relating to COVID-19. Image Credits: International Monetary Fund/Ernesto Benavides. Indian Generic Companies Are Ready to Make Merck’s COVID-19 Antiviral Pill 04/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Molnupiravir could make a significant difference to the global response to COVID-19. Indian generic drug manufacturers are poised to make the antiviral pill, molnupiravir, which halved hospitalisations in a trial of high-risk people with COVID-19. Merck, which developed molnupiravir in collaboration with Ridgeback Biotherapeutics, has awarded non-exclusive, voluntary licensing agreements to eight generic companies in India since April in anticipation of positive trial results. According to Merck, it has been producing molnupiravir “at risk” and expects to produce 10 million courses of treatment by the end of 2021, the company said a media release last Friday. Merck cut short the trial of molnupiravir in the light of the good results, and will make an application for emergency use authorisation (EUA) with the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA), “as soon as possible”, the company said. It will also submit “marketing applications to other regulatory bodies worldwide”, it added. Australia’s Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) granted provisional determination for molnupiravir in August. Meanwhile, in anticipation of regulatory approval, the Access to COVID-19 Tools (ACT) Accelerator is working to “secure volumes” of the pills for people in LMICs, according to ACT-Accelerator partner Unitaid. “Effective, simple to use, oral treatments that can avert the progression to severe illness are exactly the kind of breakthroughs we need to get the pandemic under control. Deployed alongside vaccines, such medicines could drive down hospitalizations and deaths due to COVID-19,” said Dr Philippe Duneton, Executive Director of Unitaid shortly after the Merck announcement. Few treatment options At present, there are very few treatment options for people infected with COVID-19, and those that exist – such as remdesivir and dexamethasone – are expensive, given intravenously or by injections and only for severely ill people already in hospital. White House medical adviser Dr Anthony Fauci told CNN on Sunday that the medicine was “extremely important”. “It’s a pill that’s given by mouth, so you don’t need anything special other than taking a pill the way you take any pill. And the results are really quite impressive,” said Fauci. However, he said that it only halved the risk of hospitalisation and to cut this risk by 100% people should “not get infected in the first place”. Back in April, Merck entered into voluntary licensing agreements with five Indian companies – Cipla, Dr Reddy’s Laboratories, Emcure Pharmaceuticals, Hetero Labs and Sun Pharmaceutical Industries. All are World Health Organization (WHO) pre-qualified manufacturing facilities. It has since licensed Aurobindo Pharma, Torrent Pharmaceuticals, and Viatris, to manufacture the drug. At least four of the companies are already manufacturing generic molnupirvir, which they have been supplying to a trial in India and all eight are ready for global supply, according to MSD India. When it announced the licensing back in April, Merck said the intention was to enable the manufacturers to “supply molnupiravir to India and more than 100 low and middle-income countries (LMICs)”. No deaths in trial The molnupiravir trial involved 775 unvaccinated adults with mild-to-moderate COVID-19 with at least one risk factor for serious illness – most commonly, obesity, being over the age of 60, and living with diabetes and heart disease. Only 7,3% of those taking molnupiravir ended up in hospital in comparison to 14,1% of those on the placebo, announced Merck (known as MSD outside the US and Canada) in a media release last Friday. “Twenty-nine days into the trial, no deaths were reported in patients who received molnupiravir, as compared to eight deaths in patients who received placebo,” it added. The trial was conducted globally, including at sites in Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Egypt, France, Germany, Guatemala, Israel, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Philippines, Poland, Russia, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Taiwan, Ukraine, the United Kingdom and the US. Meanwhile, in June the US government ordered approximately 1.7 million courses of molnupiravir at a cost of $1.2 billion – about $700/patient – according to a June media release from Merck. However, this price is equal to about 35 times the estimated sustainable generic price using current market prices for the active pharmaceutical ingredients (API), according to Melissa J Barber from Harvard University’s Department of Global Health and Population and Dzintars Gotham from King’s College Hospital in London. “Assuming optimization of molnupiravir synthesis, and a resulting drop in API cost, the US price would be equal to about 161 times the estimated sustainable generic price,” the two researchers noted in a brief published last Friday. They identified that three companies appeared to be exporting API for molnupiravir – Optimus Drugs Private, Honour Lab, and Maithri Laboratories. Meanwhile, Pfizer and Roche are also racing to develop an antiviral pill for COVID-19, according to Reuters. A New Pandemic Treaty, Revised International Health Regulations, or Both? What is the Actual Roadmap? 02/10/2021 Gian Luca Burci WHO Headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland. The World Health Assembly is set to make a fateful decision in November over whether to negotiate a new international ‘Pandemic Treaty’ to improve future pandemic preparedness and response. However, major players like the United States, backed by some civil society groups, have suggested that revisions of the existing International Health Regulations (IHR) would be a better path. Amidst the hyperbole of oft-heated debate over which route might be easier, quicker or more effective, it’s important to understand that either option will require careful, systematic planning and execution of a process that is oft-misunderstood. At the same time, there are some important technical points that must be kept in mind. WHA agreement to adopt a Pandemic Treaty may have a much more sweeping historical sense, than mere revisions of the existing IHR. But a new treaty will only be enforceable among those member states that have ratified it in what is typically a prolonged process – while any IHR revisions that are agreed to would be applicable to all 196 WHO member states immediately. Ultimately, it is reaching political consensus on the often-charged content of proposed treaty/IHR reforms that matters the most. But to do that, the process also needs careful consideration – and demystification. WHO former legal counsel Gian Luca Burci, Adjunct Professor of international law at the Geneva Graduate Institute, takes apart the procedural issues, and what they mean, ahead of the third working group meeting of member states on the issue, next week. Pandemic Treaty or IHR revisions – exploring the pathways & process In May, the World Health Assembly tasked a Member States’ working group with the critical mission of assessing “the benefits of developing a WHO convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” The Working Group on Strengthening WHO Preparedness and Response to Health Emergencies (WGPR) is now tasked with coming up with a recommendation in time for a WHA special session in November on whether the WHA should establish an intergovernmental process “to draft and negotiate such a convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” Just two months from the deadline, we understand that discussions in the WGPR are moving towards negotiating a new “pandemic treaty” and revising the International Health Regulations (IHR) in parallel after the November WHA – rather than forcing a choice between them. While this would be a welcome compromise, there seems to be some confusion, as well as contradictory positions, about the procedural steps required to pursue either option. Debate is particularly intense over the question of whether amending the IHR or concluding a treaty would be “easier and quicker,” and which option would incentivize more participation and commitment. While the process will eventually depend on a number of, as yet, unpredictable factors, international law and practice point to some likely steps and procedural requirements, which are reviewed here. This is without reference to the potential content of a pandemic treaty or amended IHR – closely related to questions of speed and difficulty of negotiations. This review also does not purport to be exhaustive; more information can be found in the Geneva Graduate Institute’s “Guide to a Pandemic Treaty.” Pandemic Treaty – from negotiation to adoption, ratification & entry into force Launch of the negotiating process Under Article 19 of the WHO Constitution, the WHA can adopt “conventions or agreements with respect to any matter within the competence of the Organization.” The process leading up to a WHO treaty (“treaty,” “convention,” “agreement” are different denominations but do not change the substance) would therefore be launched by a WHA resolution. The resolution could shape negotiations, for example by requesting that certain issues be included in the treaty or given priority. However, that level of prescriptiveness is infrequent in contemporary treaty practice to leave flexibility to the negotiators. Negotiating forum The Health Assembly would establish a dedicated intergovernmental body open to all WHO member states to draft and negotiate the future convention. This step can be articulated in many different ways and there is no single model in international practice. In the case of the WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control (FCTC), for example, the process was subdivided into two parts: 1) a working group was firstly established to discuss possible building blocks of the convention before committing to treaty negotiations and 2) after a green light from WHA, an intergovernmental negotiating body was established. However, in many other cases, a single body (labelled for example an “intergovernmental negotiating committee”) was responsible for the whole preparation and negotiation of the treaty. This occurred, for example, with the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) and later its Kyoto Protocol. WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus delivering the closing speech for the 72nd World Health Assembly in 2019, prior to the COVID-19 pandemic. Negotiating bodies of this nature are invariably open to participation by all member states. In addition, the European Union is a likely invitee with full rights of participation under the rubric of “regional economic integration organizations” (a category that so far includes only the EU). And indeed the EU has already been one of the most vocal advocates of a pandemic treaty. Participation of other non-state actors Beyond member states and possibly the EU, one can expect participation to be extended to other actors identified in the 2016 Framework of Engagement with Non-State Actors, most importantly NGOs, international business associations and philanthropic foundations (the fourth group, academic institutions, are not entitled to participate but are sometimes invited ad hoc as experts). All these actors would participate as “observers” with limited privileges, rather than full negotiators. For example, they usually can only participate in public meetings but are excluded from closed negotiating sessions that often prevail at crucial stages of the process. However, what matters is physical presence at the negotiations to lobby and brief delegates and network with like-minded organizations. Unlike more technical questions such as “one health” and access to pathogen samples, we can expect substantial civil society mobilization and lobbying behind issues such as equity, human rights and access to countermeasures. These considerations are especially relevant if negotiations resume in person; if the sanitary situation still requires online meetings, the process will have to be adapted and the recent sessions of the WHA and the Executive Board offer a blueprint for that. Virtual negotiations of course are less than ideal for all participants. Methods of work – geopolitical representation and the demands of consensus decision-making The body or bodies established by the WHA will have to elect their officers, typically following WHO’s breakdown into six regions. The Assembly can prescribe the make-up of the bureau, as in the case of the WGPR. Appointing the bureau can be a delicate process depending on geopolitical circumstances or competing ambitions. The role of the bureau is not cast in stone but can be decisive for the progress and outcome of work, in particular by working informally behind the scenes to explore options and foster consensus. The bodies concerned will operate under the WHA rules of procedure, but in practice they enjoy considerable discretion in organizing their work. It is customary, and practically a dogma within WHO, that decisions be only taken by consensus without a formal vote. This increases the importance of the process that has to be perceived as fair, legitimate and inclusive to lead to a result that is at least not unacceptable to any state. The requirement of consensus decision-making carries a lot of inertia all the way to the WHA; even though any state can break consensus by formally objecting and requesting a vote, it is in fact a heavy responsibility to do so and it hardly ever happens. Negotiations of long and complex instruments usually require dividing the text, or particularly difficult issues, among subcommittees that work in parallel, formally report to the plenary on their progress and are often coordinated by the bureau. Small delegations have understandable difficulties in managing multiple meetings, and there is an established practice within WHO to avoid more than two parallel meetings. Available UN-system practice, however, shows much flexibility to adapt the organization of work and the mix of formal and informal meetings. Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, WHO Director General, discussing a pandemic treaty in September 2021. Complex WHO intergovernmental negotiations have often been supplemented by intersessional consultations, either on a regional basis or on specific topics. Regional consultations can be particularly effective in reaching common positions and strengthening the negotiating leverage of groups of countries that could otherwise be overpowered individually. Duration and frequency of negotiations are difficult to predict The duration and frequency of treaty negotiations are difficult to predict. The duration of negotiations will depend on a number of factors including the complexity of the issues at hand, the attitude of key countries, the sense of urgency, the diplomatic ability of the bureau, and the intended outcome. A general “framework convention” without detailed and highly prescriptive obligations may be relatively quicker to achieve, but practice shows that even negotiating such instruments requires on average no less than two years. By way of reference, negotiating the UNFCCC took about two years, the FCTC took three years and six negotiating sessions, while its protocol on illicit trade took four years and five sessions. In contrast, negotiating the two IAEA conventions concluded on the heels of the 1986 Chernobyl nuclear accident took just a few months. It is common for the responsible governing body, in our case the WHA, to request progress reports and set a deadline for the conclusion of the negotiations. Even though there are no draconian consequences for not meeting it, it helps focus the negotiations and keep momentum. The frequency of formal meetings usually depends on available financial resources, the capacity of delegations and the secretariat to manage the workload and the calendar of other intergovernmental meetings. One can usually expect no more than two negotiating sessions of 1-2 weeks per year as a maximum. How to get to the initial draft? The initial draft of the treaty is politically and psychologically very important because it inevitably shapes the dynamics of the subsequent negotiations, even for countries opposing it. Even though it is possible for one or more states to come forward with a zero draft text, this is a relatively uncommon step because questions about the motives of the proposing states could affect or derail negotiations. The responsibility to propose a full zero draft therefore can either fall on the chair of the negotiating body (e.g. the FCTC), on the secretariat (e.g. the revised IHR, or in the environmental field the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, drafted by the UNEP Secretariat). An important point in this regard is that a zero draft does not come out of thin air, but is the result of previous consultations or preparatory work. In the case of the IHR, the draft proposed by the secretariat was the culmination of many years of technical work and consultations, thus the text was submitted promptly to negotiations after a round of regional consultations. In the case of the pandemic treaty, so far there has been no real open discussion on its scope and content either in the WHA or the WGPR, and it is unlikely that this will occur before the WHA special session. Consequently, it is foreseeable that the body established by the WHA will devote an initial period to discuss or seek expert input on the possible building blocks of a treaty and their challenges and implications. Given the uncertainties and questions surrounding the recent proposals, it would be counterproductive to try to short-circuit an inclusive and bottom-up process for achieving a quick result at all costs. Adoption of the treaty and next steps The final draft text would be submitted to the WHA for consideration. As noted above, the Assembly will almost certainly adopt the treaty by consensus. In the unlikely event where consensus could not be reached, Article 19 of the Constitution requires a two-thirds majority (calculated on the basis of valid votes excluding abstentions). The virtual World Health Assembly nerve center at WHO’s Geneva headquarters in May 2020. The upcoming WHA Special Session will likely take a similar form. Other steps that can be taken by the WHA will depend on the nature of the treaty and the conclusions of the negotiations. A pandemic treaty will in all probability be a normative instrument establishing its own governance. Relying on precedents including the FCTC, this will include at a minimum a conference of the parties and a secretariat. Initial work on the institutional aspects will require drafting rules of procedure for the conference of the parties and, depending on the institutional arrangements contained in the treaty, financial regulations and a budget. Even though a treaty is a self-contained instrument and its governance will not be part of WHO’s, the latter may end up providing or hosting its secretariat. For all these reasons, the WHA may establish upon the adoption of the treaty a new intergovernmental body to prepare all the foregoing steps and facilitate the work of the first session of the conference of the parties. Signature, ratification and entry into force Multilateral treaties are customarily opened for signature for a defined period of time. What matters for the entry into force of the treaty, however, is reaching the required number of ratifications (or adherence, accession, formal confirmation depending on the final clauses of the treaty) and how fast that will occur. The threshold for entry into force has varied wildly in previous treaties, anywhere between 20 and 60 as an average (it was 40 for the FCTC and its illicit trade protocol). The number agreed upon will in practice depend on a compromise between an early establishment of the new legal regime and the critical mass of states required to make it credible and effective. A review of UN-system treaties shows on average a time gap of between two and four years between adoption and entry into force; the FCTC protocol on illicit trade took six years, probably reflecting its complexity and demands at national level, but the FCTC took only 21 months. A related consideration for the credibility of the treaty will be the attitude of key states, whether and how quickly they will ratify it and whether they will actively oppose it should they choose to remain outside it. A device occasionally used when it is urgent to start applying a treaty is the so-called “provisional application”, whereby contracting parties indicate in the treaty itself or in a separate act (e.g. the WHA resolution adopting a treaty) that they will provisionally implement the treaty pending its entry into force. A classic but atypical example is the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), provisionally applied from 1947 until 1995. I mention this for the sake of completeness, but it is not a common arrangement for self-intuitive sovereignty concerns. Most of the foregoing considerations also apply to the negotiation and conclusion of protocols to the treaty, should it be drafted as a framework convention requiring separate instruments to spell out its obligations. Albeit linked organically to the “mother convention”, protocols are separate treaties in their own right. Certain steps of the negotiations will probably go faster than for the original convention since the latter provides an applicable legal framework. However, the experience of the FCTC protocol – 10 years from beginning of negotiations to entry into force and only 63 parties so far – should induce caution and deter over-optimism about “quick wins” or “low-hanging fruits.” Strategic reflection is required on whether to make the implementation of a possible pandemic treaty depend heavily on the conclusion of separate protocols. A comparison of the processes required for the creation of a pandemic treaty and revising the International Health Regulations. Amending the International Health Regulations – what is similar or different? The step-by-step process for amending the IHR is spelled out in Article 55. Amendments can be proposed by any state party or the WHO Director-General (DG). Given the direction that the WGPR seems to be taking, it is likely that any amendment process will be launched directly by the Assembly, thus shortening this initial step. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen, and been controversial within WHO, well before the COVID-19 pandemic. With the exception of a highly-technical 2014 amendment extending the recognised lifetime of yellow fever vaccines, successive IHR Review Committees [expert bodies appointed by the WHO DG] have advised against amendments, and the WHO Secretariat has also traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. This is due partly to the perceived risk of opening up the entire Regulations to unpredictable and potentially counterproductive revisions that may end up decreasing their credibility and effectiveness. This concern is understandable and legitimate, but, firstly, it applies to any legislative instrument where the risk of unforeseeable outcomes has to be weighed against the need to improve its design and content. Secondly, the WHA can narrow the scope of the amendments by instructing the negotiating body to only deal with specific issues. While this conditionality is infrequent and probably undesirable in the case of treaties, it would be more plausible with regard to the IHR since the Assembly is their parent body and exercises direct oversight functions over them. Similar procedural considerations – but requiring a less steep “learning curve” Most of the procedural considerations involved in the negotiation of a pandemic treaty would apply mutatis mutandis to the amendment of the IHR – and thus are not repeated here. A possible difference concerns the preparatory work preceding and leading to an initial draft of the amendments. The learning curve for a pandemic treaty could be steeper and longer given the absence of an intergovernmental discussion thus far and the lack of familiarity of many delegations. The IHR and its complexities are better known to the public health and foreign affairs officials following WHO affairs, and it is likely that delegations may be willing to move quickly into drafting and negotiations. IHR-specific requirements Article 50 of the IHR provides that the Review Committee shall “make technical recommendations to the Director-General regarding amendments to these Regulations.” The main consideration, time-wise, is whether involving the Review Committee is a compulsory step, since the procedural requirements in the IHR and the way in which they have been implemented by the secretariat so far, are formal and cumbersome and may lead to delays. The second and related consideration is at which stage of the amendment process would the Review Committee intervene? Would it make its recommendations before amendments are drafted, on an initial draft, or rather towards the end of the process? The political implications of those different approaches for the negotiations may be considerable. There are few precedents from which lessons may be learned. The IHR have been amended only once, in 2014, adjusting the requirements for yellow fever vaccination required by some state parties (eg. India) for international travelers arriving from yellow-fever endemic countries (Annex 7). The amendment extended the validity of a well-accepted vaccine from 10 years to lifetime in line with new evidence about the vaccine’s efficacy. An IHR Review Committee was not created for that occasion, setting a precedent. At the same time, the yellow fever vaccine amendment was limited and very technical. It was recommended by the Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on immunization, a dedicated expert group convened by the WHO secretariat, and the WHO Executive Board proposed the amendment to the WHA. In contrast, a broad and substantial amendment of multiple, substantive provisions of the IHR, which might cover sensitive issues around the early warning of outbreaks and WHO’s mandate to investigate and enforce IHR provisions, may be seen as something different legally and politically – warranting the creation of an IHR Review Committee. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen but the WHO Secretariat has traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. The main legal consideration is that the Review Committee is an expert body providing its recommendations to the DG at his request rather than a governance organ partaking of the normative functions of WHO. There can be situations like the one just mentioned, in which that technical input is not necessary or can be provided through different and less time-consuming channels. Moreover, a process initiated by the Executive Board or the WHA is different from a proposal by a member state or the DG. In my view, convening a Review Committee may be politically but not legally necessary. It is indicative in this connection that Article 55 does not mention the Review Committee, which suggests that its participation is not compulsory. Adoption of the amendments and entry into force Article 55 requires that amendments be communicated to state parties at least four months before the opening of the WHA, which may influence the schedule of the negotiating body. As noted above, consensus is the norm in WHO, and that will apply to the adoption of the amendments. In the unlikely event of formal objections, a vote would require a simple majority instead of the two-thirds required for a treaty. The main difference between a pandemic treaty and amendments to the IHR concerns entry into force. Pursuant to Article 22 of the Constitution and Article 59 of the IHR, the latter enter into force for all member states 24 months after the DG’s notification of adoption, except for those member states that either reject the amendments or file a reservation within 18 months from that notification. In case of a reservation, Article 62 provides for a rather complex process to determine whether the reservation is compatible with the object and purpose of the Regulations and can be accepted. The Article 62 procedure makes it very difficult in practice to reject a reservation and, historically, the sole objection that I am aware of was by Australia to the 1969 version of the IHR. Opting out of a regulation (or amendments thereof) is a drastic, highly visible and politically heavy decision that states would probably take only for the most serious reasons. Still, both rejections and successful reservations are possible and would undesirably fragment what should be instead a uniform legal and coordinating framework to achieve global health security. Objections could also create impossibly complex situations, e.g. in case of amendments changing the functions of WHO, because objecting states would remain bound by the different functions enshrined in the original IHR. For these reasons and as noted above with regard to a pandemic treaty, the inclusiveness, fairness and legitimacy of the process are of crucial importance to keep states in the fold even if they are not entirely satisfied of the outcome. Conclusions – both exercises can be more or less difficult, depending on the political atmosphere Among the preliminary conclusions that can be drawn is the fact that the two processes, when compared side-by-side, would be substantially similar. However there are some significant differences which will need careful consideration as well. Significantly, amending the IHR may be faster because: 1) modifying an existing text is presumably easier than negotiating one from scratch, 2) the WHA can define and narrow the scope and purpose of the amendments, and 3) WHO member states are relatively familiar with the Regulations. The need to consult the Review Committee, however, must be clarified – as well as what this might mean for achieving consensus. The timeline for entry into force of a treaty or any IHR amendments may be similar for either of the two options, but the amendments to the IHR would enter into force for all 196 WHO member states. In the case of a new treaty, a subset of countries will be bound by it once it enters into force, but the timeline for all WHO member states to ratify such a new instrument could be much more protracted – and remains unknown. Politically, both exercises can be more or less difficult depending on the political atmosphere, the proposals on the table, the ability of the bureau to build consensus and the myriad other factors characterizing any major multilateral negotiation. In both processes, there is great importance in reaching a real and sustainable consensus. At the same time, joining consensus in the WHA to adopt a pandemic treaty is not necessarily predictive of future ratifications since governments as well as circumstances may change. In both cases, finally, it will be important to maintain momentum but avoid imposing unrealistic timelines for the negotiations. The Independent Panel’s call for concluding a pandemic treaty in six months is an example of an unrealistic goal in this connection. Opting into a treaty requires political will and action, which can be highly appealing to politicians. On the other hand, remaining bound by a revised IHR could also be the positive outcome of political inertia and inaction – that is a country’s reluctance to be seen as opting out. The key questions are what is more politically feasible, and what will build more genuine, sustained political commitment to any improved set of international rules that aim to better govern future outbreaks and reduce pandemic risks. Gian Luca Burci is adjunct professor of international law at the Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies. His areas of expertise are global health law and governance, global health security and the law and practice of international organizations. Between 2005 and 2016 he was Legal Counsel of WHO. Updated on 07.10.2021 with a description of the 2014 IHR amendment on requirements around yellow fever vaccines. Image Credits: Flickr – Guilhem Vellut, Flickr – US Mission Geneva, WHO / Antoine Tardy, WHO, Gian Luca Burci, Wikimedia Commons. Tuberculosis is Here to Stay if We Don’t Mobilise Resources for Diagnoses and Double Fundings, New Data Shows 01/10/2021 Aishwarya Tendolkar Global efforts to eliminate TB have been set back by the COVID-19 pandemic. The COVID-19 pandemic and the consequent diversion of resources toward battling SARS-CoV2 has also set back global efforts to eliminate the world’s second most deadly infectious killer: Tuberculosis, by 2030. Only a doubling of investments next year can pave the way to attainment of the 2030 United Nations Sustainable Development Goals to eliminate the disease, experts and panelists at the Stop TB Partnership said Tuesday. The panel session coincided with the release of new data from a study conducted by the Stop TB Partnership that showed COVID’s impact on TB response this year continues to be as devastating as last year, with 1.2 million fewer people projected to be diagnosed and treated for TB this year, in comparison with 2019. The new estimates, developed in collaboration with USAID, Johns Hopkins University, Avenir Health and Imperial College, are based on data from 27 countries that account for 75 percent of the global TB caseload. That means TB investments for this coming year need to be doubled, in order to meet a 2018-2022 target for diagnosing and treating 40 million people (or 10 million a year), within that four year time frame, the Partnership says. TB kills 4,000 people a day The airborne disease still kills 4,000 people every day, with nearly a quarter of the world’s population estimated to have been infected. Despite being curable and preventable, only an estimated 5.7 million people received treatment for TB in 2020, a decline of 21 percent from the previous year—leaving an estimated 4.3 million people with untreated TB and implying all but certain death for probably half that number, the report showed. A lack of attention to the disease, lack of funding, and a dearth of proper diagnostic tools are responsible, Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership said at a Stop TB briefing Tuesday. “COVID showed that if the government and people are scared, money is not an issue. We are in the middle of a disaster but our attention seems to be in a very wrong place.” Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership. The “orphan disease” does not receive political priority or funding, Obiefuna Austin Arinze, Executive Director of Afro Global Alliance and incoming Vice-Chair of the Stop TB Partnership Board said. At current levels of funding, the world will miss the target set by the United National High-Level Meeting on TB that took place in 2018 for diagnosing and treating 40 million people with TB by 2022. With just 400 days to reach 2022 goals, the diagnostic figure is even more grim for children with TB, Ditiu said. However, with mobilisation of resources – including funding, digital diagnostics and more government-sponsored community interventions – the world could reach the target’s 90% mark – treating some 36 million people, Ditiu said. Annual resource needs and available funding for TB in USD. So why is investing in TB diagnosis and elimination imperative? In simple words, it saves more lives than you would think. “Investing an extra dollar in TB is one of the best dollars spent to help the world,” Dr Bjorn Lomborg, President of the Danish think tank, Copenhagen Consensus, said at the teleconference. According to him, it would only cost US$8.1 billion dollars annually, between now and 2030, to eliminate TB. This investment translates to benefits worth US$348 billion dollars, pegging the benefit-cost ratio at 43. This means that every dollar invested in TB prevention and care yields a return of US$43. But currently, only US$6.5 billion is available annually for TB response globally. Moreover, TB funding has stagnated over the last five years – meaning there are big gaps that need to be overcome now. That’s why, at the UNHLM on TB in 2018, states and non-state actors pledged to commit a total of US$13 billion annually until 2022 to overcome past shortfalls – unfortunately COVID intervened the following year and those pledges were not honored. Some US$13 billion in funding is needed for TB care and prevention per year. TB is traditionally a low GF funding priority – despite a high dependency on Global Fund services in LMICs Despite being curable, preventable, and easily diagnosable, TB sees more deaths (over 1 million annually) than HIV/AIDS and Malaria combined. At the same time, The Global Fund channels only 18 percent of its resources to TB diagnosis and treatment. The remaining 82% is invested in fighting HIV/AIDS, malaria, and more recently, COVID-19 tests and treatments. Although 85% of national TB budgets, on average, are financed by low- and middle-income countries themselves, they remain highly dependent on the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria to fill vital gaps in services. And that adds weight to the Global Fund’s appeals, panelists pointed out. In terms of how those funds should be spent, the World Health Organisation along with the UN Secretary General have outlined priority recommendations to ramp up the TB response, Tereza Kasaeva, Director of WHO’s Global TB Programme said. “Efforts need to be intensified to make these recommendations a reality.” Diagnosis still reliant on less accurate sputum smear microscopy According to WHO, the diagnosis of TB and drug-resistant TB remains a challenge with one-third of people with TB and two-thirds of people with drug-resistant TB not being detected globally. While WHO recommends highly accurate rapid molecular assays as the initial test to diagnose TB, less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool. Only 28 percent of people were diagnosed with MTB using a rapid molecular test in 2019, Ditiu said. This means that nearly three quarters of diagnoses are done using the “clinical” smear microscopy. Smear microscopy, while cost-effective, has a poor track record in diagnosing extra-pulmonary tuberculosis, paediatric tuberculosis, and TB in patients co-infected with HIV and tuberculosis, a paper pointed. “Why don’t we allow people proper diagnostic tools?” she asked, pointing out that an untreated person with TB can transmit the bacteria to nearly 15 people every year. “Now think about this in countries like India with a population of 1.2 billion.” Less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool for TB, despite the existence of highly accurate rapid molecular assays. COVID devastated TB diagnostics To make matters worse, the COVID-19 pandemic devastated the diagnostics investments in TB – whereby existing resources were diverted, and tools like the highly accurate GeneXpert molecular diagnostic platforms were repurposed to diagnose COVID, in the pandemic’s early days. Since then, new rapid COVID diagnostic tests have become widely available, but there has been no significant recovery plan for TB diagnostics put into place, Obiefuna said. The COVID-19 pandemic was not the first time that the health infrastructure for TB was used to tackle other health crises, and particularly those related to airborne diseases, pointed out Cheri Vincent, Chief of USAID’s TB Division, at the meeting. “We saw it [being diverted] for Ebola and airborne influenza,” she said, adding, “If we can’t solve TB, we can’t solve the next airborne pandemic,” she highlighted. In fact, TB doctors were the first to be diverted to tackle the COVID-19 breakout, Ditiu said. The Zambia story, and what it teaches us But not all has been downhill in the fight against TB. Zambia offers an example of a country that has been able to sustain its TB programmes through a combination of domestic funding, government-community partnerships, and diagnostic tools – despite the COVID pandemic. It can provide inspiration for countries battling both diseases at the same time. Already today, Zambia has achieved 89% of its 2022 UNHLM diagnosis and treatment target. Over the past five years, the country invested US$45 million of domestic resources in TB response. “[TB] commodity security is key to achieving our goals,” said Dr. Patrick Lungu, National TB and Leprosy Control Program Manager in Zambia. A ‘TB Situation room’ was created to review TB programmes on a weekly basis to identify issues that may be negatively impacting performance. “We were able to offer more technical support to different levels of the health system – which translates to Zambia envisaging to achieve the UNHLM target in at least two-three key indicators,” Lungu said. Zambia has achieved nearly 89 percent of its UNHLM target so far. Will India achieve its ambitious 2025 TB elimination target? When it comes to countries like India – which bears the heaviest TB burden in the world, the pandemic has slowed-down and diverted efforts to eliminate elimination of TB by 2025 -a huge goal set by the government. According to the Indian Health Ministry’s 2021 Annual Report on Tuberculosis Elimination, reports and notification of confirmed TB diagnoses tumbled 38 percent in March-April 2020 owing to the lockdown. Furthermore, a majority of the country’s TB elimination resources were repurposed for Covid-19. Then just as services were beginning to recoup, a massive second COVID wave hit the country in spring 2021; it remains unclear what dents that made in the progress India had seen toward the end of 2020. In its 2021 official report, the Indian Health Ministry nonetheless suggested that the dedicated Infectious disease hospitals that were established for Covid will contribute “significantly” to future TB Care and management. Despite being scheduled to be a part of Tuesday’s Stop TB Partnership panel, the Indian Health Ministry did not make an appearance – leaving a lack of clarity on trends and progress in 2021. But on a global level, the warning signs are clear. Says Ditui: “we have erased 10-12 years of progress, and are back to 2010-11 levels of TB detection and cases. This becomes all the more alarming with the fact that TB is not a new disease but one that has been around for decades, and has a vaccine. One can only hope that TB receives the undivided effort it needs to be eliminated.” Image Credits: The Global Fund / Evgeny Maloletka, Stop TB Partnership, Dr. Patrick Lungu. Posts navigation Older postsNewer posts This site uses cookies to help give you the best experience on our website. Cookies enable us to collect information that helps us personalise your experience and improve the functionality and performance of our site. By continuing to read our website, we assume you agree to this, otherwise you can adjust your browser settings. Please read our cookie and Privacy Policy. Our Cookies and Privacy Policy Loading Comments... You must be logged in to post a comment.
Indian Generic Companies Are Ready to Make Merck’s COVID-19 Antiviral Pill 04/10/2021 Kerry Cullinan Molnupiravir could make a significant difference to the global response to COVID-19. Indian generic drug manufacturers are poised to make the antiviral pill, molnupiravir, which halved hospitalisations in a trial of high-risk people with COVID-19. Merck, which developed molnupiravir in collaboration with Ridgeback Biotherapeutics, has awarded non-exclusive, voluntary licensing agreements to eight generic companies in India since April in anticipation of positive trial results. According to Merck, it has been producing molnupiravir “at risk” and expects to produce 10 million courses of treatment by the end of 2021, the company said a media release last Friday. Merck cut short the trial of molnupiravir in the light of the good results, and will make an application for emergency use authorisation (EUA) with the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA), “as soon as possible”, the company said. It will also submit “marketing applications to other regulatory bodies worldwide”, it added. Australia’s Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) granted provisional determination for molnupiravir in August. Meanwhile, in anticipation of regulatory approval, the Access to COVID-19 Tools (ACT) Accelerator is working to “secure volumes” of the pills for people in LMICs, according to ACT-Accelerator partner Unitaid. “Effective, simple to use, oral treatments that can avert the progression to severe illness are exactly the kind of breakthroughs we need to get the pandemic under control. Deployed alongside vaccines, such medicines could drive down hospitalizations and deaths due to COVID-19,” said Dr Philippe Duneton, Executive Director of Unitaid shortly after the Merck announcement. Few treatment options At present, there are very few treatment options for people infected with COVID-19, and those that exist – such as remdesivir and dexamethasone – are expensive, given intravenously or by injections and only for severely ill people already in hospital. White House medical adviser Dr Anthony Fauci told CNN on Sunday that the medicine was “extremely important”. “It’s a pill that’s given by mouth, so you don’t need anything special other than taking a pill the way you take any pill. And the results are really quite impressive,” said Fauci. However, he said that it only halved the risk of hospitalisation and to cut this risk by 100% people should “not get infected in the first place”. Back in April, Merck entered into voluntary licensing agreements with five Indian companies – Cipla, Dr Reddy’s Laboratories, Emcure Pharmaceuticals, Hetero Labs and Sun Pharmaceutical Industries. All are World Health Organization (WHO) pre-qualified manufacturing facilities. It has since licensed Aurobindo Pharma, Torrent Pharmaceuticals, and Viatris, to manufacture the drug. At least four of the companies are already manufacturing generic molnupirvir, which they have been supplying to a trial in India and all eight are ready for global supply, according to MSD India. When it announced the licensing back in April, Merck said the intention was to enable the manufacturers to “supply molnupiravir to India and more than 100 low and middle-income countries (LMICs)”. No deaths in trial The molnupiravir trial involved 775 unvaccinated adults with mild-to-moderate COVID-19 with at least one risk factor for serious illness – most commonly, obesity, being over the age of 60, and living with diabetes and heart disease. Only 7,3% of those taking molnupiravir ended up in hospital in comparison to 14,1% of those on the placebo, announced Merck (known as MSD outside the US and Canada) in a media release last Friday. “Twenty-nine days into the trial, no deaths were reported in patients who received molnupiravir, as compared to eight deaths in patients who received placebo,” it added. The trial was conducted globally, including at sites in Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Egypt, France, Germany, Guatemala, Israel, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Philippines, Poland, Russia, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Taiwan, Ukraine, the United Kingdom and the US. Meanwhile, in June the US government ordered approximately 1.7 million courses of molnupiravir at a cost of $1.2 billion – about $700/patient – according to a June media release from Merck. However, this price is equal to about 35 times the estimated sustainable generic price using current market prices for the active pharmaceutical ingredients (API), according to Melissa J Barber from Harvard University’s Department of Global Health and Population and Dzintars Gotham from King’s College Hospital in London. “Assuming optimization of molnupiravir synthesis, and a resulting drop in API cost, the US price would be equal to about 161 times the estimated sustainable generic price,” the two researchers noted in a brief published last Friday. They identified that three companies appeared to be exporting API for molnupiravir – Optimus Drugs Private, Honour Lab, and Maithri Laboratories. Meanwhile, Pfizer and Roche are also racing to develop an antiviral pill for COVID-19, according to Reuters. A New Pandemic Treaty, Revised International Health Regulations, or Both? What is the Actual Roadmap? 02/10/2021 Gian Luca Burci WHO Headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland. The World Health Assembly is set to make a fateful decision in November over whether to negotiate a new international ‘Pandemic Treaty’ to improve future pandemic preparedness and response. However, major players like the United States, backed by some civil society groups, have suggested that revisions of the existing International Health Regulations (IHR) would be a better path. Amidst the hyperbole of oft-heated debate over which route might be easier, quicker or more effective, it’s important to understand that either option will require careful, systematic planning and execution of a process that is oft-misunderstood. At the same time, there are some important technical points that must be kept in mind. WHA agreement to adopt a Pandemic Treaty may have a much more sweeping historical sense, than mere revisions of the existing IHR. But a new treaty will only be enforceable among those member states that have ratified it in what is typically a prolonged process – while any IHR revisions that are agreed to would be applicable to all 196 WHO member states immediately. Ultimately, it is reaching political consensus on the often-charged content of proposed treaty/IHR reforms that matters the most. But to do that, the process also needs careful consideration – and demystification. WHO former legal counsel Gian Luca Burci, Adjunct Professor of international law at the Geneva Graduate Institute, takes apart the procedural issues, and what they mean, ahead of the third working group meeting of member states on the issue, next week. Pandemic Treaty or IHR revisions – exploring the pathways & process In May, the World Health Assembly tasked a Member States’ working group with the critical mission of assessing “the benefits of developing a WHO convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” The Working Group on Strengthening WHO Preparedness and Response to Health Emergencies (WGPR) is now tasked with coming up with a recommendation in time for a WHA special session in November on whether the WHA should establish an intergovernmental process “to draft and negotiate such a convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” Just two months from the deadline, we understand that discussions in the WGPR are moving towards negotiating a new “pandemic treaty” and revising the International Health Regulations (IHR) in parallel after the November WHA – rather than forcing a choice between them. While this would be a welcome compromise, there seems to be some confusion, as well as contradictory positions, about the procedural steps required to pursue either option. Debate is particularly intense over the question of whether amending the IHR or concluding a treaty would be “easier and quicker,” and which option would incentivize more participation and commitment. While the process will eventually depend on a number of, as yet, unpredictable factors, international law and practice point to some likely steps and procedural requirements, which are reviewed here. This is without reference to the potential content of a pandemic treaty or amended IHR – closely related to questions of speed and difficulty of negotiations. This review also does not purport to be exhaustive; more information can be found in the Geneva Graduate Institute’s “Guide to a Pandemic Treaty.” Pandemic Treaty – from negotiation to adoption, ratification & entry into force Launch of the negotiating process Under Article 19 of the WHO Constitution, the WHA can adopt “conventions or agreements with respect to any matter within the competence of the Organization.” The process leading up to a WHO treaty (“treaty,” “convention,” “agreement” are different denominations but do not change the substance) would therefore be launched by a WHA resolution. The resolution could shape negotiations, for example by requesting that certain issues be included in the treaty or given priority. However, that level of prescriptiveness is infrequent in contemporary treaty practice to leave flexibility to the negotiators. Negotiating forum The Health Assembly would establish a dedicated intergovernmental body open to all WHO member states to draft and negotiate the future convention. This step can be articulated in many different ways and there is no single model in international practice. In the case of the WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control (FCTC), for example, the process was subdivided into two parts: 1) a working group was firstly established to discuss possible building blocks of the convention before committing to treaty negotiations and 2) after a green light from WHA, an intergovernmental negotiating body was established. However, in many other cases, a single body (labelled for example an “intergovernmental negotiating committee”) was responsible for the whole preparation and negotiation of the treaty. This occurred, for example, with the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) and later its Kyoto Protocol. WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus delivering the closing speech for the 72nd World Health Assembly in 2019, prior to the COVID-19 pandemic. Negotiating bodies of this nature are invariably open to participation by all member states. In addition, the European Union is a likely invitee with full rights of participation under the rubric of “regional economic integration organizations” (a category that so far includes only the EU). And indeed the EU has already been one of the most vocal advocates of a pandemic treaty. Participation of other non-state actors Beyond member states and possibly the EU, one can expect participation to be extended to other actors identified in the 2016 Framework of Engagement with Non-State Actors, most importantly NGOs, international business associations and philanthropic foundations (the fourth group, academic institutions, are not entitled to participate but are sometimes invited ad hoc as experts). All these actors would participate as “observers” with limited privileges, rather than full negotiators. For example, they usually can only participate in public meetings but are excluded from closed negotiating sessions that often prevail at crucial stages of the process. However, what matters is physical presence at the negotiations to lobby and brief delegates and network with like-minded organizations. Unlike more technical questions such as “one health” and access to pathogen samples, we can expect substantial civil society mobilization and lobbying behind issues such as equity, human rights and access to countermeasures. These considerations are especially relevant if negotiations resume in person; if the sanitary situation still requires online meetings, the process will have to be adapted and the recent sessions of the WHA and the Executive Board offer a blueprint for that. Virtual negotiations of course are less than ideal for all participants. Methods of work – geopolitical representation and the demands of consensus decision-making The body or bodies established by the WHA will have to elect their officers, typically following WHO’s breakdown into six regions. The Assembly can prescribe the make-up of the bureau, as in the case of the WGPR. Appointing the bureau can be a delicate process depending on geopolitical circumstances or competing ambitions. The role of the bureau is not cast in stone but can be decisive for the progress and outcome of work, in particular by working informally behind the scenes to explore options and foster consensus. The bodies concerned will operate under the WHA rules of procedure, but in practice they enjoy considerable discretion in organizing their work. It is customary, and practically a dogma within WHO, that decisions be only taken by consensus without a formal vote. This increases the importance of the process that has to be perceived as fair, legitimate and inclusive to lead to a result that is at least not unacceptable to any state. The requirement of consensus decision-making carries a lot of inertia all the way to the WHA; even though any state can break consensus by formally objecting and requesting a vote, it is in fact a heavy responsibility to do so and it hardly ever happens. Negotiations of long and complex instruments usually require dividing the text, or particularly difficult issues, among subcommittees that work in parallel, formally report to the plenary on their progress and are often coordinated by the bureau. Small delegations have understandable difficulties in managing multiple meetings, and there is an established practice within WHO to avoid more than two parallel meetings. Available UN-system practice, however, shows much flexibility to adapt the organization of work and the mix of formal and informal meetings. Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, WHO Director General, discussing a pandemic treaty in September 2021. Complex WHO intergovernmental negotiations have often been supplemented by intersessional consultations, either on a regional basis or on specific topics. Regional consultations can be particularly effective in reaching common positions and strengthening the negotiating leverage of groups of countries that could otherwise be overpowered individually. Duration and frequency of negotiations are difficult to predict The duration and frequency of treaty negotiations are difficult to predict. The duration of negotiations will depend on a number of factors including the complexity of the issues at hand, the attitude of key countries, the sense of urgency, the diplomatic ability of the bureau, and the intended outcome. A general “framework convention” without detailed and highly prescriptive obligations may be relatively quicker to achieve, but practice shows that even negotiating such instruments requires on average no less than two years. By way of reference, negotiating the UNFCCC took about two years, the FCTC took three years and six negotiating sessions, while its protocol on illicit trade took four years and five sessions. In contrast, negotiating the two IAEA conventions concluded on the heels of the 1986 Chernobyl nuclear accident took just a few months. It is common for the responsible governing body, in our case the WHA, to request progress reports and set a deadline for the conclusion of the negotiations. Even though there are no draconian consequences for not meeting it, it helps focus the negotiations and keep momentum. The frequency of formal meetings usually depends on available financial resources, the capacity of delegations and the secretariat to manage the workload and the calendar of other intergovernmental meetings. One can usually expect no more than two negotiating sessions of 1-2 weeks per year as a maximum. How to get to the initial draft? The initial draft of the treaty is politically and psychologically very important because it inevitably shapes the dynamics of the subsequent negotiations, even for countries opposing it. Even though it is possible for one or more states to come forward with a zero draft text, this is a relatively uncommon step because questions about the motives of the proposing states could affect or derail negotiations. The responsibility to propose a full zero draft therefore can either fall on the chair of the negotiating body (e.g. the FCTC), on the secretariat (e.g. the revised IHR, or in the environmental field the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, drafted by the UNEP Secretariat). An important point in this regard is that a zero draft does not come out of thin air, but is the result of previous consultations or preparatory work. In the case of the IHR, the draft proposed by the secretariat was the culmination of many years of technical work and consultations, thus the text was submitted promptly to negotiations after a round of regional consultations. In the case of the pandemic treaty, so far there has been no real open discussion on its scope and content either in the WHA or the WGPR, and it is unlikely that this will occur before the WHA special session. Consequently, it is foreseeable that the body established by the WHA will devote an initial period to discuss or seek expert input on the possible building blocks of a treaty and their challenges and implications. Given the uncertainties and questions surrounding the recent proposals, it would be counterproductive to try to short-circuit an inclusive and bottom-up process for achieving a quick result at all costs. Adoption of the treaty and next steps The final draft text would be submitted to the WHA for consideration. As noted above, the Assembly will almost certainly adopt the treaty by consensus. In the unlikely event where consensus could not be reached, Article 19 of the Constitution requires a two-thirds majority (calculated on the basis of valid votes excluding abstentions). The virtual World Health Assembly nerve center at WHO’s Geneva headquarters in May 2020. The upcoming WHA Special Session will likely take a similar form. Other steps that can be taken by the WHA will depend on the nature of the treaty and the conclusions of the negotiations. A pandemic treaty will in all probability be a normative instrument establishing its own governance. Relying on precedents including the FCTC, this will include at a minimum a conference of the parties and a secretariat. Initial work on the institutional aspects will require drafting rules of procedure for the conference of the parties and, depending on the institutional arrangements contained in the treaty, financial regulations and a budget. Even though a treaty is a self-contained instrument and its governance will not be part of WHO’s, the latter may end up providing or hosting its secretariat. For all these reasons, the WHA may establish upon the adoption of the treaty a new intergovernmental body to prepare all the foregoing steps and facilitate the work of the first session of the conference of the parties. Signature, ratification and entry into force Multilateral treaties are customarily opened for signature for a defined period of time. What matters for the entry into force of the treaty, however, is reaching the required number of ratifications (or adherence, accession, formal confirmation depending on the final clauses of the treaty) and how fast that will occur. The threshold for entry into force has varied wildly in previous treaties, anywhere between 20 and 60 as an average (it was 40 for the FCTC and its illicit trade protocol). The number agreed upon will in practice depend on a compromise between an early establishment of the new legal regime and the critical mass of states required to make it credible and effective. A review of UN-system treaties shows on average a time gap of between two and four years between adoption and entry into force; the FCTC protocol on illicit trade took six years, probably reflecting its complexity and demands at national level, but the FCTC took only 21 months. A related consideration for the credibility of the treaty will be the attitude of key states, whether and how quickly they will ratify it and whether they will actively oppose it should they choose to remain outside it. A device occasionally used when it is urgent to start applying a treaty is the so-called “provisional application”, whereby contracting parties indicate in the treaty itself or in a separate act (e.g. the WHA resolution adopting a treaty) that they will provisionally implement the treaty pending its entry into force. A classic but atypical example is the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), provisionally applied from 1947 until 1995. I mention this for the sake of completeness, but it is not a common arrangement for self-intuitive sovereignty concerns. Most of the foregoing considerations also apply to the negotiation and conclusion of protocols to the treaty, should it be drafted as a framework convention requiring separate instruments to spell out its obligations. Albeit linked organically to the “mother convention”, protocols are separate treaties in their own right. Certain steps of the negotiations will probably go faster than for the original convention since the latter provides an applicable legal framework. However, the experience of the FCTC protocol – 10 years from beginning of negotiations to entry into force and only 63 parties so far – should induce caution and deter over-optimism about “quick wins” or “low-hanging fruits.” Strategic reflection is required on whether to make the implementation of a possible pandemic treaty depend heavily on the conclusion of separate protocols. A comparison of the processes required for the creation of a pandemic treaty and revising the International Health Regulations. Amending the International Health Regulations – what is similar or different? The step-by-step process for amending the IHR is spelled out in Article 55. Amendments can be proposed by any state party or the WHO Director-General (DG). Given the direction that the WGPR seems to be taking, it is likely that any amendment process will be launched directly by the Assembly, thus shortening this initial step. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen, and been controversial within WHO, well before the COVID-19 pandemic. With the exception of a highly-technical 2014 amendment extending the recognised lifetime of yellow fever vaccines, successive IHR Review Committees [expert bodies appointed by the WHO DG] have advised against amendments, and the WHO Secretariat has also traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. This is due partly to the perceived risk of opening up the entire Regulations to unpredictable and potentially counterproductive revisions that may end up decreasing their credibility and effectiveness. This concern is understandable and legitimate, but, firstly, it applies to any legislative instrument where the risk of unforeseeable outcomes has to be weighed against the need to improve its design and content. Secondly, the WHA can narrow the scope of the amendments by instructing the negotiating body to only deal with specific issues. While this conditionality is infrequent and probably undesirable in the case of treaties, it would be more plausible with regard to the IHR since the Assembly is their parent body and exercises direct oversight functions over them. Similar procedural considerations – but requiring a less steep “learning curve” Most of the procedural considerations involved in the negotiation of a pandemic treaty would apply mutatis mutandis to the amendment of the IHR – and thus are not repeated here. A possible difference concerns the preparatory work preceding and leading to an initial draft of the amendments. The learning curve for a pandemic treaty could be steeper and longer given the absence of an intergovernmental discussion thus far and the lack of familiarity of many delegations. The IHR and its complexities are better known to the public health and foreign affairs officials following WHO affairs, and it is likely that delegations may be willing to move quickly into drafting and negotiations. IHR-specific requirements Article 50 of the IHR provides that the Review Committee shall “make technical recommendations to the Director-General regarding amendments to these Regulations.” The main consideration, time-wise, is whether involving the Review Committee is a compulsory step, since the procedural requirements in the IHR and the way in which they have been implemented by the secretariat so far, are formal and cumbersome and may lead to delays. The second and related consideration is at which stage of the amendment process would the Review Committee intervene? Would it make its recommendations before amendments are drafted, on an initial draft, or rather towards the end of the process? The political implications of those different approaches for the negotiations may be considerable. There are few precedents from which lessons may be learned. The IHR have been amended only once, in 2014, adjusting the requirements for yellow fever vaccination required by some state parties (eg. India) for international travelers arriving from yellow-fever endemic countries (Annex 7). The amendment extended the validity of a well-accepted vaccine from 10 years to lifetime in line with new evidence about the vaccine’s efficacy. An IHR Review Committee was not created for that occasion, setting a precedent. At the same time, the yellow fever vaccine amendment was limited and very technical. It was recommended by the Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on immunization, a dedicated expert group convened by the WHO secretariat, and the WHO Executive Board proposed the amendment to the WHA. In contrast, a broad and substantial amendment of multiple, substantive provisions of the IHR, which might cover sensitive issues around the early warning of outbreaks and WHO’s mandate to investigate and enforce IHR provisions, may be seen as something different legally and politically – warranting the creation of an IHR Review Committee. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen but the WHO Secretariat has traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. The main legal consideration is that the Review Committee is an expert body providing its recommendations to the DG at his request rather than a governance organ partaking of the normative functions of WHO. There can be situations like the one just mentioned, in which that technical input is not necessary or can be provided through different and less time-consuming channels. Moreover, a process initiated by the Executive Board or the WHA is different from a proposal by a member state or the DG. In my view, convening a Review Committee may be politically but not legally necessary. It is indicative in this connection that Article 55 does not mention the Review Committee, which suggests that its participation is not compulsory. Adoption of the amendments and entry into force Article 55 requires that amendments be communicated to state parties at least four months before the opening of the WHA, which may influence the schedule of the negotiating body. As noted above, consensus is the norm in WHO, and that will apply to the adoption of the amendments. In the unlikely event of formal objections, a vote would require a simple majority instead of the two-thirds required for a treaty. The main difference between a pandemic treaty and amendments to the IHR concerns entry into force. Pursuant to Article 22 of the Constitution and Article 59 of the IHR, the latter enter into force for all member states 24 months after the DG’s notification of adoption, except for those member states that either reject the amendments or file a reservation within 18 months from that notification. In case of a reservation, Article 62 provides for a rather complex process to determine whether the reservation is compatible with the object and purpose of the Regulations and can be accepted. The Article 62 procedure makes it very difficult in practice to reject a reservation and, historically, the sole objection that I am aware of was by Australia to the 1969 version of the IHR. Opting out of a regulation (or amendments thereof) is a drastic, highly visible and politically heavy decision that states would probably take only for the most serious reasons. Still, both rejections and successful reservations are possible and would undesirably fragment what should be instead a uniform legal and coordinating framework to achieve global health security. Objections could also create impossibly complex situations, e.g. in case of amendments changing the functions of WHO, because objecting states would remain bound by the different functions enshrined in the original IHR. For these reasons and as noted above with regard to a pandemic treaty, the inclusiveness, fairness and legitimacy of the process are of crucial importance to keep states in the fold even if they are not entirely satisfied of the outcome. Conclusions – both exercises can be more or less difficult, depending on the political atmosphere Among the preliminary conclusions that can be drawn is the fact that the two processes, when compared side-by-side, would be substantially similar. However there are some significant differences which will need careful consideration as well. Significantly, amending the IHR may be faster because: 1) modifying an existing text is presumably easier than negotiating one from scratch, 2) the WHA can define and narrow the scope and purpose of the amendments, and 3) WHO member states are relatively familiar with the Regulations. The need to consult the Review Committee, however, must be clarified – as well as what this might mean for achieving consensus. The timeline for entry into force of a treaty or any IHR amendments may be similar for either of the two options, but the amendments to the IHR would enter into force for all 196 WHO member states. In the case of a new treaty, a subset of countries will be bound by it once it enters into force, but the timeline for all WHO member states to ratify such a new instrument could be much more protracted – and remains unknown. Politically, both exercises can be more or less difficult depending on the political atmosphere, the proposals on the table, the ability of the bureau to build consensus and the myriad other factors characterizing any major multilateral negotiation. In both processes, there is great importance in reaching a real and sustainable consensus. At the same time, joining consensus in the WHA to adopt a pandemic treaty is not necessarily predictive of future ratifications since governments as well as circumstances may change. In both cases, finally, it will be important to maintain momentum but avoid imposing unrealistic timelines for the negotiations. The Independent Panel’s call for concluding a pandemic treaty in six months is an example of an unrealistic goal in this connection. Opting into a treaty requires political will and action, which can be highly appealing to politicians. On the other hand, remaining bound by a revised IHR could also be the positive outcome of political inertia and inaction – that is a country’s reluctance to be seen as opting out. The key questions are what is more politically feasible, and what will build more genuine, sustained political commitment to any improved set of international rules that aim to better govern future outbreaks and reduce pandemic risks. Gian Luca Burci is adjunct professor of international law at the Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies. His areas of expertise are global health law and governance, global health security and the law and practice of international organizations. Between 2005 and 2016 he was Legal Counsel of WHO. Updated on 07.10.2021 with a description of the 2014 IHR amendment on requirements around yellow fever vaccines. Image Credits: Flickr – Guilhem Vellut, Flickr – US Mission Geneva, WHO / Antoine Tardy, WHO, Gian Luca Burci, Wikimedia Commons. Tuberculosis is Here to Stay if We Don’t Mobilise Resources for Diagnoses and Double Fundings, New Data Shows 01/10/2021 Aishwarya Tendolkar Global efforts to eliminate TB have been set back by the COVID-19 pandemic. The COVID-19 pandemic and the consequent diversion of resources toward battling SARS-CoV2 has also set back global efforts to eliminate the world’s second most deadly infectious killer: Tuberculosis, by 2030. Only a doubling of investments next year can pave the way to attainment of the 2030 United Nations Sustainable Development Goals to eliminate the disease, experts and panelists at the Stop TB Partnership said Tuesday. The panel session coincided with the release of new data from a study conducted by the Stop TB Partnership that showed COVID’s impact on TB response this year continues to be as devastating as last year, with 1.2 million fewer people projected to be diagnosed and treated for TB this year, in comparison with 2019. The new estimates, developed in collaboration with USAID, Johns Hopkins University, Avenir Health and Imperial College, are based on data from 27 countries that account for 75 percent of the global TB caseload. That means TB investments for this coming year need to be doubled, in order to meet a 2018-2022 target for diagnosing and treating 40 million people (or 10 million a year), within that four year time frame, the Partnership says. TB kills 4,000 people a day The airborne disease still kills 4,000 people every day, with nearly a quarter of the world’s population estimated to have been infected. Despite being curable and preventable, only an estimated 5.7 million people received treatment for TB in 2020, a decline of 21 percent from the previous year—leaving an estimated 4.3 million people with untreated TB and implying all but certain death for probably half that number, the report showed. A lack of attention to the disease, lack of funding, and a dearth of proper diagnostic tools are responsible, Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership said at a Stop TB briefing Tuesday. “COVID showed that if the government and people are scared, money is not an issue. We are in the middle of a disaster but our attention seems to be in a very wrong place.” Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership. The “orphan disease” does not receive political priority or funding, Obiefuna Austin Arinze, Executive Director of Afro Global Alliance and incoming Vice-Chair of the Stop TB Partnership Board said. At current levels of funding, the world will miss the target set by the United National High-Level Meeting on TB that took place in 2018 for diagnosing and treating 40 million people with TB by 2022. With just 400 days to reach 2022 goals, the diagnostic figure is even more grim for children with TB, Ditiu said. However, with mobilisation of resources – including funding, digital diagnostics and more government-sponsored community interventions – the world could reach the target’s 90% mark – treating some 36 million people, Ditiu said. Annual resource needs and available funding for TB in USD. So why is investing in TB diagnosis and elimination imperative? In simple words, it saves more lives than you would think. “Investing an extra dollar in TB is one of the best dollars spent to help the world,” Dr Bjorn Lomborg, President of the Danish think tank, Copenhagen Consensus, said at the teleconference. According to him, it would only cost US$8.1 billion dollars annually, between now and 2030, to eliminate TB. This investment translates to benefits worth US$348 billion dollars, pegging the benefit-cost ratio at 43. This means that every dollar invested in TB prevention and care yields a return of US$43. But currently, only US$6.5 billion is available annually for TB response globally. Moreover, TB funding has stagnated over the last five years – meaning there are big gaps that need to be overcome now. That’s why, at the UNHLM on TB in 2018, states and non-state actors pledged to commit a total of US$13 billion annually until 2022 to overcome past shortfalls – unfortunately COVID intervened the following year and those pledges were not honored. Some US$13 billion in funding is needed for TB care and prevention per year. TB is traditionally a low GF funding priority – despite a high dependency on Global Fund services in LMICs Despite being curable, preventable, and easily diagnosable, TB sees more deaths (over 1 million annually) than HIV/AIDS and Malaria combined. At the same time, The Global Fund channels only 18 percent of its resources to TB diagnosis and treatment. The remaining 82% is invested in fighting HIV/AIDS, malaria, and more recently, COVID-19 tests and treatments. Although 85% of national TB budgets, on average, are financed by low- and middle-income countries themselves, they remain highly dependent on the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria to fill vital gaps in services. And that adds weight to the Global Fund’s appeals, panelists pointed out. In terms of how those funds should be spent, the World Health Organisation along with the UN Secretary General have outlined priority recommendations to ramp up the TB response, Tereza Kasaeva, Director of WHO’s Global TB Programme said. “Efforts need to be intensified to make these recommendations a reality.” Diagnosis still reliant on less accurate sputum smear microscopy According to WHO, the diagnosis of TB and drug-resistant TB remains a challenge with one-third of people with TB and two-thirds of people with drug-resistant TB not being detected globally. While WHO recommends highly accurate rapid molecular assays as the initial test to diagnose TB, less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool. Only 28 percent of people were diagnosed with MTB using a rapid molecular test in 2019, Ditiu said. This means that nearly three quarters of diagnoses are done using the “clinical” smear microscopy. Smear microscopy, while cost-effective, has a poor track record in diagnosing extra-pulmonary tuberculosis, paediatric tuberculosis, and TB in patients co-infected with HIV and tuberculosis, a paper pointed. “Why don’t we allow people proper diagnostic tools?” she asked, pointing out that an untreated person with TB can transmit the bacteria to nearly 15 people every year. “Now think about this in countries like India with a population of 1.2 billion.” Less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool for TB, despite the existence of highly accurate rapid molecular assays. COVID devastated TB diagnostics To make matters worse, the COVID-19 pandemic devastated the diagnostics investments in TB – whereby existing resources were diverted, and tools like the highly accurate GeneXpert molecular diagnostic platforms were repurposed to diagnose COVID, in the pandemic’s early days. Since then, new rapid COVID diagnostic tests have become widely available, but there has been no significant recovery plan for TB diagnostics put into place, Obiefuna said. The COVID-19 pandemic was not the first time that the health infrastructure for TB was used to tackle other health crises, and particularly those related to airborne diseases, pointed out Cheri Vincent, Chief of USAID’s TB Division, at the meeting. “We saw it [being diverted] for Ebola and airborne influenza,” she said, adding, “If we can’t solve TB, we can’t solve the next airborne pandemic,” she highlighted. In fact, TB doctors were the first to be diverted to tackle the COVID-19 breakout, Ditiu said. The Zambia story, and what it teaches us But not all has been downhill in the fight against TB. Zambia offers an example of a country that has been able to sustain its TB programmes through a combination of domestic funding, government-community partnerships, and diagnostic tools – despite the COVID pandemic. It can provide inspiration for countries battling both diseases at the same time. Already today, Zambia has achieved 89% of its 2022 UNHLM diagnosis and treatment target. Over the past five years, the country invested US$45 million of domestic resources in TB response. “[TB] commodity security is key to achieving our goals,” said Dr. Patrick Lungu, National TB and Leprosy Control Program Manager in Zambia. A ‘TB Situation room’ was created to review TB programmes on a weekly basis to identify issues that may be negatively impacting performance. “We were able to offer more technical support to different levels of the health system – which translates to Zambia envisaging to achieve the UNHLM target in at least two-three key indicators,” Lungu said. Zambia has achieved nearly 89 percent of its UNHLM target so far. Will India achieve its ambitious 2025 TB elimination target? When it comes to countries like India – which bears the heaviest TB burden in the world, the pandemic has slowed-down and diverted efforts to eliminate elimination of TB by 2025 -a huge goal set by the government. According to the Indian Health Ministry’s 2021 Annual Report on Tuberculosis Elimination, reports and notification of confirmed TB diagnoses tumbled 38 percent in March-April 2020 owing to the lockdown. Furthermore, a majority of the country’s TB elimination resources were repurposed for Covid-19. Then just as services were beginning to recoup, a massive second COVID wave hit the country in spring 2021; it remains unclear what dents that made in the progress India had seen toward the end of 2020. In its 2021 official report, the Indian Health Ministry nonetheless suggested that the dedicated Infectious disease hospitals that were established for Covid will contribute “significantly” to future TB Care and management. Despite being scheduled to be a part of Tuesday’s Stop TB Partnership panel, the Indian Health Ministry did not make an appearance – leaving a lack of clarity on trends and progress in 2021. But on a global level, the warning signs are clear. Says Ditui: “we have erased 10-12 years of progress, and are back to 2010-11 levels of TB detection and cases. This becomes all the more alarming with the fact that TB is not a new disease but one that has been around for decades, and has a vaccine. One can only hope that TB receives the undivided effort it needs to be eliminated.” Image Credits: The Global Fund / Evgeny Maloletka, Stop TB Partnership, Dr. Patrick Lungu. Posts navigation Older postsNewer posts This site uses cookies to help give you the best experience on our website. Cookies enable us to collect information that helps us personalise your experience and improve the functionality and performance of our site. By continuing to read our website, we assume you agree to this, otherwise you can adjust your browser settings. Please read our cookie and Privacy Policy. Our Cookies and Privacy Policy Loading Comments... You must be logged in to post a comment.
A New Pandemic Treaty, Revised International Health Regulations, or Both? What is the Actual Roadmap? 02/10/2021 Gian Luca Burci WHO Headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland. The World Health Assembly is set to make a fateful decision in November over whether to negotiate a new international ‘Pandemic Treaty’ to improve future pandemic preparedness and response. However, major players like the United States, backed by some civil society groups, have suggested that revisions of the existing International Health Regulations (IHR) would be a better path. Amidst the hyperbole of oft-heated debate over which route might be easier, quicker or more effective, it’s important to understand that either option will require careful, systematic planning and execution of a process that is oft-misunderstood. At the same time, there are some important technical points that must be kept in mind. WHA agreement to adopt a Pandemic Treaty may have a much more sweeping historical sense, than mere revisions of the existing IHR. But a new treaty will only be enforceable among those member states that have ratified it in what is typically a prolonged process – while any IHR revisions that are agreed to would be applicable to all 196 WHO member states immediately. Ultimately, it is reaching political consensus on the often-charged content of proposed treaty/IHR reforms that matters the most. But to do that, the process also needs careful consideration – and demystification. WHO former legal counsel Gian Luca Burci, Adjunct Professor of international law at the Geneva Graduate Institute, takes apart the procedural issues, and what they mean, ahead of the third working group meeting of member states on the issue, next week. Pandemic Treaty or IHR revisions – exploring the pathways & process In May, the World Health Assembly tasked a Member States’ working group with the critical mission of assessing “the benefits of developing a WHO convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” The Working Group on Strengthening WHO Preparedness and Response to Health Emergencies (WGPR) is now tasked with coming up with a recommendation in time for a WHA special session in November on whether the WHA should establish an intergovernmental process “to draft and negotiate such a convention, agreement or other international instrument on pandemic preparedness and response.” Just two months from the deadline, we understand that discussions in the WGPR are moving towards negotiating a new “pandemic treaty” and revising the International Health Regulations (IHR) in parallel after the November WHA – rather than forcing a choice between them. While this would be a welcome compromise, there seems to be some confusion, as well as contradictory positions, about the procedural steps required to pursue either option. Debate is particularly intense over the question of whether amending the IHR or concluding a treaty would be “easier and quicker,” and which option would incentivize more participation and commitment. While the process will eventually depend on a number of, as yet, unpredictable factors, international law and practice point to some likely steps and procedural requirements, which are reviewed here. This is without reference to the potential content of a pandemic treaty or amended IHR – closely related to questions of speed and difficulty of negotiations. This review also does not purport to be exhaustive; more information can be found in the Geneva Graduate Institute’s “Guide to a Pandemic Treaty.” Pandemic Treaty – from negotiation to adoption, ratification & entry into force Launch of the negotiating process Under Article 19 of the WHO Constitution, the WHA can adopt “conventions or agreements with respect to any matter within the competence of the Organization.” The process leading up to a WHO treaty (“treaty,” “convention,” “agreement” are different denominations but do not change the substance) would therefore be launched by a WHA resolution. The resolution could shape negotiations, for example by requesting that certain issues be included in the treaty or given priority. However, that level of prescriptiveness is infrequent in contemporary treaty practice to leave flexibility to the negotiators. Negotiating forum The Health Assembly would establish a dedicated intergovernmental body open to all WHO member states to draft and negotiate the future convention. This step can be articulated in many different ways and there is no single model in international practice. In the case of the WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control (FCTC), for example, the process was subdivided into two parts: 1) a working group was firstly established to discuss possible building blocks of the convention before committing to treaty negotiations and 2) after a green light from WHA, an intergovernmental negotiating body was established. However, in many other cases, a single body (labelled for example an “intergovernmental negotiating committee”) was responsible for the whole preparation and negotiation of the treaty. This occurred, for example, with the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) and later its Kyoto Protocol. WHO Director-General Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus delivering the closing speech for the 72nd World Health Assembly in 2019, prior to the COVID-19 pandemic. Negotiating bodies of this nature are invariably open to participation by all member states. In addition, the European Union is a likely invitee with full rights of participation under the rubric of “regional economic integration organizations” (a category that so far includes only the EU). And indeed the EU has already been one of the most vocal advocates of a pandemic treaty. Participation of other non-state actors Beyond member states and possibly the EU, one can expect participation to be extended to other actors identified in the 2016 Framework of Engagement with Non-State Actors, most importantly NGOs, international business associations and philanthropic foundations (the fourth group, academic institutions, are not entitled to participate but are sometimes invited ad hoc as experts). All these actors would participate as “observers” with limited privileges, rather than full negotiators. For example, they usually can only participate in public meetings but are excluded from closed negotiating sessions that often prevail at crucial stages of the process. However, what matters is physical presence at the negotiations to lobby and brief delegates and network with like-minded organizations. Unlike more technical questions such as “one health” and access to pathogen samples, we can expect substantial civil society mobilization and lobbying behind issues such as equity, human rights and access to countermeasures. These considerations are especially relevant if negotiations resume in person; if the sanitary situation still requires online meetings, the process will have to be adapted and the recent sessions of the WHA and the Executive Board offer a blueprint for that. Virtual negotiations of course are less than ideal for all participants. Methods of work – geopolitical representation and the demands of consensus decision-making The body or bodies established by the WHA will have to elect their officers, typically following WHO’s breakdown into six regions. The Assembly can prescribe the make-up of the bureau, as in the case of the WGPR. Appointing the bureau can be a delicate process depending on geopolitical circumstances or competing ambitions. The role of the bureau is not cast in stone but can be decisive for the progress and outcome of work, in particular by working informally behind the scenes to explore options and foster consensus. The bodies concerned will operate under the WHA rules of procedure, but in practice they enjoy considerable discretion in organizing their work. It is customary, and practically a dogma within WHO, that decisions be only taken by consensus without a formal vote. This increases the importance of the process that has to be perceived as fair, legitimate and inclusive to lead to a result that is at least not unacceptable to any state. The requirement of consensus decision-making carries a lot of inertia all the way to the WHA; even though any state can break consensus by formally objecting and requesting a vote, it is in fact a heavy responsibility to do so and it hardly ever happens. Negotiations of long and complex instruments usually require dividing the text, or particularly difficult issues, among subcommittees that work in parallel, formally report to the plenary on their progress and are often coordinated by the bureau. Small delegations have understandable difficulties in managing multiple meetings, and there is an established practice within WHO to avoid more than two parallel meetings. Available UN-system practice, however, shows much flexibility to adapt the organization of work and the mix of formal and informal meetings. Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, WHO Director General, discussing a pandemic treaty in September 2021. Complex WHO intergovernmental negotiations have often been supplemented by intersessional consultations, either on a regional basis or on specific topics. Regional consultations can be particularly effective in reaching common positions and strengthening the negotiating leverage of groups of countries that could otherwise be overpowered individually. Duration and frequency of negotiations are difficult to predict The duration and frequency of treaty negotiations are difficult to predict. The duration of negotiations will depend on a number of factors including the complexity of the issues at hand, the attitude of key countries, the sense of urgency, the diplomatic ability of the bureau, and the intended outcome. A general “framework convention” without detailed and highly prescriptive obligations may be relatively quicker to achieve, but practice shows that even negotiating such instruments requires on average no less than two years. By way of reference, negotiating the UNFCCC took about two years, the FCTC took three years and six negotiating sessions, while its protocol on illicit trade took four years and five sessions. In contrast, negotiating the two IAEA conventions concluded on the heels of the 1986 Chernobyl nuclear accident took just a few months. It is common for the responsible governing body, in our case the WHA, to request progress reports and set a deadline for the conclusion of the negotiations. Even though there are no draconian consequences for not meeting it, it helps focus the negotiations and keep momentum. The frequency of formal meetings usually depends on available financial resources, the capacity of delegations and the secretariat to manage the workload and the calendar of other intergovernmental meetings. One can usually expect no more than two negotiating sessions of 1-2 weeks per year as a maximum. How to get to the initial draft? The initial draft of the treaty is politically and psychologically very important because it inevitably shapes the dynamics of the subsequent negotiations, even for countries opposing it. Even though it is possible for one or more states to come forward with a zero draft text, this is a relatively uncommon step because questions about the motives of the proposing states could affect or derail negotiations. The responsibility to propose a full zero draft therefore can either fall on the chair of the negotiating body (e.g. the FCTC), on the secretariat (e.g. the revised IHR, or in the environmental field the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, drafted by the UNEP Secretariat). An important point in this regard is that a zero draft does not come out of thin air, but is the result of previous consultations or preparatory work. In the case of the IHR, the draft proposed by the secretariat was the culmination of many years of technical work and consultations, thus the text was submitted promptly to negotiations after a round of regional consultations. In the case of the pandemic treaty, so far there has been no real open discussion on its scope and content either in the WHA or the WGPR, and it is unlikely that this will occur before the WHA special session. Consequently, it is foreseeable that the body established by the WHA will devote an initial period to discuss or seek expert input on the possible building blocks of a treaty and their challenges and implications. Given the uncertainties and questions surrounding the recent proposals, it would be counterproductive to try to short-circuit an inclusive and bottom-up process for achieving a quick result at all costs. Adoption of the treaty and next steps The final draft text would be submitted to the WHA for consideration. As noted above, the Assembly will almost certainly adopt the treaty by consensus. In the unlikely event where consensus could not be reached, Article 19 of the Constitution requires a two-thirds majority (calculated on the basis of valid votes excluding abstentions). The virtual World Health Assembly nerve center at WHO’s Geneva headquarters in May 2020. The upcoming WHA Special Session will likely take a similar form. Other steps that can be taken by the WHA will depend on the nature of the treaty and the conclusions of the negotiations. A pandemic treaty will in all probability be a normative instrument establishing its own governance. Relying on precedents including the FCTC, this will include at a minimum a conference of the parties and a secretariat. Initial work on the institutional aspects will require drafting rules of procedure for the conference of the parties and, depending on the institutional arrangements contained in the treaty, financial regulations and a budget. Even though a treaty is a self-contained instrument and its governance will not be part of WHO’s, the latter may end up providing or hosting its secretariat. For all these reasons, the WHA may establish upon the adoption of the treaty a new intergovernmental body to prepare all the foregoing steps and facilitate the work of the first session of the conference of the parties. Signature, ratification and entry into force Multilateral treaties are customarily opened for signature for a defined period of time. What matters for the entry into force of the treaty, however, is reaching the required number of ratifications (or adherence, accession, formal confirmation depending on the final clauses of the treaty) and how fast that will occur. The threshold for entry into force has varied wildly in previous treaties, anywhere between 20 and 60 as an average (it was 40 for the FCTC and its illicit trade protocol). The number agreed upon will in practice depend on a compromise between an early establishment of the new legal regime and the critical mass of states required to make it credible and effective. A review of UN-system treaties shows on average a time gap of between two and four years between adoption and entry into force; the FCTC protocol on illicit trade took six years, probably reflecting its complexity and demands at national level, but the FCTC took only 21 months. A related consideration for the credibility of the treaty will be the attitude of key states, whether and how quickly they will ratify it and whether they will actively oppose it should they choose to remain outside it. A device occasionally used when it is urgent to start applying a treaty is the so-called “provisional application”, whereby contracting parties indicate in the treaty itself or in a separate act (e.g. the WHA resolution adopting a treaty) that they will provisionally implement the treaty pending its entry into force. A classic but atypical example is the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), provisionally applied from 1947 until 1995. I mention this for the sake of completeness, but it is not a common arrangement for self-intuitive sovereignty concerns. Most of the foregoing considerations also apply to the negotiation and conclusion of protocols to the treaty, should it be drafted as a framework convention requiring separate instruments to spell out its obligations. Albeit linked organically to the “mother convention”, protocols are separate treaties in their own right. Certain steps of the negotiations will probably go faster than for the original convention since the latter provides an applicable legal framework. However, the experience of the FCTC protocol – 10 years from beginning of negotiations to entry into force and only 63 parties so far – should induce caution and deter over-optimism about “quick wins” or “low-hanging fruits.” Strategic reflection is required on whether to make the implementation of a possible pandemic treaty depend heavily on the conclusion of separate protocols. A comparison of the processes required for the creation of a pandemic treaty and revising the International Health Regulations. Amending the International Health Regulations – what is similar or different? The step-by-step process for amending the IHR is spelled out in Article 55. Amendments can be proposed by any state party or the WHO Director-General (DG). Given the direction that the WGPR seems to be taking, it is likely that any amendment process will be launched directly by the Assembly, thus shortening this initial step. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen, and been controversial within WHO, well before the COVID-19 pandemic. With the exception of a highly-technical 2014 amendment extending the recognised lifetime of yellow fever vaccines, successive IHR Review Committees [expert bodies appointed by the WHO DG] have advised against amendments, and the WHO Secretariat has also traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. This is due partly to the perceived risk of opening up the entire Regulations to unpredictable and potentially counterproductive revisions that may end up decreasing their credibility and effectiveness. This concern is understandable and legitimate, but, firstly, it applies to any legislative instrument where the risk of unforeseeable outcomes has to be weighed against the need to improve its design and content. Secondly, the WHA can narrow the scope of the amendments by instructing the negotiating body to only deal with specific issues. While this conditionality is infrequent and probably undesirable in the case of treaties, it would be more plausible with regard to the IHR since the Assembly is their parent body and exercises direct oversight functions over them. Similar procedural considerations – but requiring a less steep “learning curve” Most of the procedural considerations involved in the negotiation of a pandemic treaty would apply mutatis mutandis to the amendment of the IHR – and thus are not repeated here. A possible difference concerns the preparatory work preceding and leading to an initial draft of the amendments. The learning curve for a pandemic treaty could be steeper and longer given the absence of an intergovernmental discussion thus far and the lack of familiarity of many delegations. The IHR and its complexities are better known to the public health and foreign affairs officials following WHO affairs, and it is likely that delegations may be willing to move quickly into drafting and negotiations. IHR-specific requirements Article 50 of the IHR provides that the Review Committee shall “make technical recommendations to the Director-General regarding amendments to these Regulations.” The main consideration, time-wise, is whether involving the Review Committee is a compulsory step, since the procedural requirements in the IHR and the way in which they have been implemented by the secretariat so far, are formal and cumbersome and may lead to delays. The second and related consideration is at which stage of the amendment process would the Review Committee intervene? Would it make its recommendations before amendments are drafted, on an initial draft, or rather towards the end of the process? The political implications of those different approaches for the negotiations may be considerable. There are few precedents from which lessons may be learned. The IHR have been amended only once, in 2014, adjusting the requirements for yellow fever vaccination required by some state parties (eg. India) for international travelers arriving from yellow-fever endemic countries (Annex 7). The amendment extended the validity of a well-accepted vaccine from 10 years to lifetime in line with new evidence about the vaccine’s efficacy. An IHR Review Committee was not created for that occasion, setting a precedent. At the same time, the yellow fever vaccine amendment was limited and very technical. It was recommended by the Strategic Advisory Group of Experts on immunization, a dedicated expert group convened by the WHO secretariat, and the WHO Executive Board proposed the amendment to the WHA. In contrast, a broad and substantial amendment of multiple, substantive provisions of the IHR, which might cover sensitive issues around the early warning of outbreaks and WHO’s mandate to investigate and enforce IHR provisions, may be seen as something different legally and politically – warranting the creation of an IHR Review Committee. The possibility of amending the IHR has arisen but the WHO Secretariat has traditionally been reluctant to move in this direction. The main legal consideration is that the Review Committee is an expert body providing its recommendations to the DG at his request rather than a governance organ partaking of the normative functions of WHO. There can be situations like the one just mentioned, in which that technical input is not necessary or can be provided through different and less time-consuming channels. Moreover, a process initiated by the Executive Board or the WHA is different from a proposal by a member state or the DG. In my view, convening a Review Committee may be politically but not legally necessary. It is indicative in this connection that Article 55 does not mention the Review Committee, which suggests that its participation is not compulsory. Adoption of the amendments and entry into force Article 55 requires that amendments be communicated to state parties at least four months before the opening of the WHA, which may influence the schedule of the negotiating body. As noted above, consensus is the norm in WHO, and that will apply to the adoption of the amendments. In the unlikely event of formal objections, a vote would require a simple majority instead of the two-thirds required for a treaty. The main difference between a pandemic treaty and amendments to the IHR concerns entry into force. Pursuant to Article 22 of the Constitution and Article 59 of the IHR, the latter enter into force for all member states 24 months after the DG’s notification of adoption, except for those member states that either reject the amendments or file a reservation within 18 months from that notification. In case of a reservation, Article 62 provides for a rather complex process to determine whether the reservation is compatible with the object and purpose of the Regulations and can be accepted. The Article 62 procedure makes it very difficult in practice to reject a reservation and, historically, the sole objection that I am aware of was by Australia to the 1969 version of the IHR. Opting out of a regulation (or amendments thereof) is a drastic, highly visible and politically heavy decision that states would probably take only for the most serious reasons. Still, both rejections and successful reservations are possible and would undesirably fragment what should be instead a uniform legal and coordinating framework to achieve global health security. Objections could also create impossibly complex situations, e.g. in case of amendments changing the functions of WHO, because objecting states would remain bound by the different functions enshrined in the original IHR. For these reasons and as noted above with regard to a pandemic treaty, the inclusiveness, fairness and legitimacy of the process are of crucial importance to keep states in the fold even if they are not entirely satisfied of the outcome. Conclusions – both exercises can be more or less difficult, depending on the political atmosphere Among the preliminary conclusions that can be drawn is the fact that the two processes, when compared side-by-side, would be substantially similar. However there are some significant differences which will need careful consideration as well. Significantly, amending the IHR may be faster because: 1) modifying an existing text is presumably easier than negotiating one from scratch, 2) the WHA can define and narrow the scope and purpose of the amendments, and 3) WHO member states are relatively familiar with the Regulations. The need to consult the Review Committee, however, must be clarified – as well as what this might mean for achieving consensus. The timeline for entry into force of a treaty or any IHR amendments may be similar for either of the two options, but the amendments to the IHR would enter into force for all 196 WHO member states. In the case of a new treaty, a subset of countries will be bound by it once it enters into force, but the timeline for all WHO member states to ratify such a new instrument could be much more protracted – and remains unknown. Politically, both exercises can be more or less difficult depending on the political atmosphere, the proposals on the table, the ability of the bureau to build consensus and the myriad other factors characterizing any major multilateral negotiation. In both processes, there is great importance in reaching a real and sustainable consensus. At the same time, joining consensus in the WHA to adopt a pandemic treaty is not necessarily predictive of future ratifications since governments as well as circumstances may change. In both cases, finally, it will be important to maintain momentum but avoid imposing unrealistic timelines for the negotiations. The Independent Panel’s call for concluding a pandemic treaty in six months is an example of an unrealistic goal in this connection. Opting into a treaty requires political will and action, which can be highly appealing to politicians. On the other hand, remaining bound by a revised IHR could also be the positive outcome of political inertia and inaction – that is a country’s reluctance to be seen as opting out. The key questions are what is more politically feasible, and what will build more genuine, sustained political commitment to any improved set of international rules that aim to better govern future outbreaks and reduce pandemic risks. Gian Luca Burci is adjunct professor of international law at the Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies. His areas of expertise are global health law and governance, global health security and the law and practice of international organizations. Between 2005 and 2016 he was Legal Counsel of WHO. Updated on 07.10.2021 with a description of the 2014 IHR amendment on requirements around yellow fever vaccines. Image Credits: Flickr – Guilhem Vellut, Flickr – US Mission Geneva, WHO / Antoine Tardy, WHO, Gian Luca Burci, Wikimedia Commons. Tuberculosis is Here to Stay if We Don’t Mobilise Resources for Diagnoses and Double Fundings, New Data Shows 01/10/2021 Aishwarya Tendolkar Global efforts to eliminate TB have been set back by the COVID-19 pandemic. The COVID-19 pandemic and the consequent diversion of resources toward battling SARS-CoV2 has also set back global efforts to eliminate the world’s second most deadly infectious killer: Tuberculosis, by 2030. Only a doubling of investments next year can pave the way to attainment of the 2030 United Nations Sustainable Development Goals to eliminate the disease, experts and panelists at the Stop TB Partnership said Tuesday. The panel session coincided with the release of new data from a study conducted by the Stop TB Partnership that showed COVID’s impact on TB response this year continues to be as devastating as last year, with 1.2 million fewer people projected to be diagnosed and treated for TB this year, in comparison with 2019. The new estimates, developed in collaboration with USAID, Johns Hopkins University, Avenir Health and Imperial College, are based on data from 27 countries that account for 75 percent of the global TB caseload. That means TB investments for this coming year need to be doubled, in order to meet a 2018-2022 target for diagnosing and treating 40 million people (or 10 million a year), within that four year time frame, the Partnership says. TB kills 4,000 people a day The airborne disease still kills 4,000 people every day, with nearly a quarter of the world’s population estimated to have been infected. Despite being curable and preventable, only an estimated 5.7 million people received treatment for TB in 2020, a decline of 21 percent from the previous year—leaving an estimated 4.3 million people with untreated TB and implying all but certain death for probably half that number, the report showed. A lack of attention to the disease, lack of funding, and a dearth of proper diagnostic tools are responsible, Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership said at a Stop TB briefing Tuesday. “COVID showed that if the government and people are scared, money is not an issue. We are in the middle of a disaster but our attention seems to be in a very wrong place.” Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership. The “orphan disease” does not receive political priority or funding, Obiefuna Austin Arinze, Executive Director of Afro Global Alliance and incoming Vice-Chair of the Stop TB Partnership Board said. At current levels of funding, the world will miss the target set by the United National High-Level Meeting on TB that took place in 2018 for diagnosing and treating 40 million people with TB by 2022. With just 400 days to reach 2022 goals, the diagnostic figure is even more grim for children with TB, Ditiu said. However, with mobilisation of resources – including funding, digital diagnostics and more government-sponsored community interventions – the world could reach the target’s 90% mark – treating some 36 million people, Ditiu said. Annual resource needs and available funding for TB in USD. So why is investing in TB diagnosis and elimination imperative? In simple words, it saves more lives than you would think. “Investing an extra dollar in TB is one of the best dollars spent to help the world,” Dr Bjorn Lomborg, President of the Danish think tank, Copenhagen Consensus, said at the teleconference. According to him, it would only cost US$8.1 billion dollars annually, between now and 2030, to eliminate TB. This investment translates to benefits worth US$348 billion dollars, pegging the benefit-cost ratio at 43. This means that every dollar invested in TB prevention and care yields a return of US$43. But currently, only US$6.5 billion is available annually for TB response globally. Moreover, TB funding has stagnated over the last five years – meaning there are big gaps that need to be overcome now. That’s why, at the UNHLM on TB in 2018, states and non-state actors pledged to commit a total of US$13 billion annually until 2022 to overcome past shortfalls – unfortunately COVID intervened the following year and those pledges were not honored. Some US$13 billion in funding is needed for TB care and prevention per year. TB is traditionally a low GF funding priority – despite a high dependency on Global Fund services in LMICs Despite being curable, preventable, and easily diagnosable, TB sees more deaths (over 1 million annually) than HIV/AIDS and Malaria combined. At the same time, The Global Fund channels only 18 percent of its resources to TB diagnosis and treatment. The remaining 82% is invested in fighting HIV/AIDS, malaria, and more recently, COVID-19 tests and treatments. Although 85% of national TB budgets, on average, are financed by low- and middle-income countries themselves, they remain highly dependent on the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria to fill vital gaps in services. And that adds weight to the Global Fund’s appeals, panelists pointed out. In terms of how those funds should be spent, the World Health Organisation along with the UN Secretary General have outlined priority recommendations to ramp up the TB response, Tereza Kasaeva, Director of WHO’s Global TB Programme said. “Efforts need to be intensified to make these recommendations a reality.” Diagnosis still reliant on less accurate sputum smear microscopy According to WHO, the diagnosis of TB and drug-resistant TB remains a challenge with one-third of people with TB and two-thirds of people with drug-resistant TB not being detected globally. While WHO recommends highly accurate rapid molecular assays as the initial test to diagnose TB, less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool. Only 28 percent of people were diagnosed with MTB using a rapid molecular test in 2019, Ditiu said. This means that nearly three quarters of diagnoses are done using the “clinical” smear microscopy. Smear microscopy, while cost-effective, has a poor track record in diagnosing extra-pulmonary tuberculosis, paediatric tuberculosis, and TB in patients co-infected with HIV and tuberculosis, a paper pointed. “Why don’t we allow people proper diagnostic tools?” she asked, pointing out that an untreated person with TB can transmit the bacteria to nearly 15 people every year. “Now think about this in countries like India with a population of 1.2 billion.” Less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool for TB, despite the existence of highly accurate rapid molecular assays. COVID devastated TB diagnostics To make matters worse, the COVID-19 pandemic devastated the diagnostics investments in TB – whereby existing resources were diverted, and tools like the highly accurate GeneXpert molecular diagnostic platforms were repurposed to diagnose COVID, in the pandemic’s early days. Since then, new rapid COVID diagnostic tests have become widely available, but there has been no significant recovery plan for TB diagnostics put into place, Obiefuna said. The COVID-19 pandemic was not the first time that the health infrastructure for TB was used to tackle other health crises, and particularly those related to airborne diseases, pointed out Cheri Vincent, Chief of USAID’s TB Division, at the meeting. “We saw it [being diverted] for Ebola and airborne influenza,” she said, adding, “If we can’t solve TB, we can’t solve the next airborne pandemic,” she highlighted. In fact, TB doctors were the first to be diverted to tackle the COVID-19 breakout, Ditiu said. The Zambia story, and what it teaches us But not all has been downhill in the fight against TB. Zambia offers an example of a country that has been able to sustain its TB programmes through a combination of domestic funding, government-community partnerships, and diagnostic tools – despite the COVID pandemic. It can provide inspiration for countries battling both diseases at the same time. Already today, Zambia has achieved 89% of its 2022 UNHLM diagnosis and treatment target. Over the past five years, the country invested US$45 million of domestic resources in TB response. “[TB] commodity security is key to achieving our goals,” said Dr. Patrick Lungu, National TB and Leprosy Control Program Manager in Zambia. A ‘TB Situation room’ was created to review TB programmes on a weekly basis to identify issues that may be negatively impacting performance. “We were able to offer more technical support to different levels of the health system – which translates to Zambia envisaging to achieve the UNHLM target in at least two-three key indicators,” Lungu said. Zambia has achieved nearly 89 percent of its UNHLM target so far. Will India achieve its ambitious 2025 TB elimination target? When it comes to countries like India – which bears the heaviest TB burden in the world, the pandemic has slowed-down and diverted efforts to eliminate elimination of TB by 2025 -a huge goal set by the government. According to the Indian Health Ministry’s 2021 Annual Report on Tuberculosis Elimination, reports and notification of confirmed TB diagnoses tumbled 38 percent in March-April 2020 owing to the lockdown. Furthermore, a majority of the country’s TB elimination resources were repurposed for Covid-19. Then just as services were beginning to recoup, a massive second COVID wave hit the country in spring 2021; it remains unclear what dents that made in the progress India had seen toward the end of 2020. In its 2021 official report, the Indian Health Ministry nonetheless suggested that the dedicated Infectious disease hospitals that were established for Covid will contribute “significantly” to future TB Care and management. Despite being scheduled to be a part of Tuesday’s Stop TB Partnership panel, the Indian Health Ministry did not make an appearance – leaving a lack of clarity on trends and progress in 2021. But on a global level, the warning signs are clear. Says Ditui: “we have erased 10-12 years of progress, and are back to 2010-11 levels of TB detection and cases. This becomes all the more alarming with the fact that TB is not a new disease but one that has been around for decades, and has a vaccine. One can only hope that TB receives the undivided effort it needs to be eliminated.” Image Credits: The Global Fund / Evgeny Maloletka, Stop TB Partnership, Dr. Patrick Lungu. Posts navigation Older postsNewer posts This site uses cookies to help give you the best experience on our website. Cookies enable us to collect information that helps us personalise your experience and improve the functionality and performance of our site. By continuing to read our website, we assume you agree to this, otherwise you can adjust your browser settings. Please read our cookie and Privacy Policy. Our Cookies and Privacy Policy
Tuberculosis is Here to Stay if We Don’t Mobilise Resources for Diagnoses and Double Fundings, New Data Shows 01/10/2021 Aishwarya Tendolkar Global efforts to eliminate TB have been set back by the COVID-19 pandemic. The COVID-19 pandemic and the consequent diversion of resources toward battling SARS-CoV2 has also set back global efforts to eliminate the world’s second most deadly infectious killer: Tuberculosis, by 2030. Only a doubling of investments next year can pave the way to attainment of the 2030 United Nations Sustainable Development Goals to eliminate the disease, experts and panelists at the Stop TB Partnership said Tuesday. The panel session coincided with the release of new data from a study conducted by the Stop TB Partnership that showed COVID’s impact on TB response this year continues to be as devastating as last year, with 1.2 million fewer people projected to be diagnosed and treated for TB this year, in comparison with 2019. The new estimates, developed in collaboration with USAID, Johns Hopkins University, Avenir Health and Imperial College, are based on data from 27 countries that account for 75 percent of the global TB caseload. That means TB investments for this coming year need to be doubled, in order to meet a 2018-2022 target for diagnosing and treating 40 million people (or 10 million a year), within that four year time frame, the Partnership says. TB kills 4,000 people a day The airborne disease still kills 4,000 people every day, with nearly a quarter of the world’s population estimated to have been infected. Despite being curable and preventable, only an estimated 5.7 million people received treatment for TB in 2020, a decline of 21 percent from the previous year—leaving an estimated 4.3 million people with untreated TB and implying all but certain death for probably half that number, the report showed. A lack of attention to the disease, lack of funding, and a dearth of proper diagnostic tools are responsible, Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership said at a Stop TB briefing Tuesday. “COVID showed that if the government and people are scared, money is not an issue. We are in the middle of a disaster but our attention seems to be in a very wrong place.” Dr. Lucica Ditiu, Executive Director of the Stop TB Partnership. The “orphan disease” does not receive political priority or funding, Obiefuna Austin Arinze, Executive Director of Afro Global Alliance and incoming Vice-Chair of the Stop TB Partnership Board said. At current levels of funding, the world will miss the target set by the United National High-Level Meeting on TB that took place in 2018 for diagnosing and treating 40 million people with TB by 2022. With just 400 days to reach 2022 goals, the diagnostic figure is even more grim for children with TB, Ditiu said. However, with mobilisation of resources – including funding, digital diagnostics and more government-sponsored community interventions – the world could reach the target’s 90% mark – treating some 36 million people, Ditiu said. Annual resource needs and available funding for TB in USD. So why is investing in TB diagnosis and elimination imperative? In simple words, it saves more lives than you would think. “Investing an extra dollar in TB is one of the best dollars spent to help the world,” Dr Bjorn Lomborg, President of the Danish think tank, Copenhagen Consensus, said at the teleconference. According to him, it would only cost US$8.1 billion dollars annually, between now and 2030, to eliminate TB. This investment translates to benefits worth US$348 billion dollars, pegging the benefit-cost ratio at 43. This means that every dollar invested in TB prevention and care yields a return of US$43. But currently, only US$6.5 billion is available annually for TB response globally. Moreover, TB funding has stagnated over the last five years – meaning there are big gaps that need to be overcome now. That’s why, at the UNHLM on TB in 2018, states and non-state actors pledged to commit a total of US$13 billion annually until 2022 to overcome past shortfalls – unfortunately COVID intervened the following year and those pledges were not honored. Some US$13 billion in funding is needed for TB care and prevention per year. TB is traditionally a low GF funding priority – despite a high dependency on Global Fund services in LMICs Despite being curable, preventable, and easily diagnosable, TB sees more deaths (over 1 million annually) than HIV/AIDS and Malaria combined. At the same time, The Global Fund channels only 18 percent of its resources to TB diagnosis and treatment. The remaining 82% is invested in fighting HIV/AIDS, malaria, and more recently, COVID-19 tests and treatments. Although 85% of national TB budgets, on average, are financed by low- and middle-income countries themselves, they remain highly dependent on the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria to fill vital gaps in services. And that adds weight to the Global Fund’s appeals, panelists pointed out. In terms of how those funds should be spent, the World Health Organisation along with the UN Secretary General have outlined priority recommendations to ramp up the TB response, Tereza Kasaeva, Director of WHO’s Global TB Programme said. “Efforts need to be intensified to make these recommendations a reality.” Diagnosis still reliant on less accurate sputum smear microscopy According to WHO, the diagnosis of TB and drug-resistant TB remains a challenge with one-third of people with TB and two-thirds of people with drug-resistant TB not being detected globally. While WHO recommends highly accurate rapid molecular assays as the initial test to diagnose TB, less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool. Only 28 percent of people were diagnosed with MTB using a rapid molecular test in 2019, Ditiu said. This means that nearly three quarters of diagnoses are done using the “clinical” smear microscopy. Smear microscopy, while cost-effective, has a poor track record in diagnosing extra-pulmonary tuberculosis, paediatric tuberculosis, and TB in patients co-infected with HIV and tuberculosis, a paper pointed. “Why don’t we allow people proper diagnostic tools?” she asked, pointing out that an untreated person with TB can transmit the bacteria to nearly 15 people every year. “Now think about this in countries like India with a population of 1.2 billion.” Less reliable sputum smear microscopy remains the dominant diagnostic tool for TB, despite the existence of highly accurate rapid molecular assays. COVID devastated TB diagnostics To make matters worse, the COVID-19 pandemic devastated the diagnostics investments in TB – whereby existing resources were diverted, and tools like the highly accurate GeneXpert molecular diagnostic platforms were repurposed to diagnose COVID, in the pandemic’s early days. Since then, new rapid COVID diagnostic tests have become widely available, but there has been no significant recovery plan for TB diagnostics put into place, Obiefuna said. The COVID-19 pandemic was not the first time that the health infrastructure for TB was used to tackle other health crises, and particularly those related to airborne diseases, pointed out Cheri Vincent, Chief of USAID’s TB Division, at the meeting. “We saw it [being diverted] for Ebola and airborne influenza,” she said, adding, “If we can’t solve TB, we can’t solve the next airborne pandemic,” she highlighted. In fact, TB doctors were the first to be diverted to tackle the COVID-19 breakout, Ditiu said. The Zambia story, and what it teaches us But not all has been downhill in the fight against TB. Zambia offers an example of a country that has been able to sustain its TB programmes through a combination of domestic funding, government-community partnerships, and diagnostic tools – despite the COVID pandemic. It can provide inspiration for countries battling both diseases at the same time. Already today, Zambia has achieved 89% of its 2022 UNHLM diagnosis and treatment target. Over the past five years, the country invested US$45 million of domestic resources in TB response. “[TB] commodity security is key to achieving our goals,” said Dr. Patrick Lungu, National TB and Leprosy Control Program Manager in Zambia. A ‘TB Situation room’ was created to review TB programmes on a weekly basis to identify issues that may be negatively impacting performance. “We were able to offer more technical support to different levels of the health system – which translates to Zambia envisaging to achieve the UNHLM target in at least two-three key indicators,” Lungu said. Zambia has achieved nearly 89 percent of its UNHLM target so far. Will India achieve its ambitious 2025 TB elimination target? When it comes to countries like India – which bears the heaviest TB burden in the world, the pandemic has slowed-down and diverted efforts to eliminate elimination of TB by 2025 -a huge goal set by the government. According to the Indian Health Ministry’s 2021 Annual Report on Tuberculosis Elimination, reports and notification of confirmed TB diagnoses tumbled 38 percent in March-April 2020 owing to the lockdown. Furthermore, a majority of the country’s TB elimination resources were repurposed for Covid-19. Then just as services were beginning to recoup, a massive second COVID wave hit the country in spring 2021; it remains unclear what dents that made in the progress India had seen toward the end of 2020. In its 2021 official report, the Indian Health Ministry nonetheless suggested that the dedicated Infectious disease hospitals that were established for Covid will contribute “significantly” to future TB Care and management. Despite being scheduled to be a part of Tuesday’s Stop TB Partnership panel, the Indian Health Ministry did not make an appearance – leaving a lack of clarity on trends and progress in 2021. But on a global level, the warning signs are clear. Says Ditui: “we have erased 10-12 years of progress, and are back to 2010-11 levels of TB detection and cases. This becomes all the more alarming with the fact that TB is not a new disease but one that has been around for decades, and has a vaccine. One can only hope that TB receives the undivided effort it needs to be eliminated.” Image Credits: The Global Fund / Evgeny Maloletka, Stop TB Partnership, Dr. Patrick Lungu. Posts navigation Older postsNewer posts